Home

OpenOffice.org OpenOffice - 3.3 Getting Started Guide

1. ssssssssesseesseesseesseesreereresrreseresersseesseesseeseee 313 Saving Calc spreadsheets aS web PaGESS ccccececececescncecececsecececeseesececensecensensen 317 Saving Impress presentations AS WED PAGES cccecececcccscececensensencecsecseceeceeseesen 317 Saving Draw documents AS WED PaGEG cccccecscececencecececesencececenseseceseeseesensensen 321 6 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Chapter 13 Cettina Me ie SIGHS i with tS16106 ce eee a ene eee ee a hr ee core ene hen emer en er te 322 US A EE D T o AEN A E T ASO E OE A E ON EE E O E NE a23 E T a E EE EE 328 Sometimes the macro recorder fAilS ccc cesses eccececececencnsecencnsececesenseceeseesensen JJA Teano e A E o a TEPE NIE P E P E E EEE E TE A E O TE EEE 330 How TOTA gs ci veces i EUERE EEE EEEO 338 eE E e EE TE E E AA A EEE E E EE E E EA T E T 342 Writing macros without the recordor cdc ccreessceeicaresnnieracantusitned std cermenianeseidietetonase 342 atog mor n orna O sorire rE EA AEA AEI OENE 343 Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice Org esessssssresseesseesseesrerseressersereserssersseresersseeseereessereeeeess 345 E O E a A E AAE 346 Customizing menu content sssscsssssecessseresssecreesssecesseecessseecessssssssssssseseseseeeeeeeees 346 a O ETE E 349 Assigning REC O10 S810 NEL lt oh ko ee een ete ene eink NEERA ny Seer EEE E 399 Assigning Macros to GV CMI 5 canes ircrsasenisiiamaconssieomarewseremaventeur
2. _ OpenOffice org 3 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Copyright This document is Copyright 2005 2010 by its contributors as listed below You may distribute it and or modify it under the terms of either the GNU General Public License http www gnu org licenses gpl html version 3 or later or the Creative Commons Attribution License http creativecommons org licenses by 3 0 version 3 0 or later Contributors Jean Hollis Weber Magnus Adielsson Richard Barnes Chris Bonde Daniel Carrera Richard Detwiler Laurent Duperval Regina Henschel Richard Holt Rachel Kartch Jared Kobos Peter Kupfer Dan Lewis Michel Pinquier Carol Roberts Hazel Russman Robert Scott Janet Swisher Alex Thurgood Claire Wood Feedback Michele Zarri Thomas Astleitner Agnes Belzunce Nicole Cairns JiHui Choi Alexander Noel Dunne spencer E Harpe Peter Hillier Brook John Kane Stefan A Keel Michael Kotsarinis Ian Laurenson Alan Madden Andrew Pitonyak Iain Roberts Gary Schnabl Joe Sellman Jim Taylor Barbara M Tobias Linda Worthington Please direct any comments or suggestions about this document to authors documentation openoffice org Publication date and software version Published 30 November 2010 Based on OpenOffice org 3 3 You can download an editable version of this document from http oooauthors org english userguide3 published Contents Chapter 1 introducing OPen esnie eee een nee ee
3. 350 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 2 The Add Commands dialog is the same as for adding commands to menus Figure 316 Select a category and then the command and click Add The dialog remains open so you can select several commands When you have finished adding commands click Close If you insert an item which does not have an associated icon the toolbar will display the full name of the item the next section describes how to choose an icon for a toolbar command 3 Back on the Customize dialog you can use the up and down arrow buttons to arrange the commands in your preferred sequence 4 When you are done making changes click OK to save Choosing icons for toolbar commands Toolbar buttons usually have icons not words on them but not all of the commands have associated icons To choose an icon for a command select the command and click Modify gt Change icon On the Change Icon dialog you can scroll through the available icons select one and click OK to assign it to the command Change Icon aa W ff The size of anicon should be 16x16 pixel to achieve best quality Different sized icons will be scaled automatically Z Figure 318 Change Icon dialog To use a custom icon create it in a graphics program and import it into OOo by clicking the Import button on the Change Icon dialog Custom icons must be 16 x 16 or 26 x 26 pixels in size and cannot contain more than 256 colors Example
4. Apply color scheme from document Use browser colors Use custom color scheme Hyperlink Hyperlink Active Link Visited Link 9 Click Create to generate the HTML files If this is a new design a small dialog pops up If you might want to reuse this design you can give it a name and save it Otherwise click Do Not Save Name HTML Design Do Not Save Saving Draw documents as web pages Exporting drawings from OpenOffice org s Draw application is similar to exporting a presentation from Impress Choose File gt Export and select HTML Document as the file type When using the wizard you can choose to create the web page at any time by clicking the Create button Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages 321 OpenOffice org 3 Chapter 1 3 Getting Started with Macros Using the Macro Recorder Your first macros A macro is a Saved sequence of commands or keystrokes that are stored for later use An example of a simple macro is one that types your address The OpenOffice org macro language is very flexible allowing automation of both simple and complex tasks Macros are especially useful to repeat a task the same way over and over again OpenOffice org macros are usually written in a language called StarBasic or just abbreviated Basic Although you can learn Basic and write macros there is a steep learning curve to writing macros from scratch The usual methods for a beginner ar
5. 132 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Autoformatting cells and sheets You can use the AutoFormat feature to quickly apply a set of cell formats to a sheet or a selected cell range 1 Select the cells including the column and row headers that you want to format 2 Choose Format gt AutoFormat The AutoFormat feature can only be applied if the selected set of cells Note consist of at least 3 columns and 3 rows and includes the column and row headers AutoFormat lack 1 Black 2 Blue Brown Currency Currency 3D Currency Gray Currency Lavender Currency Turquoise Formatting Number format Font Alignment Borders Pattern AutoFit width and height Figure 120 Choosing an AutoFormat 3 To select which properties number format font alignment borders pattern autofit width and height to include in an AutoFormat click More Select or deselect the required options 4 Click OK If you do not see any change in color of the cell contents choose View gt Value Highlighting from the menu bar Defining a new AutoFormat You can define a new AutoFormat that is available to all spreadsheets 1 Format a sheet in the style for the new AutoFormat 2 Choose Edit gt Select All 3 Choose Format gt AutoFormat The Add button is now active 4 Click Add 5 In the Name box of the Add AutoFormat dialog type a meaningful name for the new format 6 Click OK to save The n
6. Automatic Formatting the cell borders To add a border to a cell or group of selected cells click on the Borders icon on the formatting toolbar and select one of the border options displayed in the palette To quickly choose a line style and color for the borders of a cell click the small arrows next to the Line Style and Line Color icons on the Formatting toolbar In each case a palette of choices is displayed For more controls including the spacing between the cell borders and the text use the Borders tab of the Format Cells dialog There you can also define a shadow See Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in Calc of the Calc Guide for details The cell border properties apply to a cell and can only be changed if you are editing that cell For example if cell C3 has a top border Note which would be equivalent visually to a bottom border on C2 that border can only be removed by selecting C3 It cannot be removed in C2 Formatting the cell background To quickly choose a background color for a cell click the small arrow next to the Background Color icon on the Formatting toolbar A palette of color choices similar to the Font Color palette is displayed To define custom colors use Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Colors See Chapter 2 for more information You can also use the Background tab of the Format Cells dialog See Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in Calc of the Calc Guide for details
7. Impress is OpenOffice org s slide show presentations program You can create Slides that contain many different elements including text bulleted and numbered lists tables charts clip art and a wide range of graphic objects Impress also includes a spelling checker a thesaurus prepackaged text styles and attractive background styles This chapter includes instructions screenshots and hints to guide you through the Impress environment while designing the easier presentations Although more difficult designs are mentioned throughout this chapter explanations for creating them are in the Impress Guide If you have a working knowledge of how to create slide shows we recommend you use the Impress Guide for your source of information To use Impress for more than very simple slide shows requires some knowledge of the elements which the slides contain Slides containing text use styles to determine the appearance of that text Graphic objects are created the same way that drawings are created in Draw For this reason we recommend that you also study Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates and Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw in this book You may also wish to consult the Draw Guide for details Starting Impress You can start Impress in several ways e From the OOo Start Center if no component is open e From the system menu or the OOo Quickstarter Details vary with your operating system see Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice
8. Mail Merge Wizard Steps Select starting document for the mail merge 1 Select starting document Select the document upon which to base the mail merge document 2 Select document type Use the current document 3 Insert address block C Create a new document C Start from existing document C Start from a template pO Figure 277 Select starting document 2 On the second page select E mail message and click Next Mail Merge Wizard Steps Select a document type 1 Select starting document what type of document do you wank bo create 2 Select document type Letter 3 Select address list E mail message 4 Create salutation E Mail Message Send e mail messages to a group of recipients The e mail messag e mail messages can be personalized For each recipient Figure 278 Select document type 3 On the third page click the Select Address List button Select the required address list even if only one is shown and then click OK If the address list you need is not shown here you can click Add to find it and add it to the list Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 285 Steps Insert address block 1 Select starting document 1 Select the address list containing the address data Select Address List vou want bo use This data is needed to create the 2 Select document type address block 3 Select address list 4 Create salutation Select Address List Select an address
9. Styles and Formatting Complimentary close New Style from Selection Default terete te Ot First line indent Update Style Hanging indent Load Styles Heading Figure 48 Updating a style from a selection Using AutoUpdate AutoUpdate applies to paragraph and frame styles only If the AutoUpdate option is selected on the Organizer page of the Paragraph Style or Frame Style dialog applying direct formatting to a paragraph or frame using this style in your document automatically updates the style itself Ti If you are in the habit of manually overriding styles in your document Ip be sure that AutoUpdate is not enabled Updating styles from a document or template You can update styles by copying or loading them from a template or another document See Copying and moving styles on page 62 60 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Creating new custom styles You may want to add some new styles You can do this in two ways e Creating a new style using the Style dialog e Creating a new style from a selection Creating a new style using the Style dialog To create a new style using the Style dialog right click in the Styles and Formatting window and select New from the pop up menu If you want your new style to be linked with an existing style first select that style and then right click and select New If you link styles then when you change the base style for example by changing the font from Time
10. V Apply replacement table Font Replace with Helwetica Arial 7 a Replace with Helvetica m Font settings for HTML Basic and SQL sources Fonts Automatic W Non proportional fonts only Size 10 Figure 28 Defining a font to be substituted for another font On the OpenOffice org Fonts page 1 Select the Apply Replacement Table option 2 Select or type the name of the font to be replaced in the Font box If you do not have this font on your system it will not appear in the drop down list in this box so you need to type it in 3 In the Replace with box select a suitable font from the drop down list of fonts installed on your computer 4 The checkmark to the right of the Replace with box turns green Click on this checkmark A row of information now appears in the larger box below the input boxes Select the options under Always and Screen 5 In the bottom section of the page you can change the typeface and size of the font used to display source code such as HTML and Basic in macros Security options Use the OpenOffice org Security page to choose security options for saving documents and for opening documents that contain macros Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 41 Security options and warnings Adjust security related options and define warnings For hidden information in documents Options Passwords For web connections _ Persistently save passwords for web connections
11. 1 49 Slide 1 1 Default y Figure 128 Main window of Impress oval indicates the Hide Show markers You can remove the Slides pane or Tasks pane from view by clicking the X in the upper right corner You can also show or hide these panes using View gt Slide Pane or View gt Tasks Pane Tip You can also hide these panes in order to maximize the Workspace area by clicking the Hide Show marker in the middle of the vertical separator line and restore them by clicking again on the same area Slides pane The Slides pane contains thumbnail pictures of the slides in your presentation in the order they will be shown unless you change the slide show order Clicking a slide in this pane selects it and places it in the Workspace When a slide is in the Workspace you can apply to it any changes desired Several additional operations can be performed on one or more slides simultaneously in the Slides pane e Add new slides to the presentation e Mark a slide as hidden so that it will not be shown as part of the presentation e Delete a slide from the presentation if it is no longer needed e Rename a slide e Duplicate a slide copy and paste or move it to a different position in the presentation cut and paste 146 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 It is also possible to perform the following operations although there are more efficient methods than using the Slides pane e Change the slide transition following
12. 2 Use F4 to open the database source window and select the table whose data you want to use 3 Select the rows of data you want to add to the spreadsheet e Click the gray box to the left of the row you want to select if only selecting one row That row is highlighted e To select multiple rows hold down the Control key while clicking the gray box of the rows you need Those rows are highlighted e To select all the rows click the gray box in the upper left corner All rows are highlighted 4 Click the Data to text icon to insert the data into the spreadsheet cells 5 Save the spreadsheet Adding records to a spreadsheet is fairly easy You need to have the Data Source window open your spreadsheet open and the table you want to use selected 1 Click the gray box above the field name for the table s ID field 2 Drop and drag the gray box for the table s ID field to where you want the record to appear in the spreadsheet 234 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 3 Repeat until you have moved all of the fields you need to where you want them 4 Name and save the spreadsheet 5 Click a row of the table in the Data Source window 6 Drag the data in the ID field in the selected row onto the ID field in the spreadsheet The Save icon should activate 7 Click the Edit File button to make the spreadsheet read only Click Save when asked if you want to save the file 8 The Data Source window goes blank the fields in th
13. Fit in window Fit width Fit visible Zoom factor 100 Page layout Default Single page O Continuous Continuous facing Figure 272 Initial View page of PDF Options dialog User Interface page of PDF Options dialog On the User Interface page you can choose more settings to control how a PDF viewer displays the file Some of these choices are particularly useful when you are creating a PDF to be used as a presentation or a kiosk type display Window options section e Resize window to initial page Causes the PDF viewer window to resize to fit the first page of the PDF e Center window on screen Causes the PDF viewer window to be centered on the computer screen e Open in full screen mode Causes the PDF viewer to open full screen instead of in a smaller window 280 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 e Display document title Causes the PDF viewer to display the document s title in the title bar User interface options section e Hide menubar Causes the PDF viewer to hide the menu bar e Hide toolbar Causes the PDF viewer to hide the toolbar e Hide window controls Causes the PDF viewer to hide other window controls General Initial View User Interface Links Security Window options Center window on screen _ Open in full screen mode Display document title User interface options _ Hide menubar _ Hide toolbar _ Hide window controls Transitions Bookmark
14. 332 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 organization dialogs inserting special characters and similar types of dialogs Other possible problems using the macro recorder include things such as inserting a formula setting user data setting filters in Calc actions in database forms and exporting a document to an encrypted PDF file You never know for certain what will work unless you try it however The actions from the search dialog are properly captured for example Other options When the macro recorder is not able to solve a specific problem the usual solution is to write code using the OpenOffice org objects Unfortunately there is a steep learning curve for the OOo objects It is usually best to start with simple examples and then branch out slowly as you learn more Learning to read generated macros is a good place to start If you record Calc macros and the recorder can correctly generate a macro there is an add in created by Paolo Mantovani which converts Calc macros when they are recorded The final code manipulates OpenOffice org objects rather than generating dispatches This can be very useful for learning the object model You can download the macro recorder from Paolo s web site directly or from the OOo Macros web site You should check both places to see which contains the latest version http www paolo mantovani org downloads DispatchToApiRecorder http www ooomacros org user php Macro organization
15. 5 Repeat for each style you want to copy If the receiving template or document has many styles you may not see any change unless you scroll down in the list When you are finished click Close 62 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Template Management G My Templates 0207WG WorkingWithStyles_PHE C Drawing Untitled gt HB Systems Commands LI phb Presentation 7 Presentation Backgrounds 7 Presentations J US Sizes Address Book G outline numbering test outline numbering best Styles sample odt AJ OOoEmphasis AJ OOoCompuberCode AJ OOokeyvstroke AJ OOoChaphumber AJ OOoStrongEmphasis T Default 1 OOo able Text TJ OOoFooter T ODoComputerTode e Documents hal Documents Figure 51 Copying a style from one document to another Loading styles from a template or document You can copy styles by loading them from a template or another document 1 Open the document you want to copy styles into 2 In the Styles and Formatting window long click on the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon and then click on Load Styles see Figure 48 3 On the Load Styles dialog Figure 52 find and select the template you want to copy styles from Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 63 Load Styles Categories Templates My Templates nnn HE Systems Presentation Presentation Backgrounds Presentations
16. B17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 1 mE I te fil B w Q r bia 0 00cm p MM Black S colour S E Blues s E bal 9 8B T 6 5 43272 1 F 2345 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 772 23 74 25 76 27 28 1 Line and illing loolbar eS lia rat P mi PY EH wi rl LD ey i Fani E RU f zi ICID Layout a uau Dv gt EE T arp 3 9 03 10 20 Figure 150 Initial Draw window Rulers You should see rulers bars with numbers on the upper and left hand side of the workspace The rulers show the size of a selected object on the page see the gray double lines highlighted in Figure 151 When no object is selected they show the location of the mouse pointer which helps to accurately position drawing objects more accurately You can also use the rulers to manage object handles and guide lines making it easier to position objects The age margins in the drawing area are also represented on the rulers You can change the margins directly on the rulers by dragging them with the mouse To modify the unit of measurement of a ruler right click on the ruler and select one of the measurement units The two rulers can have different units 0 9 E P KS ARAO Slide 1 1 Default _ _ 53 Figure 151 Rulers show the size of the selected object i Millimeter B Centimeter ea Meter Kilometer Inch Eoot Miles Point Pi
17. In OpenOffice org macros are grouped in modules modules are grouped in libraries and libraries are grouped in library containers A library is usually used as a major grouping for either an entire category of macros or for an entire application Modules usually split functionality such as user interaction and calculations Individual macros are subroutines and functions Module 1 Module 2 Macro 2 Figure 303 Macro Library hierarchy Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 333 A computer scientist would use Figure 304 to precisely describe the situation The text 1 means one or more and 0 means zero or more The black triangle means composed of or contains A library container contains one or more libraries and each library is contained in one library container A library contains zero or more modules and each module is contained in one library A module contains zero or more macros and each macro is contained in one module Figure 304 Macro Library hierarchy Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic to open the OpenOffice org Basic Macros dialog see Figure 305 All available library containers are shown in the Macro from list Every document is a library container capable of containing multiple libraries The application itself acts as two library containers one container for macros distributed with OpenOffice org called OpenOffice org Macros and one container
18. Page number Shows the current page number the sequence number of the current page if different and the total number of pages in the document For example if you restarted page numbering at 1 on the third page its page number is 1 and its sequence number is 3 If any bookmarks have been defined in the document a right click on this field pops up a list of bookmarks click on the required one To jump to a specific page in the document double click on this field The Navigator opens Click in the Page Number field and type the sequence number of the required page After a brief delay the display jumps to the selected page Page style Shows the style of the current page To change the page style right click on this field A list of page styles pops up choose a different style by clicking on it To edit the current page style double click on this field The Page Style dialog opens Language Shows the language for the selected text Click to open a menu where you can choose another language for the selected text or for the paragraph where the cursor is located You can also choose None Do not check spelling to exclude the text from a spelling check or choose More to open the Character dialog Insert mode Click to toggle between Insert and Overwrite modes when typing Selection mode Click to toggle between STD Standard EXT Extend ADD Add and BLK Block selection EXT is an alternative to Shift click when selecting
19. The picture will resize itself to fill the area of the contents box Follow the directions in the Caution note below when resizing it by hand e Click the Insert Picture icon You can easily add a picture to a slide outside a contents box Just select from the main menu Insert gt Picture gt From File and follow the same procedure as above You will also probably need to move the picture to the desired location Note Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 163 When resizing a graphic right click the picture Select Position and Size from the context menu and make sure that Keep ratio is selected Caution Then adjust the height or width to the size you need As you adjust one dimension both dimensions will change Failure to do so will cause the A picture to become distorted Remember also that resizing a bitmap image will reduce its quality better by far to create an image of the desired size outside of Impress Adding tables For displaying tabular data you can insert basic tables directly into your slides by choosing the Table contents type It is also possible to add a table outside a contents box in a number of ways e Choose Insert gt Table from the menu bar e With the Table button on the main toolbar E e With the Table Design button on the table toolbar e Select a Style option from the Table Design section of the Tasks pane Each method opens the Insert Table dialog Alternatively clicking on the black ar
20. but Chapter 2 could begin with page 25 and Chapter 3 with page 51 Tip 96 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Paragraph Background Indents amp Spacing Alignment Text Flow Outline amp Numbering Tabs Drop Caps Borders Hyphenation a SS Se pscromaotcall y Breaks Insert Type With Page Style Options Do not split paragraph _ Keep with next paragraph Figure 81 Specifying a page ea before a paragraph Method 2 1 Insert gt Manual break 2 By default Page break is selected on the Insert Break dialog Figure 82 3 Choose the required page Style 4 Select Change page number 5 Specify the page number to start from and then click OK Insert Break Type Line break bo o oo Page break Help Figure 82 Restarting page numbering after a manual page break Changing page margins You can change page margins in two ways e Using the page rulers quick and easy but does not have fine control e Using the Page Style dialog can specify margins to two decimal places If you change the margins using the rulers the new margins affect the page style and will be shown in the Page Style dialog the next time you Note open it Because the page style is affected the changed margins apply to all pages using that style Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 97 To change margins using the rulers 1 The gray sections of
21. s right click menu under the heading Shapes 198 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Aids for positioning objects Draw has various tools to help you arrange the objects with respect to each other e Moving an object to the front or to the back e Aligning objects with respect to each other e Distributing the distance and space between objects See Chapter 5 Combining Multiple Objects in the Draw Guide for more information Inserting and editing pictures Draw contains a number of functions for editing raster graphics bitmaps for example photos and scanned images including import and and export as well as conversion from one format to another Draw can read in all the usual range of graphic file formats You can add pictures from several sources e The Gallery see Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork e Directly from a scanner Insert gt Picture gt Scan e Images created by another program including photographs from a digitial camera Insert gt Picture gt From File Draw provides tools for working with bitmap images the Picture toolbar and the bitmap image management palette However it does not have the same capabilities as the specialized raster graphics programs like Adobe Photoshop or The Gimp See Chapter 6 Editing Pictures in the Draw Guide for details and examples Working with 3D objects Although Draw does not match the functionality of the leading drawing or picture editing pro
22. 5 7 g Decimal places 2 4 K I z i i g 5 5 Leading zeroes 1 Format code 0 00 RED 0 00 User defined Figure 119 Format Cells gt Numbers Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 131 Formatting the font To quickly choose the font used in a cell select the cell then click the arrow next to the Font Name box on the Formatting toolbar and choose a font from the list To choose whether to show the font names in their font or in plain text go to Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt View and select or deselect the Show preview of fonts option in the Font Lists section For more information see Chapter 2 Setting Up OpenOffice org Tip To choose the size of the font click the arrow next to the Font Size box on the Formatting toolbar For other formatting you can use the Bold Italic or Underline icons a Automatic f To choose a font color click the arrow next to the Font Color TIIT icon to display a color palette Click on the required color EnEn To define custom colors use Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Colors See Chapter 2 To specify the language of the cell useful because it allows different languages to exist in the same document and be spell checked correctly use the Font tab of the Format Cells dialog Use the Font Effects tab to set other font characteristics See Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in Calc of the Calc Guide for more information
23. 6 00 6 00 3 50 3 50 57 50 9 sooj 80 6 207 5fLunak Robert 26 00 0 00 2 00 00 15 00 17 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 60 0 00 62 50 9 00 78 1 209 0 Matteson Brittany 128 00 0 00 3 00 3 00 17 00 22 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 3 00 47 50 9 00 it 23 79 4 212 5 Murphy Kathleen 26 00 1 00 3 00 6 00 16 00 11 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 4 00 53 50 9 00 Figure 102 Frozen rows and columns You can set the freeze point at a row a column or both a row and a column as in Figure 102 Freezing single rows or columns 1 Click on the header for the row below where you want the freeze or for the column to the right of where you want the freeze 2 Choose Window gt Freeze A dark line appears indicating where the freeze is put Freezing a row and a column 1 Click into the cell that is immediately below the row you want frozen and immediately to the right of the column you want frozen 2 Choose Window gt Freeze 120 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Two lines appear on the screen a horizontal line above this cell and a vertical line to the left of this cell Now as you scroll around the screen everything above and to the left of these lines will remain in view Unfreezing To unfreeze rows or columns choose Window gt Freeze The check mark by Freeze will vanish Splitting the screen Another way to change the view is by splitting the window also known as splitting the screen The screen ca
24. Adding a Fax icon to a toolbar You can customize OpenOffice org so that a single click on an icon automatically sends the current document as a fax 1 Be sure the fax driver is installed Consult the documentation for your fax modem for more information 2 Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt Print The dialog shown in Figure 319 opens 3 Select the fax driver from the Fax list and click OK Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org 351 Contents Pages Comments Graphics Left pages None Tables Right pages Comments only Drawings C Reversed End of document Controls C Brochure End of page Background Print black Hidden text Text placeholder Other Print automatically inserted blank pages C Create single print jobs E Paper tre flasMalalate Fa Lienche Figure 319 Setting up OOo for sending faxes 4 Click the arrow icon at the end of the Standard toolbar In the drop down menu choose Customize Toolbar The Toolbars page of the Customize dialog appears Figure 317 Click Add 5 On the Add Commands dialog Figure 320 select Documents in the Category list then select Send Default Fax in the Commands list Click Add Now you can see the new icon in the Commands list 6 In the Commands list click the up or down arrow button to position the new icon where you want it Click OK and then click Close Your toolbar now has a new icon to send the current document as a fax Ca
25. Apply styles 1 Select the color you want in the Apply Styles list I chose the beige which is Orange 4 in the Color table 2 Select the Field border you want I prefer the 3 D look You might want to experiment with the different possible settings 3 Click Next Step 8 Set name 1 Enter the name for the form In this case it is Fuel 2 Click Modify the form 3 Click Finish The form opens in Edit mode Modifying a form We will be moving the controls to different places in the form and changing the background to a picture We will also modify the label for the PaymentType field as well as change the field to a list box First we must decide what we want to change The discussion will follow this ten step outline of our planned changes 1 Provide a dropdown capability for the Date field in the main form and lengthen the field to show the day of the week month day and year 2 Shorten the length of the payment fields all fields containing the word Payment 3 Move the controls into groups food fuel subform and miscellaneous 218 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 4 5 6 7 3 9 10 Change the wording of some of the labels Some single words should be two words Some abbreviations should be used if possible Misc for miscellaneous Change the lengths of several fields and labels Only Lunch Supper Motel and Tolls have acceptable lengths But for a better appearance chang
26. Column and row headers Charts L Grid Drawing objects L Notes C Formulas Objects graphics Zero values Scaling factor 100 Figure 123 The Sheet tab of the Page Style dialog Page Order When a sheet will print on more than one page of paper you can set the order in which pages print This is especially useful in a large document for example controlling the print order can save time if you have to collate the document a certain way The two available options are shown below 138 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Top to bottom then right Left to right then down Details You can specify which details to print These details include e Row and column headers e Sheet grid prints the borders of the cells as a grid e Comments prints the comments defined in your spreadsheet on a separate page along with the corresponding cell reference e Objects and graphics e Charts e Drawing objects e Formulas prints the formulas contained in the cells instead of the results e Zero Values prints cells with a zero value Remember that since the print detail options are a part of the page s properties they are also a part of the page style s properties Therefore different page styles can be set up to quickly change the print properties of the sheets in the spreadsheet Note Scale Use the scale features to control the number of pages the data wil
27. Deleting a page break To remove a page break 1 Navigate to a cell that is next to the break you want to remove 2 Select Edit gt Delete Manual Break 3 Select Row Break or Column Break depending on your need The break is now removed Multiple manual row and column breaks can exist on the same page When you want to remove them you have to remove each one individually This may be confusing at times because although there may be a column break set on the page when you go to Edit gt Note Manual Break Column break may be grayed out In order to remove the break you have to be in the cell next to the break For example if you set the column break while you are in H15 you Can not remove it if you are in cell D15 However you can remove it from any cell in column H Headers and footers Headers and footers are predefined pieces of text that are printed at the top or bottom of a sheet outside of the sheet area Headers are set in the same way as footers Headers and footers are assigned to a page style You can define more than one page style for a spreadsheet and assign different page styles to different sheets For more about page styles see Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in the Calc Guide Setting a header or footer To set a header or footer 1 Navigate to the sheet that you want to set the header or footer for Choose Format gt Page 2 On the Page Style dialog select the Header or Footer tab See Figure
28. Elements yin asb aed ffx a doa 8 amp 4 Fa 7a axb a b aab I a b a b avb Figure 246 Equation Editor Elements window and location of resulting equation 254 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Entering a formula The equation editor uses a markup language to represent formulas For example beta creates the Greek character beta f This markup is designed to read similar to English whenever possible For example a over b produces a fraction A You can enter a formula in three ways e Select a symbol from the Elements window e Right click on the equation editor and select the symbol from the context menu e Type markup in the equation editor The context menu and the Elements window insert the markup corresponding to a symbol This provides a convenient way to learn the Math markup Click on the document body to exit the formula editor NOEC Double click on a formula to enter the formula editor again The Elements window The simplest method for entering a formula is to use the Elements window Elements Ea yin agb deA Pis gt doa 2 amp m 24 t a b a b axb a b aab a b asb a b avb Figure 247 Symbols are divided into categories The Elements window is divided into two main parts e The top shows the symbol categories Click on these to change the list of symbols e The bottom shows the symbols available in the current category Tip You can h
29. Figure 194 Form Controls toolbar e Scroll down to the Date format property This is a dropdown list with Standard short as the default setting Click it to open the list Select the Standard long entry e Scroll down to the Dropdown property Its default setting is No It is also a dropdown list Click to open the list Select Yes To see what the Date field will look like click the Form Mode On Off Tip icon the second icon from the left in Figure 194 You can do this any time you want to see the form with the changes you have made Step 2 Shorten the width of some fields All of the fields with a label containing the word payment are too wide They need shortening before the controls are moved 1 Control click the BPayment field BPayment Figure 195 Selecting a field 220 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 2 Move the cursor over the middle green handle on the right The cursor becomes a double headed arrow 3 Drag the cursor to the left until the field is 2 5 cm wide 1 inch If you have the Snap to Grid and Guides when moving icons selected in Tip the Design Format toolbar you will see how wide the field is as you shorten it 4 Repeat these steps to shorten these fields Lpayment SPayment SnPayment Mpayment and MiscPayment Step 3 Move the controls to group them by category We want to move the controls so that they look like Figure 196 Figure 196 Positioning of controls 1 Cl
30. If you type in cross references to other parts of a document those references can easily get out of date if you reorganize the order of topics add or remove material or reword a heading Writer provides two ways to ensure that your references are up to date by inserting links to other parts of the same document or to a different document e Hyperlinks e Cross references The two methods have the same result if you Control click the link when the document is open in Writer you are taken directly to the cross referenced item However they also have major differences e The text in a hyperlink does not automatically update if you change the text of the linked item although you can change it manually but changed text does automatically update in a cross reference Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 101 When using a hyperlink you do not have a choice of the content of the link for example text or page number but when using a cross reference you have several choices including bookmarks To hyperlink to an object such as a graphic and have the hyperlink show useful text such as Figure 6 you need to either give such an object a useful name instead of leaving it as the default name Graphics6 or you need to use the Hyperlink dialog to modify the visible text In contrast cross references to figures with captions automatically show useful text and you have a choice of several variations of the name If you save a W
31. J Java options 44 Java Runtime Environment JRE 202 JRE Java Runtime Environment 12 44 K KDocker 16 keyboard shortcuts assigning 352 361 customizing 352 374 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 function keys 361 loading from a file 354 resetting to default values 354 saving to afile 353 keyboard shortcuts macros 338 L landscape pages 74 language settings 51 language support 11 layout methods 94 Layout pane 159 layout selecting Impress 156 LGPL 365 libraries of macros 332 library containers 332 licensing of OpenOffice org 363 limits to sum integral 262 Line and Filling toolbar 177 line properties 193 line customizing 194 line drawing 182 lines editing 193 linking object from gallery 293 Linux Quickstarter 16 system requirements 12 list table database 213 load Basic code to edit 48 load save options 46 loading styles 63 locale settings 51 M Mac OS X keystroke differences 30 Support 14 system requirements 12 macro information 14 Macro Organizer dialog 335 macro security options 42 Macro Selector dialog 337 Macromedia Flash 316 macros 322 assigning to events 354 Calc 332 comments 326 creating 327 DIM 326 dispatch framework 331 dispatch helper 327 downloading 336 editing 325 event handling 339 example 328 functions 332 IDE 325 330 library container 324 library containers 332 menu items 338 module 324 modules 332 organization 332 recording 323 R
32. OpenOffice org gt Java Caution A Adding graphics spreadsheets and other objects Graphics such as shapes callouts arrows and so on are often useful to complement the text on a slide These objects are handled much the same as graphics in Draw For more information see Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw the Draw Guide or Chapters 4 5 and 6 in the Impress Guide Spreadsheets embedded in Impress include most of the functionality of spreadsheets in Calc and are therefore capable of performing extremely complex calculations and data analysis If you need to analyze your data or apply formulas these operations are best performed in a Calc spreadsheet and the results displayed in an embedded Impress spreadsheet or even better in a native Impress table Alternatively choose Insert gt Object gt OLE Object from the menu bar This opens a spreadsheet in the middle of the slide and the menus and toolbars change to those used in Calc so that you can start adding data though you may first need to resize the visible area on the slide You can also insert an already existing spreadsheet and use the viewport to select the data that you want to display on your slide Impress offers the capability of inserting in a slide various other types of objects such Writer documents Math formulas or even another presentation For details on using these objects refer to Chapter 7 of the Impress Guide Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impr
33. Options gt OpenOffice org gt View Standard toolbar The Standard toolbar is the same for all OpenOffice org components and is not described in detail in this chapter O EHB Dal ya be 247 0 Line and Filling toolbar The Line and Filling toolbar lets you modify the main properties of a drawing object See page 193 for details a amp ee h poom S MMM Black w amp color W E Blue 8 a Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 177 Text Formatting toolbar If the selected object is text the toolbar changes to the Text Formatting toolbar which is similar to the Formatting toolbar in Writer For more information see Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer in this book Arial ly 18 x B S UM 2 FS F Ada A A Drawing toolbar The Drawing toolbar is the most important toolbar in Draw It contains all the necessary functions for drawing various geometric and freehand shapes and for organizing them on the page Options toolbar Use the Options toolbar to activate or deactivate various drawing aids To display the Options toolbar select View gt Toolbars gt Options Options ole Bete SR cay Figure 155 Options toolbar Choosing and defining colors Color Bar To display the Color Bar use View gt Toolbars gt Color Bar The toolbar then appears at the bottom of the workspace SHEEEEEES ES ES ERED SERRE OREEREERR ORES titi ttt ttt ee tT EE ee E E ean This toolbar lets you rapidl
34. Snap to Grid off Ctrl activates the snap option for this activity Note To extend the line symmetrically in both directions from the starting point hold down the Alt key while drawing the line 182 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 To change line attributes for example the color or line type select the line by clicking on it then use the tools in the Line and Filling toolbar or for more control right click on the line and choose Line to open the Line dialog Drawing an arrow Arrows are drawn like lines Draw classifies arrows as a subgroup of lines Lines with arrowheads The information field on the status bar shows them only as lines Click on the Line Ends with Arrow icon gt to draw an arrow Choosing line endings Several types of line endings arrows circles squares and others are available in Draw Choose View gt Toolbars gt Arrows or click on the small black triangle on the Lines and Arrows icon on the Drawing toolbar to open a toolbar with ten tools for drawing lines and arrows The last used command is stored on the toolbar to make it quicker to call it up again 1 Line 5 Line 45 8 Line with square arrow 2 Line Ends with Arrow 6 Line starts with arrow 9 Dimension line 3 Line with arrow circle 7 Line with circle arrow 10 Line with arrows 4 Line with arrow square Figure 162 Arrows toolbar Drawing a rectangle or square Drawing a rectangle is similar to drawing a straight line
35. Unary Binary Operators Relations Set Operations Eunctions Operators Attributes Brackets Formats Others Bede b a times b a b K a over b a diw b a b a cire b Y T T T T T T T a wideslash b a widebslash b nega aandb aorb Figure 251 Right click menu Markup You can type the markup directly in the equation editor For example you can type 5 times 4 to obtain 5x4 If you know the markup this can be the fastest way to enter a formula Tip The formula markup resembles the way the formula reads in English Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 207 Below is a short list of common equations and their corresponding markup a b a b Ja sqrt a a a 2 a an J f x Ay int f x dx gt a suman a lt b a lt b OO infinity axb a times b xy x cdot y Greek characters Greek characters a fB y 6 and so on are common in mathematical formulas These characters are not available in the Elements window or on the right click menu Fortunately the markup for Greek characters is simple Type a sign followed the name of the character in English In localized versions of OpenOffice org these names are localized e To write a lowercase character type the name of the character in lowercase e To write an uppercase character type the name of the character in uppercase See the table below for some examples alpha gt a ALPHA gt A beta BET
36. You can also group several drawing objects to make sure they maintain their relative position and proportion You can place the drawing objects directly on a page in your document or you can insert them into a frame You can also use the drawing tools to annotate photographs screen captures or other illustrations produced by other programs but this is not recommended because e You cannot include images in a group with drawing objects so they may get out of alignment in your document e Ifyou convert a document to another format such as HTML the drawing objects and the graphics will not remain associated they are saved separately In general if you need to create complex drawings it is recommended to use OpenOffice org Draw which includes many more features such as layers styles and SO On 298 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Creating drawing objects To begin using the drawing tools display the Drawing toolbar Figure 287 by clicking View gt Toolbars gt Drawing If you are planning to use the drawing tools repeatedly you can tear off this toolbar and move it to a convenient place on the window wTriITTT CCL CL 12345 67 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 Select 5 Freeform Line 9 Symbol Shapes 13 Stars 2 Line 6 Text 10 Block arrows 14 Points 3 Rectangle 7 Callouts 11 Flowcharts 15 Fontwork Gallery 4 Ellipse 8 Basic Shapes 12 Callouts 16 From File 17 Extrusion On Off Figure 287 The Drawing t
37. click Tools gt Options Click the expansion symbol or triangle to the left of Load Save 5 Options Load Save gt b OpenOffice org Load Save General Fa Load Save VBA Properties Microsoft Office HTML Compatibility This is where you defir Figure 35 Load Save options General Load Save options Most of the choices on the Load Save General page are familiar to users of other office suites Some items of interest are described below Load Load user specific settings with the document Load printer settings with the document Save Edit document properties before saving Always create backup copy Save AutoRecovery information every 15 Minutes Save URLs relative to file system Save URLs relative to internet Default file format and ODF settings ODF format version 1 2 Extended recommended Size optimization for ODF format Warn when not saving in ODF or default format Document type Always save as Text document ODF Text Document Figure 36 Choosing Load and Save options Load user specific settings with the document When you save a document certain settings are saved with it Some settings printer name data source linked to the document are always loaded with a document whether or not this option is selected If you select this option these 46 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 document settings are overruled by the user specific settings of the person who opens it If you deselect
38. document views 79 Documentation Project 14 download updates automatically 45 downloading OpenOffice org 12 drag and drop 289 Draw 199 Draw features 175 status bar 177 toolbars 177 workspace 175 drawing circle or ellipse 184 duplication 196 972 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Flash export 199 HTML export 199 inserting pictures 199 line 182 rectangle 183 Save in a foreign format 199 Drawing Object Properties toolbar 298 drawing objects 3D objects 199 grouping 299 grouping and combining 198 positioning 199 properties 298 Drawing toolbar 178 298 drawing tools 297 duplication 196 dynamic gradients 196 E E mail options 53 e mailing Mail Merge Wizard 284 several recipients 284 Writer document as attachment 283 edit document properties before saving 47 editing data Calc 128 ellipse drawing 184 en dash and em dash 86 envelope printing 275 envelope printing 275 EPS images in PDF 279 equation inserting 254 numbering 265 equation editor 254 brackets 262 derivative markup 264 Elements window 255 equations over more than one line 262 floating window 260 font size 261 formula layout 262 limits to sum integral 262 markup 257 matrix markup 263 right click menu 257 event handling 339 export directly as PDF 277 export HTML 50 exporting Flash 283 PDF 277 XHTML 283 extended tips 33 extension Sun Report Builder 252 Extension Manager 69 252 extensions 341 354 DataPilot Tools 356 Solver
39. e Close the Properties dialog 3 Use the same procedure to change these labels as well BPayment to Payment LPayment to Payment SPayment to Payment Miscellaneous to Misc SnackCost to Snack Cost MPayment to Payment MiscPayment to Misc Payment and MiscNotes to Misc Notes You can modify all of the listings in the Properties window For example if i you change the Alignment from Left to Center the word or words in the Tip label are centered within the label When you have some time you might want to experiment with different settings just to see the results you get Step 5 Change the widths of the labels and fields We want the following controls to be 2 cm wide 0 8 inches Breakfast Lunch Supper Odometer Snack No Tolls Snack Cost Motel and Misc All of the payment fields were changed in step 2 but Misc Payment needs to be changed to 3 cm 1 2 inches 1 Right click Breakfast and choose Position and Size On the Position and Size dialog change Width to 2 cm 2 Repeat for the other listed controls using 3 cm for Misc Payment When changing the position or size of an entire control use the Position and Size dialog or the drag and drop method When working with either the label or the field but not both at the same Caution time you can use the Properties dialog to make these changes when you want to be exact However you need to be careful not to A accidentally select the entire control for use with the Pr
40. except that you click on the Rectangle icon from the Drawing toolbar and the imaginary line drawn by the mouse corresponds to a diagonal of the rectangle The rectangle changes shape as you drag the mouse around Figure 163 Drawing a rectangle Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 183 Hold down the Shift key to draw a square Hold down the Alt key to draw a rectangle starting from its center To combine the effects hold down both the Shift and Alt keys simultaneously Drawing a circle or ellipse To draw an ellipse also called an oval or a circle use the Ellipse icon from the Drawing toolbar A circle is simply an ellipse with both axes the same length The ellipse drawn is the largest ellipse that fits inside the imaginary rectangle drawn with the mouse Figure 164 Drawing an ellipse Here are some other ways to draw an ellipse or circle e To draw a circle hold down the Shift key while dragging the mouse e To draw an ellipse with the starting point at the center instead of the corner hold down the Alt key while dragging the mouse e To draw a circle with the starting point at the center hold down both the Alt and Shift keys while dragging the mouse e To draw an ellipse or circle that snaps to the nearest grid points hold down the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse If you first press and hold down the Ctrl key and then click on one of the icons for Line Rectangle Ellipse or Text a standard s
41. format and design and to add text graphics and animation effects To place a slide in the slide design area Normal view click the slide thumbnail in the Slides pane or double click it in the Navigator Outline view Outline view contains all the slides of the presentation in their numbered sequence It shows topic titles bulleted lists and numbered lists for each slide in outline format Only the text contained in the default text boxes in each slide is shown so if your Slide includes other text boxes or drawing objects the text in these objects is not displayed Slide names are also not included i January ial February March Figure 133 Outline view Use Outline view for the following purposes 1 Making changes in the text of a slide e Add and delete the text in a slide just as in the Normal view e Move the paragraphs of text in the selected slide up or down by using the up and down arrow buttons Move SePo Tr d Up or Move Down on the Text Formatting toolbar e Change the outline level for any of the paragraphs in a slide using the left and right arrow buttons Promote or Demote e Both move a paragraph and change its outline level using a combination of these four arrow buttons 2 Comparing the slides with your outline if you have prepared one in advance If you notice from your outline that another slide is needed you can create it directly in the Outline view or you can return to the Normal view to cr
42. see Figure 210 This brings up Tables and Queries Click on the next to Tables to view the individual tables created Now click on a table to see all the records held in it El 3 Automobile Lig Queries Tables Figure 210 Databases Editing data sources Some data sources can be edited in the View Data Sources dialog A spreadsheet can not A record can be edited added or deleted The data is displayed on the right side of the screen Click in a field to edit the value Beneath the records are five tiny buttons The first four move backwards or forwards through the records or to the beginning or end The fifth button with a small star inserts a new record Record jo o 3 Insert new record Figure 211 View Data Sources navigation buttons To delete a record right click on the gray box to the left of a row to highlight the entire row and select Delete Rows to remove the selected row Table Format Row Height 24 99 8 299 91354 Dan 27 50 12 557 91699 3 Cash 39 12 10 233 92213 5 Kevin L Delete Rows Record i fof 40 i Pe fh ihis Figure 212 Deleting a row in the Data View window Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 231 Launching Base to work on data sources You can launch OOo Base at any time from the View Data Source pane Just right click on a database or the Tables or Queries icons and select Edit Database File Once in Base you can edit add and delete tables queries forms and rep
43. the results of a Find command Page Figure 66 Navigation toolbar 80 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Click an icon to select that object type Now all the Previous and Next icons in the Navigator itself in the Navigation Toolbar and on the scroll bar will jump to the next object of the selected type This is particularly helpful for finding items like index entries which can be difficult to see in the text The names of the icons shown in the tooltips change to match the selected category for example Next Graphic Next Bookmark or Continue search forward For more uses of the Navigator in Writer see the Writer Guide Working with documents Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org includes instructions on starting new documents opening existing documents and saving documents Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates covers how to create a document from a template Saving as a Microsoft Word file If you need to exchange files with users of Microsoft Word they may not know how to open and save odt files Microsoft Word 2007 with Service Pack 2 SP2 can do this Users of Word 2003 XP and 2000 can buy a plug in from Oracle Corp or search on the Web for the free OpenDocument Format ODF plugin from Sun Microsystems Some users of Microsoft Word may be unwilling or unable to receive odt files Their employer may not allow them to install the plug in In this case you can save a document as a Microsoft Word
44. then clicking the Rotate button from the Drawing Toolbar To stop working in Rotation mode click the Rotation Mode after Clicking Object button amp again Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 189 Selecting objects Direct selection To easiest way to select an object is to click directly on it For objects that are not filled click directly on the object s outline to select it Selection by framing You can select several objects at once by using the mouse to drag a large rectangle around the objects as shown For this to work the Select k icon on the Drawing toolbar must be active Only objects that lie entirely within the rectangle are selected Selecting hidden objects Even if objects are located behind others and not visible they can still be selected Hold down the Alt key and click where the object is located If there are several overlapping objects hold down the Alt key and click until you reach the object you want To cycle through the objects in reverse order hold down the Alt Shift keys The number and type of selected objects is shown at the left of the status bar to help you select the correct object This method generally works in Windows but on a Linux system it Note usually does not If the Alt key on your system does not operate as described above use the Tab key method described below To select an object that is covered by another object using the keyboard press the Tab key to cycle through
45. to Adobe Flash swf and a range of image formats To export to one of these formats choose File gt Export On the Export dialog specify a file name for the exported document then select the required format in the File format list and click the Export button 370 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Index 3 3D objects 199 A accepting or rejecting changes 101 accessibility features 361 accessibility options 44 adding macros from other sources 322 advantages of OpenOffice org 11 age margins 176 antialiasing screen font 36 appearance options 43 Apply Style list 58 area fill editing 194 arranging objects 190 arrow Styles customizing 194 arrows 194 Asian language support 52 Asian languages enabled 160 AutoCorrect 54 88 AutoFormat Calc 133 AutoInput 124 AutoLayout 159 automatic changes 124 automatic saving 25 AutoRecovery 25 47 AutoUpdate styles 60 B background images from Gallery 293 Basic 322 bitmaps 199 BitTorrent 12 book preview 277 booklet printing 274 bookmarks 102 borders editing 193 brackets Math 262 bring forward 190 brochure printing 274 bulleted list 161 Bullets and Numbering dialog 163 C Calc AutoFormat 133 editing data 128 Enter key use of 113 features 106 filtering visible cells 136 formula bar 108 Function Wizard 108 hiding and showing data 134 Navigator 112 outline group controls 135 printing 137 Sheet tabs 109 sorting records 136 splitting
46. 125 3 Select the Header on option From here you can also set the margins the spacing and height for the header or footer You can check the AutoFit height box to automatically adjust the height of the header or footer Margin Changing the size of the left or right margin adjusts how far the header or footer is from the side of the page Spacing Spacing affects how far above or below the sheet the header or footer will print So if spacing is set to 1 00 then there will be 1 inch between the header or footer and the sheet Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 141 Height Height affects how big the header or footer will be Organizer Page Borders Background Header Footer Sheet Same content left right Left margin Right margin spacing Height AutoFit height Figure 125 Header dialog Header or footer appearance To change the appearance of the header or footer click the More button in the header dialog This opens the Border Background dialog Figure 126 From this dialog you can set the background and border of the header or footer For more information see Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in the Calc Guide Line arrangement Line Spacing to contents Default Style Left 0 00cm pe r r 7 0 05 pt dana Le User defined 0 00 pt E Top 0 00cm S 1 00 pt ee 5 pt Bottom 0 00cm rs Pee 3 00 ot Color MM Black a E r
47. 4 Sort options We do not want to do any additional sorting Click Next Step 5 Choose layout Use default settings for the layout Click Next Step 6 Create report e Label the report Vacation Expenses e Select Static report e Click Finish If you feel adventurous try selecting some of the other layout choices After selecting a choice drag the Report Wizard window out of the way Note so that you can see what you have selected Move the cursor over the Title Bar of the window and then drag and drop Vacation fuel report 1 Create a query containing only fuel bought on the days of the vacation a Open a query in Design View b Follow the steps for adding tables in Add tables on page 240 to add the Fuel table c Inthe Fuel table double click Date and FuelCost to enter them in the table at the bottom of the query d Inthe Criterion cell of the Date field type the following BETWEEN 5 25 2007 AND 5 26 2007 Date FuelCost Fuel Fuel x x Criterion BETWEEN 05 25 2007 AND 05 26 2007 Figure 238 Setting the criterion for a query 2 Save name and close the query Suggestion Vacation Fuel Purchases When using dates in a query enter them in numerical form MM DD YYYY or DD MM YYYY depending upon your language s default setting for dates my default setting is MM DD YYYY Fach date must have a before and after it Hence May 25 2007 is written 05 25 2007 or 25 5 2007 depend
48. 4 The default list type is a bulleted list Methods for changing the appearance of the list are explained on page 162 Creating a new outline level 1 If necessary press Enter to begin a new line 2 Press Tab Each time you press Tab the line indents to the next outline level Pressing Enter creates a new line at the same level as the previous one To return to the previous level press Shift Tab In the AutoLayout text boxes promoting or demoting an item in the list corresponds to applying a different outline style so the second outline level corresponds to Outline 2 style the third to Outline 3 style and so on Do not try to change the outline level by selecting the text and then Not clicking the desired outline style as you would in Writer Due to the way Ore that presentation styles work it is not possible to apply them in this way Changing the appearance of the list You can fully customize the appearance of a list changing the bullet type or numbering for the entire list or for single entry All of the changes can be made using the Bullets and Numbering dialog which is accessed by selecting Format gt Bullets and Numbering or by clicking on the Bullets and Numbering icon on the text formatting toolbar 162 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 For the entire list 1 Select the entire list or click on the gray border of the text box so that the green resizing handles are displayed 2 Select Format gt Bullet
49. Australia Replace Exceptions Options Localized Options Word Completion Lt Use replacement table Correct Two IMitial CApitals Capitalize First letter of every sentence Automatic bold and underline _ URL Recognition Replace dashes Delete spaces and tabs at beginning and end of paragraph Delete spaces and tabs at end and start of line Ignore double spaces Apply numbering symbol Apply border Create table Apply Styles Remove blank paragraphs Replace Custom Styles Replace bullets with Combine sinale line oaraaraohs if lenoth oreater than 50 Pafefey efepelefefs lt lt M Replace while modifying existing text T SuboFormatautoeCorrect while typing Figure 45 The AutoCorrect dialog in Writer showing the five tabs and some of the choices 54 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 OpenOffice org 3 Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates What is a template A template is a model that you use to create other documents For example you can create a template for business reports that has your company s logo on the first page New documents created from this template will all have your company s logo on the first page Templates can contain anything that regular documents can contain such as text graphics a set of styles and user specific setup information such as measurement units language the default printer and toolbar and me
50. BASIC Create Master Document Sep Insert Edit Macros Documents lt p Exit Format Extended Tips Controls Help Navigate Help Agent Table Help on Help Drawing Load URL z Graphic m l gt Description Displays general program information such as version number and copyrights Figure 316 Adding a command to a menu Customizing toolbars You can customize toolbars in several ways including choosing which icons are visible and locking the position of a docked toolbar as described in Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org This section describes how to create new toolbars and add other icons commands to the list of those available on a toolbar To get to the toolbar customization dialog do any of the following e On the toolbar click the arrow at the end of the toolbar and choose Customize Toolbar e Choose View gt Toolbars gt Customize from the menu bar e Choose Tools gt Customize from the menu bar and pick the Toolbars page Figure 317 To customize toolbars 1 In the Save In drop down list choose whether to save this changed toolbar for the application for example Writer or for a selected document 2 In the section OpenOffice org lt name of the program example Writer gt Toolbars select from the Toolbar drop down list the toolbar that you want to customize 3 You can create a new toolbar by clicking on the New button or customize existing toolbars by clicking on the Toolbar or Modify buttons and add
51. Connections Protected by a master password recommended Passwords are protected by a master password You will be asked to Master Password enter it once per session if OOo dey retrieves a password From the protected password list Macro security Adjust the security level for executing macros and specify trusted macro Macro Security developers Figure 29 Choosing security options for opening and saving documents Security options and warnings If you record changes save multiple versions or include hidden information or notes in your documents and you do not want some of the recipients to see that information you can set warnings to remind you to remove it or you can have OOo remove some of it automatically Note that unless removed much of this information is retained in a file whether the file is in OpenOffice org s default OpenDocument format or has been saved to other formats including PDF Click the Options button to open a separate dialog with specific choices Figure 30 Macro security Click the Macro Security button to open the Macro Security dialog not shown here where you can adjust the security level for executing macros and specify trusted sources Security options and warnings The following options are on the Security options and warnings dialog Figure 30 Remove personal information on saving Select this option to always remove user data from the file properties when saving the file To ma
52. Figure 233 Query run with aliases We really do not need the column showing the difference between the FuelID fields from the table and query so we will hide it While it will not be visible it will still be used in the calculations 4 Hide a field that does not need to be seen Remove the check in the box of the Visible cell as in Figure 234 Field FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading FuellD Fuel FuellD Quanity Begin End End Reading End Reading Fuel Sort x x 5 ETETA Figure 234 Making a field invisible in a query run 5 Rerun the query Figure 235 Quanity Begin End Distance Fuel Economy 6 430 vim 04 2 f45 11 59 19 570 1032 3 778 7 200 6 12 96 15 150 1239 4 1032 3 207 1 13 67 Figure 235 Query run with aliases Step 10 Close save and name the query My suggestion for a name is Fuel Economy There are obviously other calculations that can be made in this query such as cost per distance traveled and how much of the cost belongs to each of the payments types To fully use queries requires a knowledge of set operations unions N intersections and or complements and any combinations of these ote Having a copy of the Hsqldb User Guide available from http hsqldb org is also extremely useful 244 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Creating reports Reports provide information found in the database in a useful way In this they are Similar to q
53. Hyperlinks References Indexes Comments GY Draw objects 0101G653 IntroducingOOo GS JHw2009 wa Figure 13 The Navigator Click the marker or arrow by any of the categories to display the list of objects in that category To hide the list of categories and show only the toolbars at the top click the List Box On Off icon Click this icon again to show the list box The Navigator provides several convenient ways to move around a document and find items in it e When a category is showing the list of objects in it double click on an object to jump directly to that object s location in the document Objects are much easier to find if you have given them names when creating them instead of keeping OOo s default graphics1 graphics2 Table1 Table2 and so on which may not correspond to the position of the object in the document If you only want to see the content in a certain category highlight the category and click the Content View icon al Until you click the icon again only the objects of that category will be displayed Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 27 e Click the Navigation icon E second icon from the left at the top of the Navigator to display the Navigation toolbar Here you can pick one of the categories and use the Previous and Next icons to move from one item to the next This is particularly helpful for finding items like bookmarks and indexes which can be difficult to see The n
54. Macros gt Run Macro see Figure 302 The macro can be run from the IDE Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic to open the Basic Macro dialog Select your macro and click Edit to open the macro in the IDE Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 331 The IDE has a Run Basic icon in the toolbar that runs the first macro in the IDE Unless you change the first macro it is the empty macro named Main Modify Main so that it reads as shown in Listing 6 Listing 6 Modify Main to call CopyNumToCol1 Sub Main CopyNumToCol1 End Sub Now you can run CopyNumtToCol1 by repeatedly clicking the Run Basic icon in the toolbar of the IDE This is very fast and easy especially for temporary macros that will be used a few times and then discarded Sometimes the macro recorder fails Understanding the OpenOffice org internals helps to understand how and why the macro recorder frequently fails The primary offender is related to the dispatch framework and its relationship to the macro recorder The dispatch framework The purpose of the dispatch framework is to provide a uniform access to components documents for commands that usually correspond to menu items I can use File gt Save from the menu the shortcut keys Ctri S or click on the Save toolbar icon All of these commands are translated into the same dispatch command which is sent to the current document The dispatch framework can also be used to s
55. Module1 already exists and can contain your macro You can click New to create another module in TestLibrary 8 Select the Modulel or the new module that you created and click Edit to open the OOo Integrated Debugging Environment IDE 9 The IDE is a text editor for macros that allows you to edit and create macros Copy the macro into the IDE When a new module is created it contains a comment and an empty macro named Main that does nothing Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 323 Listing 2 Contents of Module after it is created REM 2K OK OK OK K BASIC 2K OK OK OK X Sub Main End Sub Add the new macro either before Sub Main or after End Sub In Listing 3 the new macro has been added before Sub Main Listing 3 Module1 after adding the new macro REM 2K OK OK OK K BASIC 2K OK OK OK X Sub HelloMacro Print Hello End Sub Sub Main End Sub Click on the Run Basic button e in the toolbar to run the first macro in the module Use the Macro dialog opened using the Select macro button 3 or Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic to select and run any macro in the module Creating a simple macro Imagine repeatedly entering simple information Although you can store the information in the clipboard if you use the clipboard for something else the contents are changed Storing the contents as a macro is a simple solution In some simple cases including the example used here
56. PDF and other options eh PDF Options Links Security Selection Images Lossless compression JPEG compression Quality 00 Reduce Image resolution 300 DPI General PDF A la E Tagged PDF Create PDF form Submit format El Allow duplicate field names Export bookmarks E Export comments Export automatically inserted blank pages Embed standard fonts Figure 271 General page of PDF Options dialog 278 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Range section All Exports the entire document to PDF Pages To export a range of pages use the format 3 6 pages 3 to 6 To export Single pages use the format 7 9 11 pages 7 9 and 11 You can also export a combination of page ranges and single pages by using a format like 3 6 8 10 12 Selection Exports all the selected material Images section Lossless compression Images are stored without any loss of quality Tends to make large files when used with photographs Recommended for other kinds of images or graphics JPEG compression Allows for varying degrees of quality A setting of 90 works well with photographs small file size little perceptible loss of quality Reduce image resolution Lower DPI dots per inch images have lower quality For viewing on a computer screen generally a resolution of 72dpi for Windows or 96dpi GNU Linux is sufficient while for printing it is generally preferable to use at least 300 o
57. Page sides section select Back sides left pages option from the Include drop down list General OpenOffice org Writer Page Layout Options Layout Pages per sheet 1 1 a eo OS Order E Draw a border around each page sus te Brochure Page sides Include All pages i All pages Back sides left pages Front sides right pages 7 Click the Print button 8 Take the printed pages out of the printer turn the pages over and put them back into the printer in the correct orientation to print on the blank side You may need to experiment a bit to find out what the correct arrangement is for your printer 9 On the Print dialog in the Page sides section select Front sides right pages option from the Include drop down box 10 Click the Print button Tip If your printer can print double sided automatically choose All pages Printing envelopes labels business cards Printing envelopes labels or business cards using Writer involves two steps setup and printing For details of how to set these up see Chapter 11 Using Mail Merge in the Writer Guide To print 1 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 2 On the Print dialog under Ranges and copies choose Pages and type 1 in the box Click the Print button Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 275 Printing in black and white on a color printer You may wish to print documents in black and white on a color printer Several choices
58. Presentations lt Original gt Introducing a New Product and Recommendation of a Strategy e lt Original gt is for a blank presentation slide design e Both Introducing a New Product and Recommendation of a Strategy have their own prepackaged slide designs Each design appears in the Preview window when its name is clicked Introducing a New Product and Recommendation of a Strategy can also Note be used to create a presentation by choosing From template in the first step Figure 139 4 Select how the presentation will be used under Select an output medium Most often presentations are created for computer screen display Select Screen You can change the page format at any time 154 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 The Screen page is optimized for a 4 3 display 28cm x 21cm so it is not Note Suitable for modern widescreen displays You can change the slide size at any time switching to Normal view and selecting Format gt Page 5 Click Next The Presentation Wizard step 3 appears Presentation Wizard 2 Select a slide transition Effect No Effect speed Medium Select the presentation type Default O Automatic Preview Figure 141 Selecting a slide design e Choose the desired slide transition from the Effect drop down menu e Select the desired speed for the transition between the different slides in the presentation from the Speed drop down menu Medium is a good choic
59. SE AE ILA E re eee TN E rer none een et em eT ere A tery ere ene ere ret eer rer 72 Ezamples or iy US Eerdere ia R EEE 73 Chapter 4 e are e ANET aE E E 76 WE A TE a AEE A N OIE T IE A EAE E E IEE EE I A E E 77 The Writer MTEC O circinera EEEE enti we epee eis 77 Changing document VieWsS ssssessssesseessecsrerseeesreesreeseresersseeeseessersrerserereeesseeeeeessee 79 Mo vimg quickly through a docui ii ers eee ena rere ceeeee nr en rere EER ner ee mare 80 Working with documents s escsrereinnini T E EEE iE 81 a ATE EA ATE E S I ANET AT E ETONE AE EE A T EIA A EET 32 RT a EO E E EE E E ean E EO nn es ienenpae co ans 90 BAT Wa tm Fy oars even ects ven canta EE E A EE E 94 Adding comments to a document esssssseersreserseceserssersserserreseeserrseresersserreersseeseeee 98 ee Or CONI ONT uersreriripens rieri EEE 99 Creating indexes and Dbibliographies cece ecececeecncececcenceceeceecseceeceesensense 100 Working Wiii Orap ICS sirepna A EEA 100 P e E E E arene ttre she reer eer 100 ELE a aa a sate AE O rece E AP E E O OE OE E A E enn 100 Tracking changes to a document s ssssressresressreessresresseessereseresersreesereeeessrereeesss 101 Aa a A E E A E OAOE OA EOI IE E E T O 101 Linking to another part of a document sisicrsrrsiriedkii neiaie aA NNa 101 Using master documents aa cacsecaacesnauas eoueg as renvestaniseosventieenine esueesahitaiateieerenieni 104 ET ai wees heise een ae atten es este adc ee nis nese see eco s
60. Snap to grid 179 Solaris system requirements 12 Solver for Nonlinear Programming for Calc 356 sort order database fields 238 sorting records Calc 136 special characters 85 89 spelling checker 87 spelling options 52 spreadsheet using as data source 230 spreadsheets adding to slides 165 cell reference 111 definition 106 navigate 111 opening 307 Saving 3638 saving as CSV 111 Standard toolbar 18 StarBasic 322 Start Center 23 starting anew document 23 starting OpenOffice org 14 status bar 21 Calc 109 Draw 177 Impress 148 Writer 77 Style dialog 60 61 Styles 195 Apply Style list 58 assigning to shortcut keys 352 AutoUpdate 60 changing using Style dialog 60 creating by dragging and dropping 62 creating from selection 61 creating new 61 creating using Style dialog 61 custom 61 defining a sequence 75 deleting 64 description 56 166 Fill Format 58 formatting text 161 graphic styles 166 linking 61 loading from template or document 63 modifying 59 presentation styles 166 types supported 56 updating from a selection 60 Styles and Formatting window 57 SUB 326 Subroutines 332 Subroutines in macros 326 sun Microsystems 363 Sun Report Builder 252 Support 13 system font user interface 36 T tab stops 86 table of contents automated 99 Table Wizard database 205 tables add to slides 164 Tasks pane Impress 147 tear off toolbars 18 template associate with document 71 create document from 65 create from docume
61. Standard ie Toolbar Toolbar Content Commands Load URL New New Document From Templa gt Open a Save Save As EJ Document as E mail m Modify S a a a a a a Save In OpenOffice org Writer Description Loads a document specified by a URL You can type a new URL or select one that Is already i registered Cancel Help Reset Figure 310 OpenOffice org Customize dialog Complete coverage of the Customize dialog is beyond the scope of this Tip document Click the Help button to access the help pages included with OpenOffice org The Customize dialog contains tabs to configure menus keyboard bindings toolbars and events Toolbar Macros can be added to toolbars For more about modifying toolbars see Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros Qo 39 Menu item Use Tools gt Customize to open the Customize dialog and select the Menus tab You can modify an existing menu or create new menus that call macros For more about modifying menus see Chapter 14 Keyboard shortcuts Use Tools gt Customize to open the Customize dialog and select the Keyboard tab Assigning keyboard shortcuts is discussed in Chapter 14 Event In OpenOffice org when something happens we say that an event occurred For example a document was opened a key was pressed or the mouse moved OpenOffice org allows events to cause a macro to b
62. Text Document J F Spreadsheet Fol Presentation TE Drawing Te Database TE Formula T From Template Open Document w Load O0o dey During System Start Up Exit Quickstarter Qe SIL MD ESS d MMM i Figure 1 Quickstarter pop up menu Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 15 Disabling the Quickstarter To close the Quickstarter right click on the icon in the system tray and then click Exit Quickstarter on the pop up menu The next time the computer is restarted the Quickstarter will be loaded again To prevent OpenOffice org from loading during system startup deselect the Load OpenOffice org during system start up item on the pop up menu You might want to do this if your computer has insufficient memory for example Reactivating the Quickstarter If the Quickstarter has been disabled you can reactivate it by selecting the Load OpenOffice org during system start up checkbox in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Memory Using the Quickstarter in Linux Some installations of OpenOffice org under Linux have a Quickstarter that looks and acts like the one described above for Windows the checkbox on the Memory page is labeled Enable systray quickstarter Preloading OOo under Linux KDE In Linux KDE you can use KDocker to have OOo loaded and ready for use at startup KDocker is not part of OOo it is a generic systray app docker that is helpful if you open OOo often Starting
63. Tithe bar of floating toolbar Bullets and Numbering X oe 2 Tb te amp Figure 4 Moving a floating toolbar ee Ae ood izl I i Floating toolbars OOo includes several additional context sensitive toolbars whose defaults appear as floating toolbars in response to the cursor s current position or selection For example when the cursor is in a table a floating Table toolbar appears and when the cursor is in a numbered or bullet list the Bullets and Numbering toolbar appears You can dock these toolbars to the top bottom or side of the window if you wish see Moving toolbars above Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 19 Docking floating windows and toolbars Toolbars and some windows such as the Navigator and the Styles and Formatting window are dockable You can move resize or dock them to an edge To dock a window or toolbar hold down the Control key and double click on the frame of the floating window or in a vacant area near the icons at the top of the floating window to dock it in its last position To undock a window hold down the Control key and double click on the frame or a vacant area near the icons at the top of the docked window Customizing toolbars You can customize toolbars in several ways including choosing which icons are visible and locking the position of a docked toolbar You can also add icons and create new toolbars as described in Chapter 14 To access a toolbar s cust
64. Users of OOo can get comprehensive online support from community venues such as newsgroups forums or mailing lists There are also numerous websites run by users that offer free tips and tutorials Free community support provided by a network of hundreds of experienced users You must be subscribed to post messages To subscribe send a blank email to Users Mailing List users subscribe openoffice org List archives are here http www openoffice org servlets SummarizeList listName users Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 13 Templates user guides how tos and other documentation Documentation http documentation openoffice org Project See also the Documentation wiki http wiki services openoffice org wiki Documentation Native Language Information resources and mail lists in your language Project http projects openoffice org native lang html Support for installing and using OOo on Mac OS X Mac Support http porting openoffice org mac index html Extensive discussion forum for OpenOffice org issues from setup to advanced programming features http user services openoffice org en forum OpenOffice org Community Forum Andrew Pitonyak the author of OpenOffice org Macros OpenOffice org Explained maintains this site which provides extensive Macro Information documentation on OOo s macro capability Many good referral links are also provided http www pitonyak org oo php Read
65. a box for the text on the slide Do not worry about the vertical size and position the text box will expand if needed as you type To change the horizontal size see Resizing a text box to reposition the text box to a different part of the slide see Moving a text box Release the mouse button when finished The ursor appears in the text box whichis nowin sedit mode gray hashed border with green resizing handles 3 Type or paste your text in the text box Tet 7x TEG I at ww ya oo A Sen mf a an Y SS ES Bi Click outside the text box to de select it E a Cee eee EEE eee EEE EE a SMA Figure 144 Selected text box showing the green resizing handles and text toolbar You can move resize and delete text boxes For more information see Chapter 3 in the Impress Guide In addition to the normal text boxes where text is horizontally aligned it is possible to insert text boxes where the text is aligned vertically This choice is available only when Asian languages are enabled in Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Languages Note p on g g guag Click on the button in the drawing toolbar to create a vertical text box Note that when editing the contents the text is displayed horizontally Quick font resizing Starting with OO03 1 Impress has convenient buttons on the Formatting toolbar to increase or decrease font size of selected text The amount by which the fon
66. a default installation only the My themes theme is customizable although new themes can be added as explained in Adding a new theme to the Gallery on page 296 Adding objects to the Gallery You may wish to add to the Gallery any images that you use frequently for example a company logo You can then very easily insert these graphics into a document later You can add images only to My Theme or to any other theme that you have created these are indicated by a green icon in the list of themes You cannot add images to the built in themes indicated by an icon of another color Method 1 selecting a file 1 In the theme s Properties on the Files page click the Find Files button The Select path dialog opens 2 You can enter the path for the file s directory in the Path text box or you can navigate to locate the file s directory Use the File type drop down list to help limit the search 3 Click the Select button to start the search 4 A list of graphic files is then displayed in the window You can use the File type filter again to further limit the search 5 Select the files to add To select more than one file hold the Control key down while you click on each file 6 Finally click Add Method 2 drag and drop 1 Open the document containing an image you want to add to the Gallery and display the Gallery theme to which you want to add it 2 Position the mouse pointer above the image without click
67. an AutoText entry to insert those words when you type sm and press F3 Creating AutoText To store some text as AutoText 1 Type the text into your document 2 Select the text 3 Choose Edit gt AutoText or press Control F3 4 In the AutoText dialog box type a name for the AutoText in the Name box Writer will suggest a one letter shortcut which you can change 5 In the large box to the left choose the category for the AutoText entry for example My AutoText 6 Click the AutoText button on the right and select New text only from the menu 7 Click Close to return to your document Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 89 If the only option under the AutoText button is Import either you have Tip not entered a name for your AutoText or there is no text selected in the document AutoText is especially powerful when assigned to fields See Chapter 14 Working with Fields in the Writer Guide for more information Inserting AutoText To insert AutoText type the shortcut and press F3 Formatting text Using styles is recommended Styles are central to using Writer Styles enable you to easily format your document consistently and to change the format with minimal effort A style is a named set of formatting options Writer defines several types of styles for different types of elements characters paragraphs pages frames and lists See Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates in this book and Chapters 6 and 7 in
68. an additional sheet in your spreadsheet the database will have a new table the next time you access it Registering odb databases Databases created by OOo2 x or later are in the odb OpenDocument Base format Other programs can also produce databases in this format Registered a odb database is simple 1 2 3 4 5 Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Base gt Databases Under Registered databases click New Browse to where the database is located Make sure the registered name is correct Click OK Sometimes when updating OOo to a newer version your list of registered Note database files disappears When that happens you need to use these steps to register your database files with your latest version of OOo 230 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Using data sources in OpenOffice org Having registered the data source whether a spreadsheet text document external database or other accepted data source you can use it in other OpenOffice org components including Writer and Calc Viewing data sources Open a document in Writer or Calc To view the data sources available press F4 or select View gt Data Sources from the pull down menu This brings up a list of registered databases which will include Bibliography and any other database registered such as the Automobile database created earlier in this chapter To view each database click on the to the left of the database s name
69. and GIF files If you simply save to your desktop not in a specific folder these separate HTML and graphics files will be all over your desktop So be sure to create a folder to hold all the files 3 Choose the design for all of the pages either from an existing design or by creating a new one If you have not previously saved a design the Existing Design choice is not available HTML Export EW Assign design New design O Existing Design Select an existing design or create a new one 4 Click Next to select the type of web pages to create e Standard HTML one page for each slide with navigation links to move from slide to slide e Standard HTML with frames one page with a navigation bar on the left hand side uses slide title as navigation links Click on links to display pages in right hand side e Automatic one page for each slide with each page set with the Refresh meta tag so a browser automatically cycles from one page to the next e WebCast generates an ASP or Perl application to display the slides Unfortunately OOo has no direct support for PHP yet 318 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Publication type Standard HIML format Standard HTML with frames CO Automatic WebCast _Next gt gt 5 Decide how the images will be saved PNG GIF or JPG and what resolution to use When choosing a resolution consider what the majority of your viewers might be using If you
70. and Save dialogs for your operating system deselect the Use OpenOffice org dialogs option When this option is selected the Open and Save dialogs supplied with OpenOffice org will be used See Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org for more about the OOo Open and Save dialogs This book uses the OOo Open and Save dialogs in illustrations Document status If this option is selected then the next time you close the document after printing the print date is recorded in the document properties as a change and you will be prompted to save the document again even if you did not make any other changes Year two digits Specifies how two digit years are interpreted For example if the two digit year is set to 1930 and you enter a date of 1 1 30 or later into your document the date is interpreted as 1 1 1930 or later An earlier date is interpreted as being in the following century that is 1 1 20 is interpreted as 1 1 2020 Memory options In the Options dialog click OpenOffice org gt Memory These options control how OpenOffice org uses your computer s memory and how much memory it requires Before changing them you may wish to consider the following points e More memory can make OpenOffice org faster and more convenient for example more undo steps require more memory but the trade off is less memory available for other applications and you could run out of memory altogether e If your documents contain a lot of objects s
71. are numerical fields Enter values directly into them or use the up and down arrows When the value is entered use the Tab key to go to the next field e Clicking the up arrow increases the value and the down arrow decreases the value one unit e These two arrows only change the numerals to the left of the decimal place e Numerals to the right of the decimal place must be changed by deleting them and typing the desired ones The Motel s Payment field is a dropdown list If as in my case all of the elements of the list start with different letters typing the first letter selects the desired entry e If two or more elements of the list have the same first letter repeated typing of the first letter will cycle through the elements with this same first letter e When the selection is correct use the Tab key to go to the Misc field The rest of the fields of the main form are either numerical fields or dropdown lists until we reach the Misc Notes field It is a text field Type anything you desire in this field just as you would any simple text editor Since the Tab key is used to move between fields it can not be used in a text field All spacing must be done by the spacebar Finally the Enter key only acts as a line break to move the cursor to the next line While the Enter key will move from non text fields to non text fields it will not Note do so from a text field Use the Tab key instead If we did not have a subform f
72. as EGIEVERT everywhere along the ly were land slips and switt thawings and sudden floods and one whole side of the old Rin came down in thunder and cut ofl te SDT Eg eitine for ever from the exploring feet these carly settlers had chanced to be on the hither side of the gorges when the world had so itself and he perforce had to forget his wife and his child and all the friends and possessions Figure 68 Selecting items that are not next to each other To select nonconsecutive items using the keyboard 1 Select the first piece of text For more information about keyboard selection of text see the topic Navigating and selecting with the keyboard in the Help 2 Press Shift F8 This puts Writer in Add mode The word ADD appears on the status bar 82 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 3 Use the arrow keys to move to the start of the next piece of text to be selected Hold down the Shift key and select the next piece of text 4 Repeat as often as needed Now you can work with the selected text Press Esc to exit from this mode Selecting a vertical block of text You can select a vertical block or column of text that is separated by spaces or tabs as you might see in text pasted from e mails program listings or other sources using OOo s block selection mode To change to block selection mode use Edit gt Selection Mode gt Block Area or click several times in the status bar o
73. aspect height length ratio of the object remains the same Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 191 Rotation Rotating an object lets you move the object around an axis To do this dynamically with the mouse use the red handles as you do when changing the size of the object Rotation works in a slightly different way for 3D objects because the rotation occurs in 3D space and not in one plane See Chapter 7 Working with 3D Objects in the Draw Guide regarding rotation when Edit Points mode is active Note To rotate an object or a group of objects drag the red corner handle point of the selection with the mouse The mouse cursor takes the shape of an arc of a circle with an arrow at each end A faded version of the object being rotated appears and the current angle of rotation is dynamically shown in the status bar Rotations are made around an axis which is displayed as a small symbol as shown in Figure 169 You can move the axis of rotation with the mouse If you hold down the Shift key during the rotation the operation will be carried out in increments of 15 Figure 169 Rotating an object Inclination and perspective To slant or shear objects use the red handles located at the midpoint of an edge of the selected objects The mouse pointer changes to a when the pointer hovers over one of these midpoint handles Not every object can be slanted basic shapes can be rotated but not slanted The slant axis is
74. b a b ab dsb a b Figure 253 Tooltip indicates the asb asb a b Relations button Figure 254 After selecting Relations Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 259 Step 4 Click on the a b symbol The equation editor now shows the markup pi lt gt simeq lt gt Step 5 Delete the lt gt text and add 3 14159 at the end of the equation We end up with the markup pi simeq 3 14159 The result is shown in Figure 255 r 3 14159 fara Le e Figure 255 Final result Customizations Formula editor as a floating window The formula editor can cover a large part of the Writer window To turn the formula editor into a floating window do this 1 Hover the mouse over the editor frame as shown in Figure 256 2 Hold down the Control key and double click Figure 256 Hold down the Control key and double click on the border of the formula editor to turn it into a floating window Figure 257 shows the result You can dock the floating window again by using the same steps Hold down the Control key and double click the window frame 260 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 z Commands k Figure 257 Formula editor as a floating window How can I make a formula bigger This is one of the most common questions people ask about Math The answer is simple but not intuitive 1 Start the formula editor and choose Format gt Font size G Untitle
75. button A gray line appears running across the page Drag the mouse downwards and this line follows 4 Release the mouse button and the screen splits into two views each with its own vertical scroll bar You can scroll the upper and lower parts independently Notice in Figure 103 the Beta and the AO values are in the upper part of the window and other calculations are in the lower part Thus you can make changes to the Beta and AO values and watch their affects on the calculations in the lower half of the window You can also split the screen using a menu command Click in a cell Tip immediately below and to the right of where you wish the screen to be split and choose Window gt Split Splitting the screen vertically To split the screen vertically 1 Move the mouse pointer into the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the screen and place it over the small button on the right with the black triangle Immediately to the right of this button is a thick black line Split screen bar Figure 106 Split bar on horizontal scroll bar 2 Move the mouse pointer over this line and it turns into a line with two arrows 3 Hold down the left mouse button and a gray line appears running up the page Drag the mouse to the left and this line follows 4 Release the mouse button and the screen is split into two views each with its own horizontal scroll bar You can scroll the left and right parts of the window indepen
76. changing the document because the link to the file remains valid and the modified image will appear when you next open the document This can be a big advantage if you or someone else perhaps a graphic artist is updating images e Disadvantage If you send the document to someone else or move it to a different computer you must also send the image files or the receiver will not be able to see the linked images You need to keep track of the location of the images and make sure the recipient knows where to put them on another machine so the document can find them For example you might keep images in a subfolder named Images under the folder containing the document the recipient of the file needs to put the images in a subfolder with the same name under the folder containing the document When inserting the same image several times in the document it would Note appear beneficial to create links however this is not necessary as OOo embeds in the document only one copy of the image file Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 291 Embedding linked images If you originally linked the images you can easily embed one or more of them later if you wish To do so 1 2 3 4 Open the document in OpenOffice org and choose Edit gt Links The Edit Links dialog Figure 283 shows all the linked files In the Source file list select the files you want to change from linked to embedded Click the Break Link butto
77. contains sample tables from which to choose Each table has a list of available fields We can delete some of these fields and add other fields A field in a table is one bit of information For example a price list table might have one field for item name one for the description and a third for the price Since none of the fields we need for our Automobile database are contained in any of the sample wizard tables we will create a simple table using the wizard that has nothing to do with our database This section is an exercise in explaining how the Wizard works The Wizard permits the fields of the table to come from more than one suggested table We will create a table with fields from three different suggested tables in the Wizard Caution Every table requires a Primary key field What this field does will be explained later We will use this field to number our entries and want A that number to automatically increase as we add each entry Click Use Wizard to Create Table This opens the Table Wizard Figure 176 Step 1 Select fields We will use the CD Collection Sample table in the Personal category to select the fields we need 1 Category Select Personal The Sample Tables dropdown list changes to a list of personal sample tables 2 Sample tables Select CD Collection The Available fields box changes to a list of available fields for this table Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 205 3 Selected fields Using
78. copy O Eo Distorting an image There are three tools on the Effects menu that let you drag the corners and edges of an object to distort the image The Distort tool distorts an object in perspective the Set to Circle slant and Set in Circle perspective tools both create a pseudo three dimensional effect See Chapter 4 of the Draw Guide for details Dynamic gradients You can control transparency gradients in the same manner as color gradients Both types of gradient can be used together With a transparency gradient the direction and degree of an object s fill color changes from opaque to transparent in a regular gradient the fill changes from one color to another but the degree of transparency remains the same See Chapter 4 of the Draw Guide for details Duplication Duplication makes copies of an object while applying a set of changes such as color or rotation to the duplicates The result of a duplication is a new group of objects To start duplication click on an object or group and choose Edit gt Duplicate The dialog shown in Figure 172 appears The options chosen in Figure 172 applied to a blue rectangle produce the following result 196 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Duplicate Number of copies Placement Y axis 0 50cm FE Default Angle 10 degrees aaa Enlargement Width Height Colors Start End Figure 172 Duplicating an object Cross fadi
79. dash the width of the letter m in the font you are using Type at least one character two hyphens and at least one more character then a space The two hyphens will be replaced by an em dash See the Help for more details For other methods of inserting dashes see the Writer Guide Setting tab stops and indents The horizontal ruler shows both the default tab stops and any tab stops that you have defined Tab settings affect indentation of full paragraphs using the Increase Indent and Decrease Indent icons on the Formatting toolbar as well as indentation of parts of a paragraph by pressing the Tab key on the keyboard Using the default tab spacing can cause formatting problems if you share documents with other people If you use the default tab spacing and then send the document to someone else who has chosen a different default tab spacing tabbed material will change to use the other person s settings This may cause major formatting problems Instead of using the defaults define your own tab settings as described in this section To define indents and tab settings for one or more selected paragraphs double click on a part of the ruler that is not between the left and right indent icons to open the Indents amp Spacing page of the Paragraph dialog Double click anywhere between the left and right indent icons on the ruler to open the Tabs page of the Paragraph dialog A better strategy is to define tabs for the paragraph
80. e From template uses a template design already created as the basis fora new presentation The wizard changes to show a list of available templates Choose the template you want Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 153 e Open existing presentation continues work on a previously created presentation The wizard changes to show a list of existing presentations Choose the presentation you want Both of these options are covered in the Impress Guide 2 Click Next Figure 140 shows the Presentation Wizard step 2 as it appears if you selected Empty Presentation at step 1 If you selected From template an example slide is shown in the Preview box Presentation Wizard J Select a slide design Presentation Backgrounds lt Original gt Dark Blue with Orange Subte Accents Select an output medium mig O Sareen O Overhead sheet Slide O Paper Figure 140 Selecting a slide design D Ouuu e Preview 3 Choose a design under Select a slide design The slide design section gives you two main choices Presentation Backgrounds and Presentations Each one has a list of choices for slide designs If you want to use one of these other than lt Original gt click it to select it e The types of Presentation Backgrounds are shown in Figure 140 By clicking an item you will see a preview of the slide design in the Preview window Impress contains three choices under
81. ent en ne ere aan eer nace thee et oer 9 aare Olea Biel ecO Gs ee ee eer eT ee ere rc ee a eet ee cen ee ee renee tn ae eer eee 10 The advantages Of OpenOffice OFG cccccececcecececececcecececencesececensetececensesececeeseseees 11 Mimin Ty a aE EEE EET 12 P E E a aE E 12 How to neta The SOW aI aceon cca ce iSe ninan ENNEN FEES SEIRA AEE EAE ADEE NEE 13 EXtOnSiONnS and BOOS esre NENE AEAEE EEEE E EE 13 Hov egote 8 eee ete eer E 13 rT T a ab aloe T E EA EEIE E O E N EAEAN 14 Paris ol tie man pce te ees tener E E Rai 17 What are all these things Called cece cece ccecececencecececesensecesensececeeesensensenses Ad MoM RULE a now docume 1 eee aine EEA EEE ENN 23 Opening an existing document ssssesssssresseesreresrressreseresersserrsserrerrssserereeseeeeereseere 23 Be EN ae E eres EEEN EEA EET TE E T E OET 24 Renaming and deleting kill eee i a ane or eee Seen ere en O 29 Using the Open and Save As CialOGS cccccesececescncecececensecensensenseceesecseceeceesenes 29 Uan ine Navi fc 10 gaat een een on ee sees R 27 Undoing and redoing changesS secssssseesseessessecsreesseessecsreesseeseressreresseeseeesseseeeeese 28 BEAR tae ttn A IE A E E A EN E AE A E AIE O 29 DS En Ere acer co A EE EE E E N S T E E N TA 30 Using OpenOffice org on a IY fa Lop meee een tae entre Onn Pe er ane at eee 30 Chapter 2 Seng as ce eneeneo sa aticrannniegapecausaawaeanrersssesen esas acnecebvontincasaanvesiadoianieds 31 Cho
82. folder that contains the template you want to export A list of the templates contained in that folder appears underneath the folder name 2 Click the template that you want to export 3 Click the Commands button and choose Export Template from the drop down menu The Save As window opens 4 Find the folder into which you want to export the template and click Save Examples of style use The following examples of common use of page and paragraph styles are taken from Writer There are many other ways to use styles see the guides for the various components for details Defining a different first page for a document Many documents such as letters and reports have a first page that is different from the other pages in the document For example the first page of a letterhead typically has a different header or the first page of a report might have no header or footer while the other pages do With OOo you can define the page style for the first page and specify the style for the following pages to be applied automatically Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 73 As an example we can use the First Page and Default page styles that come with OOo Figure 58 shows what we want to happen the first page is to be followed by the default page and all the following pages are to be in the Default page style Details are in Chapter 4 Formatting Pages in the Writer Guide Default Figure 58 Flow of page styles Dividing a docu
83. for Nonlinear Programming for Calc 356 extensions and addons sources of 13 F fax icon adding to toolbar 350 FDF 279 features Calc 106 Draw 175 Impress 145 Writer 77 fields 170 fields bookmarks 102 cross reference 102 Fields dialog box References tab 103 file locations 38 file sharing options 41 Fill Format 58 Fill tool Calc 125 fill editing 194 filtering visible cells Calc 136 Flash export 316 flip an object 195 floating toolbars 18 19 floating window 20 flowchart symbols 188 font history 36 ignore settings when importing HTML 50 options 41 preview 36 replacement table 41 replacements 41 sizes for HTML 49 font resizing Impress 160 Fontwork alignment 302 anchoring 304 area options 304 attributes 303 Character spacing 303 creating an object 300 editing an object 301 Formatting toolbar 303 Gallery 300 grouping 305 line options 304 moving and resizing objects 305 positioning options 304 same letter heights 302 toolbar 300 302 Form Wizard 215 Index 373 formatting pages 94 Formatting toolbar 18 formatting Calc AutoFormat 133 conditional 134 themes 134 formula bar Calc 108 formula editor See equation editor 260 formula files opening 367 formula layout 262 Free Software Foundation FSF 364 freeform line Draw 185 function key shortcuts 361 Function Wizard Calc 108 G Gallery adding objects 294 creating anew theme 295 deleting images 295 deleting objects 295 hide show 293 in
84. have been saved with more than one version use the Version drop down to select which version you wish to open in read only mode For Microsoft Office documents only the current version can be opened Use the File type field to specify the type of file to be opened or the format of the file to be saved The Read only option on the Open dialog opens the file for reading and printing only Consequently most of the toolbars disappear and most menu options are disabled An Edit File button is displayed on the Standard toolbar to open the file for editing You can open files from the Web by typing a URL in the File name field on the Open dialog 26 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Using the Navigator The Navigator lists objects contained in a document collected into categories For example in Writer it shows Headings Tables Text frames Comments Graphics Bookmarks and other items as shown in Figure 13 In Calc it shows Sheets Range Names Database Ranges Graphics Drawing Objects and other items In Impress and Draw it shows Slides Pictures and other items To open the Navigator click its icon on the Standard toolbar or press F5 or choose View gt Navigator on the menu bar You can dock the Navigator to either side of the main OOo window or leave it floating see Docking floating windows and toolbars on page 20 Navigator E Text frames BY Graphics ib GLE objects x Bookmarks Sections e
85. integral The sum and int commands can optionally take the parameters from and to These are used for lower and upper limits respectively These parameters can be used singly or together Limits for integrals are usually treated as subscripts and superscripts 262 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 sum from k 1 tona k iM Q gt int from O to x f t dt Or int 0 x f t dt fdt or ff jae o x an int from Re f Tn Sum to infinity 2 n Ms N Note For more details on integrals and sums see the Math Guide Brackets with matrices look ugly For background we start with an overview of the matrix command matrix a b c d a b c d Rows are separated by two s and entries within each row are separated Note by one The first problem people have with matrices is that brackets do not scale with the matrix matrix a b c d 4 c d Math provides scalable brackets That is the brackets grow in size to match the size of their contents Use the commands left and right to make scalable brackets a b left matrix a b c d right 1 C Tip Use left and right to obtain square brackets Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 263 How do I make a derivative Making derivatives essentially comes down to one trick Tell Math it s a fraction In other words you have to use the over command Combine
86. integrated with office productivity suites A few examples of drawing functions are e Layer management e Magnetic grid point system e Dimensions and measurement display e Connectors for making organization charts e 3D functions that enable small three dimensional drawings to be created with texture and lighting effects e Drawing and page style integration e B zier curves This chapter introduces some of Draw s features but it does not attempt to cover all of them See the Draw Guide and the application Help for more information The Draw workspace The main components of the Draw workspace are shown in Figure 150 You can surround the drawing area with toolbars and information areas The number and position of the visible tools vary with the task in hand and user preferences Therefore your setup may look different For example many users put the main Drawing toolbar on the left hand side of the workspace not at the bottom as shown here You can split drawings in Draw over several pages Multipage drawings are used mainly for presentations The Pages pane on the left side of the Draw window in Figure 150 gives an overview of the pages that you create If the Pages pane is not visible on your setup you can enable it from the View menu View gt Page Pane Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 175 File Edit Insert Format Tools Modify Window Help D Bibel b28 yE k a a Bag gt Pages 1
87. is not a odb file Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 229 1 2 3 4 File gt New gt Database opens the Database Wizard window Select Connect to an existing database Click the arrow next to the Database type field and select the database type from the dropdown list Click Next Click Browse and select the database Click Next Accept the default settings Register the database for me and Open the database for editing Click Finish Name and save the database in the location of your choice Accessing a spreadsheet as a data source Accessing a spreadsheet is similar to accessing other databases 1 2 3 4 Choose File gt New gt Database Select Connect to an existing database Select Spreadsheet as the Database type Click Browse to locate the spreadsheet you want to access If the spreadsheet is password protected check the Password required box Click Next If the spreadsheet requires a user s name enter it If a password is also required check its box Click Next Using this method of accessing a spreadsheet you cannot change anything in the spreadsheet You can only view the contents of the spreadsheet run queries and create reports based upon the data already entered into the spreadsheet Note All changes in a spreadsheet must be made in the spreadsheet itself using Calc After modifying the spreadsheet and saving it you will see the changes in the database If you create and save
88. know to which table it belongs 3 All other fields Date FuelCost FuelQuantity Odometer and PaymentType Type the next field name in the Field Name column Select the Field Type for each field For Date use Date DATE Press the D key to select it PaymentType uses Text VARCHAR the default setting All other fields use Number NUMERIC Press the N key once to select it FuelCost FuelQuantity and Odometer need changes in the Field Properties section Figure 179 FuelQuantity Change Length to 6 and Decimal places to 3 Many fuel pumps measure fuel to thousands of a gallon in the USA where I live Odometer Change the Length to 10 and the Decimal places to 1 FuelCost Change the Length to 5 and Decimal places to 2 Click the Format example button This opens the Field Format window Figure 180 Use Currency as the Category and your currency as the Format My currency has two decimal places Use what is appropriate for yours Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 _ Field Name Field Type g FuellD Integer INTEGER Date Date DATE p FuelCost Number NUME b FuelQuantity Number NUMERIC Odometer Number NUMERIC PaymentTyp Text VARCHAR lt Field Properties Entry required No w Length Decimal places Default value fi Format example 0 00 Figure 179 Changing field properties Format Alignment Category Format Langu
89. later A variable like a piece of paper contains information that can be changed and read The DIM statement is similar to setting aside a piece of paper to be used to store a message or note The EnterMyName macro defines the variables document and dispatcher as type object Other common variable types include string integer and date A third variable named argsi1 is an array of property values A variable of type array allows a single variable to contain multiple values similar to storing multiple pages ina single book Values in an array are usually numbered starting from zero The number in the parentheses indicates the highest usable number to access a storage location In this example there is only one value and it is numbered zero Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 327 Pulling the macro together The following details are very complete it is not important to understand all of the details The first line defines the start of the macro sub EnterMyName Declare two variables dim document as object dim dispatcher as object ThisComponent refers to the current document The CurrentController property of a document refers to a service that controls the document For example when you type it is the current controller that notices The current controller then dispatches the changes to the document s frame The Frame property of a controller returns a main frame for a document Therefore the variable named documen
90. least importance Of course if we were interested in what music we bought on a given day the date purchased would be the most important sort by Then by Mii Ascending C Descending C Descending Figure 219 Sorting order page 1 Click the first Sort by dropdown list Click CD Collection Artist to select it To list the artists in alphabetical order a z select Ascending on the right 238 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 2 Click the second Sort by dropdown list e Click CD Collection ArtistTitle and select Ascending 3 Repeat this process for CD Collection DatePurchased 4 Click Next Step 3 Select the search conditions The search conditions allow us to compare the name we entered with the names of the artist in our database and decide whether to include a particular artist in our query or not e is equal to the same as e is not equal to not the same as e is smaller than comes before e is greater than comes after e is equal or less than the same as or comes before e is equal or greater than the same as or comes after e like similar to in some way These conditions apply to numbers letters using the alphabetical order Note and dates 1 Since we are only searching for one thing we will use the default setting of Match all of the following 2 We are looking for a particular artist so select CD Collection Artist in the Fields list and is equal to as
91. move the cursor to the anchor point of the comment in the document Right click on the comment to quickly edit or delete it You can also navigate through the comments using the keyboard Use Ctrl Alt Page Down to move to the next comment and Ctri Alt Page Up to move to the previous comment Creating a table of contents Writer s table of contents feature lets you build an automated table of contents from the headings in your document Before you start make sure that the headings are styled consistently For example you can use the Heading 1 style for chapter titles and the Heading 2 and Heading 3 styles for chapter subheadings Although tables of contents can be customized extensively in Writer often the default settings are all you need Creating a quick table of contents is simple 1 When you create your document use the following paragraph styles for different heading levels such as chapter and section headings Heading 1 Heading 2 Heading 3 and so on These are what will appear in your table of contents 2 Place the cursor where you want the table of contents to be inserted 3 Choose Insert gt Indexes and Tables gt Indexes and Tables 4 Change nothing in the Insert Index Table dialog Click OK If you add or delete text so that headings move to different pages or you add delete or change headings you need to update the table of contents To do this 1 Place the cursor within the table of contents 2 Righ
92. nearly all of the features of OOo How can I contribute to You can help with the development of OOo in many OpenOffice org ways and you do not need to be a programmer To start check out this webpage http www openoffice org contributing html What s the catch There really is none you can read the licenses here http www openoffice org license html File formats OOo can open OpenOffice org can open a wide variety of file formats in addition to the OpenDocument formats Opening text documents In addition to OpenDocument formats odt ott oth and odm Writer 3 can open the formats used by OOo 1 x sxw stw and sxg and the following text document formats Microsoft Word 6 0 95 97 2000 XP doc and dot Microsoft Word 2003 XML xml Microsoft Word 2007 XML docx docm dotx dotm Microsoft WinWord 5 doc WordPerfect Document wpd WPS 2000 Office 1 0 wps Rich Text Format rtf Text CSV csv and txt StarWriter formats sdw sgl vor DocBook xml Unified Office Format text uot uof Ichitaro 8 9 10 11 jtd and jtt Hangul WP 97 hwp T602 Document 602 txt AportisDoc Palm pdb Pocket Word psw HTML Document htm html Most of these file types are automatically detected by OOo so they can be opened without explicitly selecting the document type in the file picker When opening htm or html files used for web pages OOo customizes Writer f
93. new location an absolute hyperlink will break but a relative one will not To change the way that OOo stores the hyperlinks in your file select Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General and choose if you want URLs saved relatively when referencing the File System or the Internet or both Calc will always display an absolute hyperlink Don t be alarmed when it does this even when you have saved a relative hyperlink this absolute target address will be updated if you move the file Make sure that the folder structure on your computer is the same as the Note file structure on your web server if you save your links as relative to the file system and you are going to upload pages to the Internet When you rest the mouse pointer on a hyperlink a help tip displays the absolute reference since OOo uses absolute path names internally The Tip complete path and address can only be seen when you view the result of the HTML export saving the spreadsheet as an HTML file by loading the HTML file as Text or by opening it with a text editor 308 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Creating hyperlinks When you type text such as a website addresses or URL that can be used as a hyperlink and then press the spacebar or the Enter key OOo automatically creates the hyperlink and applies formatting to the text usually a color and underlining If this does not happen you can enable this feature using Tools gt AutoCorrect O
94. of the current document Tip 36 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Mouse positioning Specifies if and how the mouse pointer will be positioned in newly opened dialogs Middle mouse button Defines the function of the middle mouse button e Automatic scrolling dragging while pressing the middle mouse button shifts the view e Paste clipboard pressing the middle mouse button inserts the contents of the Selection clipboard at the cursor position The Selection clipboard is independent of the normal clipboard that you use by Edit gt Copy Cut Paste or their respective keyboard shortcuts Clipboard and Selection clipboard can contain different contents at the same time Copy content Edit gt Copy Control C Select text table or object Paste content Edit gt Paste Control V Clicking the middle mouse button pastes at the cursor pastes at the mouse pointer position position Pasting into No effect on the clipboard The last marked selection is the another document contents content of the selection clipboard Selection Transparency Determines the appearance of selected text or graphics which appear on a Shaded background To make the shaded background more or less dark increase or decrease the Transparency setting If you prefer selected material to appear in reversed color typically white text on a black background deselect this option Print options On the OpenOffice o
95. on or off with the icon on the Options toolbar Configuring the grid The color spacing and resolution of the grid points can be individually chosen for each axis The spacing between the lines is defined in the Grid options dialog Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Draw gt Grid Grid Snap to grid Resolution Subdivision Horizontal 0 50cm s Horizontal 10 point s Vertical 0 50cm Vertical 10 point s L Synchronize axes snap Snap position L To snap lines When creating or moving objects To the page margins Extend edges L To object frame L When rotating 15 00 degrees To object points Point reduction 15 00 degrees Snap range 5 Pixels A Figure 158 Setting grid options In the dialog shown in Figure 158 you can set the following parameters e Vertical and horizontal spacing of the dots in the grid You can also change the unit of measurement used in the general Draw options Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Draw gt General 180 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 e The resolution is the size of the squares or rectangles in the grid If the resolution is Horizontal 1 cm Vertical 2 cm the grid consists of rectangles 2 cm high and 1 cm wide e Subdivisions are additional points that appear along the sides of each rectangle or square in the grid Objects snap to subdivisions as well as to the corners of the grid e The pixel pix element size of the snap area defines how close you need
96. or e Click the Paste icon without releasing the left mouse button Then select Unformatted text from the resulting menu The range of choices on the Paste Special menu varies depending on the origin and formatting of the text or other object to be pasted See Figure 70 for an example with text on the clipboard Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 83 Ske em y AAE OpenOffice org Writer DDE link HTML HyperText Markup Language Formatted text RTF Unformatted text Figure 70 Paste Special menu Finding and replacing text and formatting Writer has two ways to find text within a document the Find toolbar for fast searching and the Find amp Replace dialog In the dialog you can e Find and replace words and phrases e Use wildcards and regular expressions to fine tune a search e Find and replace specific formatting e Find and replace paragraph styles See bein hy not visible you can display it using View Find fa b gt To display the Find amp Replace dialog use the keyboard shortcut Control F or choose Edit gt Find amp Replace from the menu bar lt Find amp Replace E EJ Search for m and Find All Replace with ri Replace Replace All E Match case Whole words only Fewer Options M Current selection only aie E Backwards E Regular expressions O Similarity search No Format E Search for Styles E Notes Figure 71 Expanded Find amp Replace dialog 84 Get
97. or editing for selecting objects click on the Points button Z from the Drawing toolbar In standard mode when you begin a new drawing the Points button is not active and the default mode is for selections to be moved or changed in size these selections are indicated by small green squares When the Points button is active the default mode is for selections to be edited these selections are indicated by blue squares Some objects will have one or more extra handles which are larger or colored differently This is explained in more detail in Chapter 3 of the Draw Guide Selections for rotating objects are indicated by small red circles and a symbol representing the center of rotation To choose these selections click on the Effects drop down button Gi from the Drawing toolbar Changing the selection mode To go from one mode to another you can do one of the following Choose the Points button Z from the Drawing toolbar to switch from the simple selection mode to Points mode You can also use the keyboard shortcut F8 Points Choose the Effects drop down button from the Drawing toolbar to activate the Rotation mode for a selected object If you often work in Rotation mode you can choose the Rotation Mode after Clicking Object button from the Options bar you can cycle through normal and rotation modes just by clicking on the object This can be more convenient than repeatedly clicking on the object
98. org for more information e From any open component of OOo Click the triangle to the right of the New icon on the main toolbar and select Presentation from the drop down menu or choose File gt New gt Presentation from the menu bar When you start Impress for the first time the Presentation Wizard is shown Here you can choose from the following options e Empty presentation which gives you a blank document e From template which is a presentation designed with a template of your choice e Open existing presentation If you prefer not to use the wizard in future you can select Do not show this wizard again Click Create to open the main Impress window For detailed instructions about how to use the wizard see Creating a new presentation on page 153 Parts of the main Impress window The main Impress window Figure 128 has three parts the Slides pane Workspace and Tasks pane Additionally several toolbars can be displayed or hidden during the creation of a presentation Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 145 Untitled 1 OpenOffice org Impress File Edit View Insert Format Tools SlideShow Window Help m au A G5 b ES xi Normal Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorter e Master Pages Co EJ oa Glick bad Ie F Layouts Click to add title o I E ho Click to add text e Table Design t Custom Animation z a Slide Transition gt 2m T rr 0 0 9 H P KY BA O ci 9 16
99. pages Enable copying of content Enable text access For accessibility tools Figure 275 Security page of PDF Options dialog General Initial View User Interface Links Security Set open password Mo open password set POF document will not be encrypted Set permission password Set Open Password Passmord te ots bs os ee ECE Confirm seekskekokakt Figure 276 Setting a password to encrypt a PDF Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 283 Exporting to other formats OOo uses the term export for some file operations involving a change of file type If you cannot find what you want under File gt Save As look under File gt Export as well OpenOffice org can export files to XHTML In addition OOo Draw and OOo Impress can export to Adobe Flash swf and a range of image formats To export to one of these formats choose File gt Export On the Export dialog specify a file name for the exported document then select the required format in the File format list and click the Export button E mailing documents OOo provides several ways to quickly and easily send documents as an e mail attachment in one of three formats OpenDocument OOo s default format Microsoft Office formats or PDF Documents can only be sent from the OOo menu if a mail profile has Note been set up To send the current document in OpenDocument format 1 Choose File gt Send gt Document as E mail Open
100. people living at the same address and the database needs to distinguish between them Note The simplest method is to assign a unique number to each one number the first person 1 the second 2 and so on Each entry has one number and every number is different so it is easy to say record ID 172 This is the option chosen here CollectionID is just a number assigned automatically by Base to each record of this table Step 4 Create the table 1 2 3 If desired rename the table at this point If you rename it make the name meaningful to you For this example make no changes Leave the option Insert data immediately checked Click Finish to complete the table wizard Close the window created by the table wizard You are now back to the main window of the database with the listing of the tables queries forms and reports Notice that a table named CD Collection is now listed in the Tables portion of the window Creating a table by copying an existing table If you have a large collection of music you might want to create a table for each type of music you have Rather than creating each table from the wizard you can make copies of the original table naming each according to the type of music contained in it 1 2 3 4 5 6 Click on the Tables icon in the Database pane to see the existing tables Right click on the CD Collection table icon Choose Copy from the pop up menu Move the mouse point
101. remove personal information automatically on saving To remove personal and some other data from a file go to File gt Properties On the General tab uncheck Apply user data and then click the Reset button This removes any names in the created and modified fields deletes the modification and printing dates and resets the editing time to zero the creation date to the current date and time and the version number to 1 To remove version information either go to File gt Versions select the versions from the list and click Delete or use Save As and save the file with a different name 288 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 OpenOffice org 3 Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork Introduction You can add graphic and image files including photos drawings scanned images and others to OpenOffice org documents OOo can import various vector line drawing and raster bitmap file formats The most commonly used graphic formats are GIF JPG PNG and BMP See Appendix B for a full list of the graphic formats OOo can import Graphics in OOo are of three basic types e Image files such as photos drawings and scanned images e Diagrams created using OOo s drawing tools e Charts created using OOo s Chart facility This chapter covers images and diagrams More detailed descriptions on working with drawing tools can be found in the Draw Guide and Impress Guide Instructions on how to create ch
102. say that an event occured For example a document was opened a key was pressed or the mouse moved You can associate a macro with an event so the macro is run when the event occurs For example a common use is to assign the open document event to run a macro that performs certain setup tasks for the document To associate a macro with an event use the Events page of the Customize dialog For more information see Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros Adding functionality with extensions An extension is a package that can be installed into OpenOffice org to add new functionality Although individual extensions can be found in different places the official extension repository is at http extensions services openoffice org Some extensions are free of charge others are available for a fee Check the descriptions to see what licenses and fees apply to the ones that interest you Installing extensions To install an extension follow these steps 1 Download an extension and save it anywhere on your computer 2 In OOo select Tools gt Extension Manager from the menu bar In the Extension Manager dialog Figure 322 click Add 3 A file browser window opens Find and select the extension you want to install and click Open The extension begins installing You may be asked to accept a license agreement 4 When the installation is complete the extension is listed in the Extension Manager dialog Chapter 14 Custom
103. shows some frozen rows and columns The heavier horizontal line between rows 3 and 14 and the heavier vertical line between columns C and H denote the frozen areas Rows 4 through 13 and columns D through G have been scrolled off the page The first three rows and columns remained because are frozen into place Pt ag fee Ee eg en adede Leia jis r i T 5 CN 5 R 2 co bh z 1 S 5 oa z G od H ip T OL OO i Lo i n S gs af a gf S amp 2 2 S a a 2 s a S gf 5 on aj j gt L L aj a A or o oO Date 10 02 10 03 10 04 10 08 10 06 10 07 10 08 10 09 10 10 10 11 10 42 10 13 10 14 4 3 Average 267 5 Possible 26 0 1 0 30 12 0 18 0 26 0 40 60 eol 35 40 78 0 11 0 76 6 200 0 Smith John 26 00 1 001 0 00 8 00 26 00 0 00 6 00 0 00 3 50 4 00 66 50 8 00 11 87 9 181 4 Klein Mike 28 00 1 00 1 00 11 50 8 00 6 00 0 00 5 00 6 00 3 50 3 50 47 50 10 00 1 72 7 186 5 Johnson Torn 27 00 1 00 3 00 0 00 13 00 6 00 0 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 3 00 47 50 9 00 10 413 0 Doe John Af oo 1 00 1 00 2 001 PANI 2 00 17 00 17 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 3 50 54 00 a 00 1 256 0 Doe Jane 28 00 1 00 3 00 9 00 16 00 Ta 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 4 00 79 50 10 00 1 67 3 172 0 Kupfer Peter 26 00 1 00 3 00 x a 6 00 20 00 0 00 6 00 6 00 0 00 3 50 41 00 6 50 224 5 Newton Issac 26 00 1 00 3 00 6 00 15 00 23 00 4 00
104. slow medium fast choose between an automatic or manual transition and choose how long the selected slide will be shown Workspace The Workspace has five tabs Normal Outline Notes Handout and Slide Sorter These five tabs are called View buttons The Workspace below the View buttons changes depending on the chosen view Normal Qutine Notes Handout Slide Sorter Figure 129 Workspace tabs Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 147 Toolbars Many toolbars can be used during slide creation they can be displayed or hidden by clicking View gt Toolbars and selecting from the menu You can also select the icons that you wish to appear on each toolbar For more information refer to Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org in this book Many of the toolbars in Impress are similar to the toolbars in Draw Refer to the Draw Guide for details on the functions available and how to use them Status bar The Status bar located at the bottom of the Impress window contains information that you may find useful when working on a presentation For details on the contents and use of these fields see Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org in this book and Chapter 1 Introducing Impress in the Impress Guide The sizes are given in the current measurement unit not to be confused with the ruler units This unit is defined in Tools gt Options Note gt OpenOffice org Draw gt General where you can also change the scale of
105. specify a high resolution then a viewer with a medium resolution monitor will have to scroll sideways to see the entire slide which isprobably not desirable a HTML Export Save graphics as Monitor r solution PNG Low resolution 640x480 pixels GIF Medium r solution 800x600 pixels PG High resolution 1024x768 pixels ig Quality Effects Export sounds when slid advances 6 If Create title page was chosen in step 4 supply the information for it on the next page The title contains an author name e mail address and home page along with any additional information you want to include This page of the Wizard does not display if Create title page was not chosen Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages 319 Information for the tite page Author E mail address Your homepage Additional information _ Link to a copy of the original presentation 7 Choose the navigation button style to use to move from one page to another If you do not choose any OOo will create a text navigator a HTML Export mi fe bes a select button style E Text only 8 Select the color scheme for the web pages Available schemes include the document s existing scheme one based upon browser colors and a completely user defined scheme You can save a new scheme so that it will appear on the first page of the HTML export wizard 320 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 HTML Export Select color scheme
106. style See Chapters 6 and 7 in the Writer Guide for more information Using tabs to space out material on a page is not recommended Tip Depending on what you are trying to accomplish a table is usually a better choice Changing the default tab stop interval Any changes to the default tab setting will affect the existing default Note tab stops in any document you open afterward as well as tab stops you insert after making the change 86 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 To set the measurement unit and the spacing of default tab stop intervals go to Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt General Se tings Measurement unit inch Tab stops 0 50 a Figure 73 Selecting a default tab stop interval You can also set or change the measurement unit for rulers in the current document by right clicking on the ruler to open a list of units Click on one of them to change the ruler to that unit The selected setting applies only to that ruler Millimeter Centimeter Inch Point Pica Figure 74 Changing the measurement unit for a ruler Checking spelling and grammar Writer provides a spelling checker which can be used in two ways ABC AutoSpellcheck checks each word as it is typed and displays a wavy red line under any misspelled words When the word is corrected the line disappears T gt lt g To perform a separate spelling check on the document or a text
107. the gt button move the following fields from the Available fields window to the Selected fields window in this order CollectionID AlbumTitle Artist DatePurchased Format Notes and NumberofTracks 4 Selected Fields from another sample table Click Business as the Category Select Employees from the dropdown list of sample tables Use the gt button to move the Photo field from the Available fields window to the Selected fields window It will be at the bottom of the list directly below the NumberofIracks field 5 If you make a mistake in selecting fields click on the field name in the Selected fields list and use the lt button to move it from the Selected fields list back to the Available fields list 6 If you make a mistake in the order of the selected fields click on the field name that is in the wrong order and use the Up or Down arrow on the right side of the Selected fields list to move the field name to the correct position 7 Click Next Category Business Personal Sample tables Employees w Available fields Selected fields City Collection ID Notes Album Title Photo Artist Title DatePurchased address Notes mas LastName NumberofTracks Birthdate Figure 176 Selecting fields for the table Step 2 Set field types and formats In this step you give the fields their properties When you click a field the information on the right changes See Figure 177 You can then make ch
108. the Condition 3 Type the name of the artist in the Value box Click Next Step 4 Select type of query We want simple information so the default setting Detailed query is what we want Click Next at the bottom of the window Not Since we have a simple query the Grouping and Grouping conditions are ole not needed Steps 5 and 6 of the wizard are skipped in our query Step 7 Assign aliases if desired We want the default settings Click Next Step 8 Overview Name the query suggestion Query Artists To the right of this are two choices Select Display Query Click Finish Using the Design View to create a query Creating a query using Design View is not as difficult as it may first seem It may take multiple steps but each step is fairly simple What fuel economy is our vehicle getting miles per gallon in the USA This question requires creating two queries with the first query used as part of the second query Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 239 Step 1 Open the first query in Design View Click Create Query in Design View Step 2 Add tables CD Collection Maintenance Payment Type Vacations Figure 220 Add Tables or Query window 1 Click Fuel to highlight it 2 Click Add Click Close Ti Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the fuel table Figure 221 and Ip drag the to make it longer and easier to see all of the fields in the table Fuel ir t FuellD Date FuelCost FuelQu
109. the different arrow styles Line Style box Choose from the available line styles Line Width box Set the width of the line Line Color box Select the color of the line Area options Area icon Opens a dialog with seven tabs Area Shadow Transparency Colors Gradients Hatching Bitmaps e Area tab Choose from the predefined list a color bitmap gradient or hatching pattern to fill the selected object e Shadow tab Set the shadow properties of the selected object e Transparency tab Set the transparency properties of the selected object e Colors tab Modify the available colors or add new ones to appear on the Area tab e Gradients tab Modify the available gradients or add new ones to appear on the Area tab e Hatching tab Modify the available hatching patterns or add new ones to appear on the Area tab e Bitmaps tab Create simple bitmap patterns and import bitmaps to make them available on the Area tab Area Style Filling boxes Select the type of the fill of the selected object For more detailed settings use the Area icon Positioning options Rotate icon Rotate the selected object manually using the mouse to drag the object To Foreground icon Move the selected object in front of the text To Background icon Move the selected object behind the text Alignment icon Modify the alignment of the selected objects Bring to front icon Move the selected object in front of the others Send to back icon M
110. the menu bar A small box containing your initials appears in the upper left hand corner of the Draw page with a larger text box beside it Draw has automatically added your name and the date at the bottom of this text box l 2 3 4 3 6 7 BE g 16 Il Jean Hollis Weber Today 03 44 Type or paste your comment into the text box You can optionally apply some basic formatting to parts of the text by selecting it right clicking and choosing from the pop up menu From this menu you can also delete the current comment all the comments from the same author or all the comments in the document You can move the small comment markers to anywhere you wish on the page Typically you might place it on or near an object you refer to in the comment To show or hide the comment markers choose View gt Comments Choose Tools gt Options gt User Data to enter the name you want to appear in the Author field of the comment If more than one person edits the document each author is automatically allocated a different background color 200 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 m OpenOffice org 3 Chapter amp Getting Started with Base OpenOffice org s Database Component 201 Introduction A data source or database is a collection of pieces of information that can be accessed or managed by OpenOffice org OOo For example a list of names and addresses is a data source that could be used for producing a mail m
111. the objects stopping at the object you wish to select To cycle through the objects in reverse order press Shift Tab This may not be practical if you have a large number of objects in your drawing When you click on the selected object its outline will appear briefly through the objects covering it In the illustration to the right the square located beneath the circle was selected in this way the circle was made transparent in order to see the square Arranging objects In a complex drawing several objects may be stacked on top of one another To rearrange the stacking order move an object to the front or to the back of the stack select the object choose Modify gt Arrange and choose Bring Forward or Send Backward Or right click the object choose Arrange from the context menu then choose Bring Forward or Send Backward 190 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 These options are also available from the Arrange tear off toolbar from the i i button on the Drawing toolbar A keyboard shortcut is Shift Ctrl plus sign to bring an object to the top and Shift Ctrl minus to send an object to the bottom Draw also provides tools for aligning multiple objects details are given in the Draw Guide Selecting several objects To select or deselect several objects one by one press the Shift key and click on the various objects to be selected or deselected One click on an object selects it a second click on the same object
112. the screen 121 status bar 109 themes 134 viewing 120 Calc macros 332 callouts 188 CD or DVD of OpenOffice org 12 cells in Calc formatting 129 navigating 111 selecting 115 change tracking 100 changes undo and redo 28 charts add to slides 165 check for updates automatically 45 circle drawing 184 clipboard 37 closing a document 29 closing OpenOffice org 29 CMYK 178 Color Bar 178 color options 39 color palette 179 color scheme 44 columns in Calc deleting 118 freezing 120 inserting 117 selecting 116 combining objects 198 comma separated values CSV 109 111 command line starting from 16 comments Draw 200 comments adding 98 Community Forum user support 14 complex text layout CTL 11 52 components of OpenOffice org 10 conditional formatting 134 connectors 186 consultants 14 content boxes Impress 157 context menu 193 context menus 20 conversion 199 copy and paste 83 copying object from Gallery 292 create document from template 65 creating a document 23 Index 371 cross fading 197 cross references inserting references 102 overview 102 CSV file open 110 save 111 CSV files 109 111 Ctrl click required to follow hyperlinks 42 curves Draw 185 custom dictionary 52 Customize dialog 338 customizing keyboard shortcuts 352 menus 345 toolbars 348 cut and paste 83 D dashes 86 data editing Calc Changing data inacell 129 removing data from acell 128 replacing all data in a cell 128 data entry Ca
113. the selected slide or after each slide ina group of slides e Change the sequence of slides in the presentation e Change the slide design e Change slide layout for a group of slides simultaneously Tasks pane The Tasks pane has five sections To expand the section you wish to use click on the right pointing triangle to the left of the caption Only one section at a time can be expanded Master Pages Here you define the page style for your presentation Impress contains prepackaged Master Pages slide masters One of them Default is blank and the rest have a background Press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window where you can Tip modify the styles used in any slide master to suit your purpose This can be done at any time Layout The prepackaged layouts are shown here You can choose the one you want use it as it is or modify it to your own requirements At present it is not possible to create custom layouts Table Design The standard table styles are provided in this pane You can further modify the appearance of a table with the selections to show or hide specific rows and columns or to apply a banded appearance to the rows and columns Custom Animation A variety of animations for selected elements of a slide are listed Animation can be added to a slide and it can also be changed or removed later Slide Transition Many transitions are available including No Transition You can select the transition speed
114. the slide transition For one slide click the slide to select it Then add the desired transition 152 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 For more than one slide select the group of slides and add the desired transition e Mark a slide as hidden Hidden slides will not be shown in the slide show e Copy or cut and paste a slide Renaming slides Right click on a thumbnail in the Slides pane or the Slide Sorter and choose Rename Slide from the pop up menu In the Name field delete the old name of the slide and type the new name Click OK Creating a new presentation This section describes how to start a new presentation using the Presentation Wizard When you start Impress the Presentation Wizard appears If you do not want the wizard to start every time you launch Impress select the Do not show this wizard again option You can enable the wizard again later under Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Impress Tip gt General gt Wizard and select the Start with wizard option Leave the Preview option selected so templates slide designs and Slide transitions appear in the preview box as you choose them Presentation Wizard J Type G Empty presentation From template O Open existing presentation Preview _ Do not show this wizard again Figure 139 Choosing the type of presentation 1 Select Empty Presentation under Type It creates a presentation from scratch
115. the upper window the numbers change accordingly The two color fields at the lower right show the value of the selected color on the left and the currently set value from the color value fields on the right Modify the color components as required and click OK to exit the dialog The newly defined color now appears in the lower of the color preview boxes shown in Figure 26 Type a name for this color in the Name box then click the Add button A small box showing the new color is added to the Color table OR Cancel Magenta R 33 Hue 210 Yellow i Saturation AQ Rey Brightness 100 Figure 27 Editing colors Another way to define or alter colors is through the Colors page of the Area dialog where you can also save and load palettes a feature that is not possible here In Calc draw a temporary draw object and use the context menu of this object to open the Area dialog If you load a palette in one component of OOo it is only active in that component the other components keep their own palettes 40 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Font options You can define replacements for any fonts that might appear in your documents If you receive from someone else a document containing fonts that you do not have on your system OpenOffice org will substitute fonts for those it does not find You might prefer to specify a different font from the one the program chooses
116. this option the user s personal settings do not overrule the settings in the document For example your choice in the options for OOo Writer of how to update links is affected by the Load user specific settings option Load printer settings with the document If this option is not selected the printer settings that are stored with the document are ignored when you print it using the Print File Directly icon The default printer in your system will be used instead Edit document properties before saving If you select this option the Document Properties dialog pops up to prompt you to enter relevant information the first time you save a new document or whenever you use Save As Save AutoRecovery information every Choose whether to enable AutoRecovery and how often to save the information used by the AutoRecovery process AutoRecovery in OpenOffice org overwrites the original file If you also choose Always create backup copy the original file then overwrites the backup copy If you have this set recovering your document after a system crash will be easier but recovering an earlier version of the document may be harder Save URLs relative to file system internet Relative addressing to a file system is only possible if the source document and the referenced document are both on the same drive A relative address always starts from the directory in which the current document is located It is recommended to save relatively if you wan
117. this reason when you A are finished be sure to deselect all the sheets except the one you want to edit Ctrl click on a sheet tab to select or deselect the sheet Validating cell contents When creating spreadsheets for other people to use you may want to make sure they enter data that is valid or appropriate for the cell You can also use validation in your own work as a guide to entering data that is either complex or rarely used Fill series and selection lists can handle some types of data but they are limited to predefined information To validate new data entered by a user select a cell and use Data gt Validity to define the type of contents that can be entered in that cell For example a cell might require a date or a whole number with no alphabetic characters or decimal points or a cell may not be left empty Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 127 Depending on how validation is set up the tool can also define the range of contents that can be entered and provide help messages that explain the content rules you have set up for the cell and what users should do when they enter invalid content You can also set the cell to refuse invalid content accept it with a warning or start a macro when an error is entered See Chapter 2 Entering Editing and Formatting Data in the Calc Guide for more information Editing data Editing data is done in much the same way as entering data The first step is to select the cell co
118. three conditions and their criteria are not entered in a dialog Instead advanced filters are entered in a blank area of a sheet then referenced by the advanced filter tool to apply them Sorting records Sorting arranges the visible cells on the sheet In Calc you can sort by up to three criteria which are applied one after another Sorts are handy when you are searching for a particular item and become even more powerful after you have filtered data In addition sorting is often useful when you add new information When a list is long it is usually easier to add new information at the bottom of the sheet rather than adding rows in the proper places After you have added information you can then sort it to update the sheet Highlight the cells to be sorted then select Data gt Sort to open the Sort dialog or click the Sort Ascending or Sort Descending toolbar buttons Using the dialog you can sort the selected cells using up to three columns in either ascending A Z 1 9 or descending Z A 9 1 order On the Options tab of the Sort dialog you can choose the following options Case sensitive If two entries are otherwise identical one with an upper case letter is placed before one with a lower case letter in the same position Range contains column labels Does not include the column heading in the sort Include formats A cell s formatting is moved with its contents If formatting is used to distinguish different types
119. to bring an object to a snap point or line before it will snap to it Changing the color of the grid points The default grid dots are light gray which can be hard to see To change the color of the grid points choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Appearance Color scheme Scheme OpenOffice org i Save Custom colors On User interface elements YUL ale Fi Drawing Presentation Grid E Black j Basic Syntax Highlighting Identifier Automatic Comment __ Automatic A Number Automatic M String __ Automatic Operator Automatic 3 Figure 159 Changing the grid color In the Drawing Presentation section you can change the color of the grid points On the Color Settings pulldown menu select a more suitable visible color for example black Positioning objects with guiding lines To simplify the positioning of objects it is possible to make visible guiding lines extensions of the edges of the object while it is being moved These guiding lines have no snap function The guiding lines can be activated or deactivated under Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Draw gt View gt Guides when moving or by clicking on the icon on the Options toolbar Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 181 The basic drawing shapes Draw provides a wide range of shapes located in palettes accessed from the Drawing Toolbar This section describes only a few of the basic shapes Thes
120. to change an object s attributes The entries with a small arrow on the right hand side contain a submenu Editing lines and borders Lines arrows and the borders of an object are 7 managed through the Line dialog An object s border is just another type of line Koat You can change some properties from the Line and Filling toolbar To see more options select the object and click on the Line icon or right click on the object and choose Line from the context menu This opens the Line dialog Common line properties In most cases the property you want to change is the line s style solid dashed invisible and so on its color or its width These options are all available from the Line and Filling toolbar Figure 170 You can also edit these properties from the Line dialog where you can also change the line s transparency Figure 171 illustrates different degrees of transparency Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 193 Figure 171 The vertical lines have different levels of transparency 0 25 and 50 Drawing arrows Arrowheads and other line endings usually referred to collectively as arrows are a line property Select a line and click on the Arrow Style icon from the Line and Filling toolbar This opens the Arrowheads menu Several types of arrowheads are available Each end of the line can have a different arrowhead or no arrowhead Arrowheads are only applicable to lines Th
121. today s date where the original date was 3 Change the date formatting a Double click the date field you just inserted The Edit Fields Document window opens Figure 242 Edit Fields Document Type select Format Figure 242 Modifying a date field b Since this is a dynamic report change the Select field from Date fixed to Date c Change the Format to what you desire I use the Friday December 31 1999 choice Click OK Step 2 Change the column widths The column widths can be changed by moving the cursor over the right border of each column so that it becomes a double headed arrow Then drag and drop it to where you want it This has to be done for each column in each table in the report 250 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 This can also be done with the last column on the right even though there is no black border It should now look something like Figure 243 Figure 243 Realigned columns in a report Step 3 Change the number formatting in the cells The fuel quantity should have three decimal places The Begin End and Distance Should have one decimal place Fuel Cost should be currency and have two decimal places and Cost per mile should have three decimal places 1 Right click the cell below Quantity and select Number format The cell is circled in Figure 243 2 In the Options section Figure 244 a Change the number of Decimal places to 3 b Click the green checkma
122. tool is a way to duplicate existing content Start by selecting the cell to copy then drag the mouse in any direction or hold down the Shift key and click in the last cell you want to fill and then choose Edit gt Fill and the direction in which you want to copy Up Down Left or Right Caution Choices that are not available are grayed out but you can still choose the opposite direction from what you intend which could cause you to overwrite cells accidentally A shortcut way to fill cells is to grab the handle in the lower right hand corner of the cell and drag it in the direction you want to fill If Tip the cell contains a number the number will fill in series If the cell contains text the same text will fill in the direction you chose A Ciriginal A Ciriginal Ciriginal Ciriginal Ciriginal Ciriginal Ciriginal Ciriginal Ciriginal Figure 108 Using the Fill tool Using a fill series A more complex use of the Fill tool is to use a fill A series The default lists are for the full and I January abbreviated days of the week and the months of 2 February the year but you can create your own lists as 3 March To add a fill series to a spreadsheet select the 5 May cells to fill choose Edit gt Fill gt Series In the 6 June Fill Series dialog Figure 110 select AutoFill 7 July as the Series type and enter as the Start value 8 August an item from any defined series
123. turn autoformatting on or off choose Format gt AutoCorrect and select or deselect the items on the list Creating numbered or bulleted lists There are several ways to create numbered or bulleted lists e Use autoformatting as described above e Use list numbering styles as described in Chapters 6 Introduction to Styles and 7 Working with Styles in the Writer Guide e Use the Numbering and Bullets icons on the paragraph formatting toolbar see Figure 75 select the paragraphs in the list and then click the appropriate icon on the toolbar Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 91 Note It is a matter of personal preference whether you type your information first then apply Numbering Bullets or apply them as you type Using the Bullets and Numbering toolbar You can create nested lists where one or more list items has a sub list under it as in an outline by using the buttons on the Bullets and Numbering toolbar Figure 77 You can move items up or down the list or create sub points and even change the style of bullets Use View gt Toolbars gt Bullets and Numbering to see the toolbar The appearance of the icons may vary with your operating system and the selection of icon size and style in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt View 1 Bullets On Off 2 Numbering On Off 3 Numbering Off 4 Promote One Level 5 Demote One Level Bullets and Numbering gt ws 4 4 5 6 L a w
124. you to assign a macro to an event 340 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events Event sined Action Assign Start Application Close Application Create Document Open Document Remove save Document As Document has been saved as save Document Document has been saved Close Document Document is closing Activate Document Deactivate Document Frint Document Modified status was changed Frint form letters Changing the page count Macro Save In o ntithed1 ie Figure 311 Assign macro to an application level event Select the library that contains the macro you want Then select the macro under Macro name Library Macro name copyNumrocol2 ExportPDF ModifyOPtions sePrintHello A amp My Macros OH ee eee eee Description Figure 312 Assign macro to the document open event Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 341 Event Assigned Action oe Start Application Close Application Create Document Open Document D Standard MyMacros PrintHello Remove save Document As Figure 313 PrintHello is assigned to the Open Document event Extensions An extension is a package that can be installed into OpenOffice org to add new functionality Extensions can be written in almost any programming language and may be simple or sophisticated Extensions can be grouped into types e Calc Add Ins which provide new functionality for Calc including
125. 0 Footer Footer text EO Do not show on first slide Cancel Help i Figure 148 Configuring the slide footer areas To change the number format 1 2 3 or a b c or i ii iii etc for the page number field choose Format gt Page and then select a format from the Tip list in the Layout Settings area To change the paragraph style modify the Background Objects Presentation style To add a other information such as the Author of the presentation or the name of the file choose Insert gt Fields and select the required field from the submenu If you want to edit a field in your slide select it and choose Edit gt Fields The fields you can use in Impress are Date fixed Date variable updates automatically when you reload the file Time fixed Time variable updates automatically when you reload the file Author First and last names listed in the OpenOffice org user data Page number slide number File name 170 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 To change the author information go to Tools gt Options gt Tip OpenOffice org gt User Data Adding comments to a presentation Starting with OOo 3 2 Impress supports comments formerly called sticky notes Similar to those in Writer and Calc In Normal View choose Insert gt Comment from the menu bar A small box containing your initials appears in the upper left hand corner of the slide with a larger text box beside
126. 1 What are all these things called The terms used in OpenOffice org for most parts of the user interface the parts of the program you see and use in contrast to the behind the scenes code that actually makes it work are the same as for most other programs A dialog is a special type of window Its purpose is to inform you of something or request input from you or both It provides controls for you to use to specify how to carry out an action The technical names for common controls are shown in Figure 9 not shown is the list box from which you select an item In most cases we do not use the technical terms in this book but it is useful to know them because the Help and other sources of information often use them In most cases you can interact only with the dialog not the document itself as long as the dialog remains open When you close the dialog after use usually clicking OK or another button saves your changes and closes the dialog then you can again work with your document Some dialogs can be left open as you work so you can switch back and forth between the dialog and your document An example of this type is the Find amp Replace dialog Page Style Default x Organizer Page Borders Background Header Footer Sheet 1 Page order Left to right then down 3 H First page number Frint L Column and row headers Charts C Grid Drawing objects C hotes C Formulas Objects graphics Zero values S
127. 1 x Text Document Template stw Microsoft Word 6 0 95 and 97 2000 XP doc Microsoft Word 2003 XML xml Rich Text Format rtf StarWriter 3 0 4 0 and 5 0 sdw StarWriter 3 0 4 0 and 5 0 Template vor Text txt Text Encoded txt Unified Office Format text uot uof HTML Document OpenOffice org Writer html and htm DocBook xml AportisDoc Palm pdb Pocket Word psw Encryption support within the Microsoft Word 97 2000 XP filter allows password protected Microsoft Word documents to be saved The rtf format is a common format for transferring text files between Note applications but you are likely to experience loss of formatting and images For this reason other formats should be used Saving spreadsheet files In addition to OpenDocument formats ods and ots Calc 3 can save in these formats OpenOffice org 1 x Spreadsheet sxc OpenOffice org 1 x Spreadsheet Template stc Microsoft Excel 97 2000 XP xls and xlw Microsoft Excel 97 2000 XP Template xlt Microsoft Excel 5 0 and 95 xls and xlw Microsoft Excel 2003 XML xml Data Interchange Format dif dBase dbf SYLK slk Text CSV csv and txt Appendix B Open Source Open Standards OpenDocument 369 StarCalc 3 0 4 0 and 5 0 formats sdc and vor Unified Office Format spreadsheet uos HTML Document OpenOffice org Calc html and htm Pocket Excel pxl Not The Java Runtime Environment is requ
128. 5 I Default selection E Additional information Hap Ekl eee Figure 203 Properties window for control in a subform Step 9 Add headings to groups This step is easier to do if you have end of paragraph markers visible Choose View gt Nonprinting Characters to turn them on 1 Make sure the cursor in in the upper left corner If it is not click in that corner to move it there 2 Press the Enter key to move the cursor down to the space between the Date field and the Breakfast field 3 Change the Apply Styles dropdown list from Default to Heading 2 a Default Figure 204 Apply Styles list 4 Use the spacebar to move the cursor to where you want the heading to start 5 Type the heading Meals 6 Use the spacebar to move the cursor to the center of snack area 7 Type the heading Snacks 8 Use the Enter key to move the cursor between the Supper control and the subform 9 Use the spacebar to move the cursor to the center of the subform 10 Type the heading Fuel Data If you know how to use styles you can open the Styles and Formatting Not window using F11 Right clicking the Heading 2 paragraph style allows Ore you to modify the appearance of all three headings See Chapter 6 of the Writer Guide for details 226 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Step 10 Change the background of a form The background for a form can be a color or a graphic picture You can use any of the colors in the Colo
129. 6 Cell with manual line breaks 130 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Shrinking text to fit the cell The font size of the data in a cell can automatically adjust to fit in a cell To do this select the Shrink to fit cell size option in the Format Cells dialog Figure 114 Figure 117 shows the results The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog the qakk brai taimp oerte eeyo tea hh 1 i m Figure 117 Shrinking font size to fit cells Formatting numbers Several different number formats can be applied to cells by using icons on the Formatting toolbar Select the cell then click the relevant icon p 70 A E3 aul 9 Figure 118 Number format icons Left to right currency percentage date exponential standard add decimal place delete decimal place For more control or to select other number formats use the Numbers tab Figure 119 of the Format Cells dialog e Apply any of the data types in the Category list to the data e Control the number of decimal places and leading zeros e Enter a custom format code The Language setting controls the local settings for the different formats such as the date order and the currency marker Numbers Font Font Effects Alignment Borders Background Cell Protection Category orme Language English UK User defined mg 12 Number 1234 1 Percent Currency Date Time Scientific Options Ti K a
130. 8 E republican jpg Graphics jpa 72 3KB 06 08 2006 18 01 4 Es s2_01jpg Graphics jpg 8043 Bytes 04 16 2006 18 45 5 es t_005_jpa jpg Graphics jpa 1877 Bytes 06 10 2006 04 29 1 a United States gif Graphics gif 4086 Bytes 04 11 2006 22 03 11 File name lincoln_creek_rest_photo jpg style Graphics File type lt All formats gt bmp dxf emf eps gif jpg jpeg w _ Link Preview Figure 282 Insert picture dialog Linking an image file If the Link option in the Insert picture dialog is selected OOo creates a link to the file containing the image instead of saving a copy of the image in the document The result is that the image is displayed in the document but when the document is saved it contains only a reference to the image file not the image itself The document and the image remain as two separate files and they are merged together only when you open the document again Linking an image has two advantages and one disadvantage e Advantage Linking can reduce the size of the document when it is saved because the image file itself is not included File size is usually not a problem on a modern computer with a reasonable amount of memory unless the document includes many large graphics files OOo can handle quite large files e Advantage You can modify the image file separately without
131. A B gamma gt y GAMMA gt T psi gt y PSI phi gt o PHI gt Q theta THETA gt Note A complete table of Greek characters is provided in the Math Guide Another way to enter Greek characters is by using the Symbols catalog window Choose Tools gt Catalog Under Symbol set select Greek and double click on a Greek letter from the list The markup name of the character is shown below the list window 258 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Symbol set Figure 252 Symbols catalog used for entering Greek characters and some special symbols Example 2 n 3 14159 For this example we will suppose that e We want to enter the above formula the value of pi rounded to 5 decimal places e We know the name of the Greek character pi e But we do not know the markup associated with the gt symbol Step 1 Type followed by the text pi This displays the Greek character rm Step 2 Open the Elements window View gt Elements Step 3 The symbol is a relation so we click on the Relations button If you hover the mouse over this button you see the tooltip Relations Figure 253 Figure 254 shows the Elements window after clicking the Relations button The symbol we want is circled 5 Elements Malo aeA f x da d FRetations t 82 4 t 4 74 Elements va ese F x gt a s oR a om 2 AY azb asb alb afb a b a b axb a b aab ab b alb rule a b a b avo azb a
132. Click New The Entries box is cleared 3 Type the series for the new list in the Entries box one entry per line Click Add The new list will now appear in the Lists box 4 Click OK at the bottom of the dialog to save the new list 126 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Jan Feb Mar Ap r May Jun Jul Aug S y February March April May Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesd 5 ET Figure 112 Defining a new fill series November December Using selection lists Selection lists are available only for text and are limited to using only text that has already been entered in the same column To use a Selection list select a blank cell and press Ctrl D A drop down list appears of any cell in the same column that either has at least one text character or whose format is defined as Text Click on the entry you require E Sharing content between sheets You might want to enter the same information in the same cell on multiple sheets for example to set up standard listings for a group of individuals or organizations Instead of entering the list on each sheet individually you can enter it in all the sheets at once To do this select all the sheets Edit gt Sheet gt Select then enter the information in the current one Caution This technique overwrites any information that is already in the cells on the other sheets without any warning For
133. Color dialog where you can set individual colors See Color options in Chapter 2 Setting Up OpenOffice org of this book Many more input possibilities are available in this dialog For a more detailed description of color palettes and their options see Chapter 8 Tips and Tricks in the Draw Guide Positioning objects with snap functions In Draw objects can be accurately and consistently positioned using grid points Special snap points and lines object frames individual points on objects or page edges This function is known as Snap The snap function is easier to work with at the highest practical zoom value You can use two different snap functions at the same time for example snapping to a guide line and to the page edge It is best however to activate only those functions that you really need This section summaries the snap to grid function For more detailed information about the snap functions see Chapter 8 Tips and Tricks and Chapter 10 Advanced Draw Techniques in the Draw Guide Snap to grid Use this function to move an object exactly to a grid point see Figure 157 This function can be switched on and off with View gt Grid gt Snap to Grid and on the Options toolbar with the icon Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 179 Figure 157 Exact positioning with snap to grid Showing the grid To make the grid visible choose View gt Grid gt Display Grid Alternatively turn the grid
134. DF Options dialog PDF export includes options to encrypt the PDF so it cannot be opened without a password and apply some digital rights management DRM features e With an open password set the PDF can only be opened with the password Once opened there are no restrictions on what the user can do with the document for example print copy or change it e With a permissions password set the PDF can be opened by anyone but its permissions can be restricted See Figure 275 After you set a password for permissions the other choices on the Security page become available e With both the open password and permission password set the PDF can only be opened with the correct password and its permissions can be restricted Permissions settings are effective only if the user s PDF viewer respects Note the settings Figure 276 shows the pop up dialog displayed when you click the Set open password button on the Security page of the PDF Options dialog 282 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 General Initial view User Interface Links Security Sek open password No open password set POF document will not be encrypted Permission password set PDF document will be restricted Printing Not permitted Low resolution 150 dpi High resolution Changes Not permitted Inserting deleting and rotating pages Filling in Form Fields Commenting filling in form Fields O Any except extracting
135. Documentation DevGuide OpenOffice org Dev elopers Guide official OpenOffice org Developers Guide contains a detailed explanation http www pitonyak org oo php Andrew Pitonyak s macro page http www pitonyak org AndrewMacro odt numerous examples of working macros http www pitonyak org book Andrew Pitonyak s book on macros http www pitonyak org database numerous macro examples using Base http docs sun com app docs doc 819 0439 Sun s book on macro programming very well written and laid out the OOo BASIC Programming Guide and the OOo Developers Guide are derived from this book Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 343 Printed and eBook materials The following books are available for purchase in both printed and eBook form from their publishers Andrew Pitonyak s OpenOffice org Macros Explained See http www hentzenwerke com catalog oome htm Dr Mark Alexander Bain s Learn OpenOffice org Spreadsheet Macro Programming See http www packtpub com openoffice ooobasic calc automation book 344 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 OpenOffice org 3 Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org Introduction This Appendix describes some common customizations that you may wish to do You can customize menus toolbars and keyboard shortcuts in OpenOffice org add new menus and toolbars and assign macros to events However you cannot customize context right click menus
136. EEH L Business Letter 2 New Doc Business Letter 3 E Business Letter 4 rd Business Letter 5 Business Letter 6 Templates Facsimile Message 1 E Facsimile Message 2 p E Facsimile Message 3 Facsimile Message 4 My Docu Facsimile Message 5 _ Facsimile Message 6 Samples Get more templates online Title Business Letter 1 By Volker Ahrendt Sun Microsystems Date 13 06 2008 13 00 00 Modified by Volker Ahrendt Modified on 13 06 2008 16 00 00 Drintad hw Figure 53 Templates and Documents window Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 65 Creating a template You can create your own templates in two ways from a document and using a wizard Creating a template from a document To create a template from a document 1 Open a new or existing document of the type you want to make into a template text document spreadsheet drawing presentation 2 Add the content and styles that you want 3 From the main menu choose File gt Templates gt Save The Templates dialog opens see Figure 54 4 In the New template field type a name for the new template 5 In the Categories list click the category to which you want to assign the template The category you choose has no effect on the template itself it is simply the folder in which you save the template Choosing an appropriate category makes it easier to find the template when you want to use it For example y
137. EM 326 resources 342 running 324 337 storage 334 subroutines 326 332 variables 326 viewing 325 writing 341 mail merge 100 Mail Merge Wizard e mailing Writer document 284 Mantovani Paolo 332 margins 176 margins Writer 97 Master Pages 166 master slides 166 Math formulas inserting 165 mathematical equations 254 mathematical markup 257 mathematical symbols 255 matrix markup Math 263 measurement unit 87 media clips adding to slides 165 memory options 34 menu bar 17 menus adding commands 347 creating 346 customizing 345 modifying 347 modifying entries 347 Microsoft Office file conversion 48 Microsoft Windows file associations 15 Quickstarter 15 system requirements 12 Microsoft Word 81 middle mouse button function 37 mirror copies 196 mouse positioning 37 MySQL 202 N Native Language Project 14 navigation cell to cell in Calc 112 Sheet to sheet in Calc 114 Navigation icons 80 Navigation toolbar 27 80 Navigator 26 148 Navigator Index 375 Calc 112 new document 23 non breaking hyphen 86 non breaking spaces 86 nonconsecutive items selecting 82 Normal view Impress 149 Notes view Impress 149 numbered list 161 numbering equations 265 numbering pages 96 O OASIS 12 objects adjusting size 191 arranging 190 dynamic movement 191 dynamic size modification 191 framing 190 hidden 190 moving 191 rotating 192 selecting several 191 ODF format version saving 47 ODF plugin Sun 81 Of
138. EN E EE T ae d TLF Ee Figure 146 Available master pages slides Creating a slide master Creating a new slide master is similar to modifying the default slide master To start enable editing of slide masters by View gt Master gt Slide Master Master View z E Close Master View On the Master View toolbar click the New Master icon a A second slide master appears in the Slides pane Modify this slide master to suit your requirements It is also recommended that you rename this new slide master right click on the slide in the Slides pane and select Rename master from the pop up menu When you are done close the Master View toolbar to return to normal slide editing mode Applying a slide master In the Tasks Pane be sure the Master Pages section is showing To apply one of the slide masters to all slides in your presentation click on it in the list To apply a different slide master to one or more selected slides 1 In the Slide Pane select the slides you want to change 2 In the Tasks Pane right click on the slide master you want to apply to the selected slides and click Apply to Selected Slides on the pop up menu Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 167 Loading additional slide masters Sometimes in the same set of slides you may need to mix multiple slide masters that may belong to different templates For example you may need a completely different layout for the first slide of the pr
139. ER EEE EAREN ERE 201 EULATE OLDEST E p PEET ET EAE EIES E AE PEE TAA ET POTET A TOA E E AT 202 AAE EE e E E ee A EE E O E EEE E E E entree ATE ret 203 Creating a new dataDaSO is isscscccacensinedvactavidasdsensaneeedpnueceeriaeseinictercammendaaetaaviadiacds 204 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 5 Creating database acct serena eects cece stn eens cece deaureeeeeeensees 205 Defining FOO 11S 1110S oi ncxsnaudnsnsistiondsonsiamanertacsiendsennmaietareeineaiebasiaeeisaciprauniserid eee 213 Croatoa dala Dasi TOF 1 Aenean AERE O EA 215 Accessing other data SOUrCeS secssesseessseseresersseerseresersserseseecresesseereeseeeereeseseeeee 229 Using data sources in OpenOffice Org essessseeseesseesrcereesrersrerssressereeerseserrersseeeee 231 Entering re ro ls ae in aior 0 ee ne EE tc ene Cee one et Seen mene eer 235 Ba E A o EE EE S ES E E AEE NA N E peruse Zoe Greanng TEPO S ee ee TT ee ee re er ee rn Sete nee an re eee 245 Chapter 9 Cetin Bre ies a hole Raia 0h del Joh ha eee eee ere none tee een Teeth are eer enn eee men ne He aaron re 293 ee ear ates eet ec ee ee tated ecie a ete ne eet EE seers ceeandiewedar 254 Fy a N E soe TAI EAEE EEE E T EE EET 295 Oa P A sa I E une E E EAE A E A re ener ane peer 260 Por aT E E A E AET N 262 Nambernng cudo Senperena EE EEEE EERE EE E EEEE ei E 265 Chapter 10 Prndno Expor uina and FE MANG erorcrrinss rorirori titish enter ENE EEE 267 MO N O E E E ETE 268 BAEAU 1E ELETT ATA ES T F AA eae T
140. ETE ET TE E TEA E EEIT cee 268 Daanal io ee ga n In e AE E AE A A NE A E EE T E E A EA 268 eao anaE a gl E E E E AE Terra OEEO E Ow T E A E E E TET 277 ROC to OU Orn S ace ceceneessrcceneearieatevectactesnessriscseunsauieeseuesiineiaesaacoes 284 Ue ON Sas ere ce sere cs os seen ci ppc se ee dec 284 Digital signing of documents esssssseesseesreesrressresrrssersreresresseereseseerresseereeeeseeeeeee 287 Removing porsonal 6 3 gt Cece ee nnn een ee ere nee terse ce eee eer eae een 288 Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and FOG Wl Wes evsccescaecot cen ssccrostaseasuczadenscsiesnsictaseiareriecteeeerenw 289 Bsns rec ee et nse eee cee see seen comes teens gwen EE 290 Adding images to a document esssessssssessreeseesrecsserssersserseeeseerserssereseeesersseeseeeeee 290 Modiying and positioning gropii C eesis eet er nn ere AEEA 294 Managing the OpenOffice org Gallery eseseeesseeereesresesresresseesreesseeessssesrersseeeee 294 a AP eea 297 Usma Oos draw ng tOOl S erraien tre ante EEEE EEE RE 298 on EO OTE a N E E EN E E 301 Chapter 12 Groating Web PagOSeascseniieiia a a niewre ene eaenines 307 Mo 8 A EE E errr en eee Tre ere 308 Relative and absolute hyperlinks 0 ccc cceceececncecececencececenenseseceeeseeseesensensen 308 creata DOT operi ee ne nme er enc ory Mee oe tT eran eT 309 Saving Writer documents AS WED PAGES cececcececececencecececessessesseeecsecseceeceeses 312 Creating web pages using a Wizard
141. Extended tips a iS I elp Agent Reset Help Agent Help formatting Open Save dialogs Use OpenOffice org dialogs Document status C Printing sets document modified status Year two digits Interpret as years between 1930 gt and 2029 Figure 20 Setting general options for OpenOffice org Help Tips When Tips is active one or two words will appear when you hold the mouse pointer over an icon or field without clicking Help Extended tips When Extended tips is active a brief description of the function of a particular icon or menu command or a field on a dialog appears when you hold the mouse pointer over that item Help Agent To turn off the Help Agent similar to Microsoft s Office Assistant deselect this option To restore the default behavior click Reset Help Agent Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 33 Help formatting High contrast is an operating system setting that changes the system color scheme to improve readability To display Help in high contrast if your computer s operating system supports this choose one of the high contrast style sheets from the pull down list Default Black text on white background High Contrast 1 Yellow text on black background High Contrast 2 Green text on black background High Contrast Black White text on black background High Contrast White Black text on white background Open Save dialogs To use the standard Open
142. Figure 297 Hyperlink dialog showing details for Internet links 310 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 On the left side select one of the four categories of hyperlink e Internet the hyperlink points to a web address normally starting with http e Mail amp News the hyperlink opens an email message that is pre addressed to a particular recipient e Document the hyperlink points to another document or to another place in the current document e New document the hyperlink creates a new document The top right part of the dialog changes according to the choice made for the hyperlink category in the left panel A full description of all the choices and their interactions is beyond the scope of this chapter Here is a summary of the most common choices For an Internet hyperlink choose the type of hyperlink Web FTP or Telnet and enter the required web address URL For a Mail and News hyperlink specify whether it is a mail or news link the receiver s address and for email also the subject For a Document hyperlink specify the document path the Open File button opens a file browser or leave this blank if you want to link to a target in the same document Optionally specify the target in the document for example a specific slide Click on the Target in Document icon to open the Navigator where you can select the target or if you know the name of the target you can type it into the box For a New Document
143. Figure 97 Customizing the effect of the Enter key Moving from sheet to sheet Fach sheet in a spreadsheet is independent of the others though they can be linked with references from one sheet to another There are three ways to navigate between different sheets in a spreadsheet Using the Navigator When the Navigator is open Figure 95 double clicking on any of the listed Sheets selects the sheet Using the keyboard Pressing Control Page Down moves one sheet to the right and pressing Control Page Up moves one sheet to the left Using the mouse Clicking on one of the sheet tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet selects that sheet If you have a lot of sheets then some of the sheet tabs may be hidden behind the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the screen If this is the case then the four buttons at the left of the sheet tabs can move the tabs into view Figure 98 shows how to do this Move to the first sheet Move left one sheet Move right one sheet Move to the last sheet Sheet tabs Sheet4 Sheet Sheet f SheetS Figure 98 Sheet tab arrows Notice that the sheets here are not numbered in order Sheet numbering is arbitrary you can name a sheet as you wish 114 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 The sheet tab arrows that appear in Figure 98 only appear if you have Note some sheet tabs that can not be seen Otherwise they will a
144. Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Using conditional ope eee nce raced ate nceencesctinracucanennereetecessees ciaeniisestcescnsvensne 134 Hiding and Showing Qata een eee en ane ae onan EEE 134 10 A119 oC EAR E ee eee rea ae eee ae en eee oes err EEE ern een E ens err 136 Pa at ir echapheeecech i eect ecstatic ance enenieds Lo7 Chapter 6 Gorno Me eo U gmc ole gh oma 6 E E er ame terete anne ete ver mentee 144 a arate ages tee sa EIIE E E T A O A E A T 145 arung OPTOG ee EEE E E EEE EE ESNEA 145 Parts of the main Impress windoW esssssssssessseesseccssrerssecssreesesecesecesseeeseeresseeeeees 145 ats ene EE TR 149 Creating a new presentation ess ersesssecesssecessseecesssecesssocesessocesssecesseeceessseceseseee 153 POT ie CElem I cits tacana te etanoniegiceduncsouienadeaecuaereinaunorenetetiounenidsieeesooun 156 Padding ond Tornan O aeMee mates mete ten ae et eae neem name hve Seen es en etree nantes ee Ree 159 Adding pictures tables charts and Me Cia ccccecececcncesceneenteccecsecseceeceesenses 163 Working with slide masters and StYIOS c cc ccecececeececececescncececensececeenseseceeeeseses 166 Adding comments to a presentation seesseesreerererrrsecsrerssersserrsseecrerseseereereseeeee 171 Setting up the slide SOW aconcencowsccanesrcenisnnasssiaeoavenvepecoationtsnuebtonesseieotecescratensanindes 172 Running tho shda aes ce cesdaree iia n e AA EEE EEE 17 3 Chapter 7 areas ania ge ce te
145. HR 9 dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 args4 rem 5 Press Delete to delete the lower case s dispatcher executeDispatch document uno Delete 0 Array rem 5 and then press S to add an upper case S dim args6 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyValue args6 0 Name Text args6 0 Value S dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 args6 rem 6 Press Ctrl Right Arrow twice to move the cursor to the number dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToNextWord 0 Array PEM acs ee a e ice ee Sy eae ee rime em ea eng er ate dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToNextWord 0 Array 330 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 rem 7 Press Ctrl Shift Right Arrow to select the number dispatcher executeDispatch document uno WordRightSel 0 Array rem 8 Press Ctrl C to copy the selected text to the clipboard dispatcher executeDispatch document uno Copy 0 Array rem 9 Press End to move the cursor to the end of the Line dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToEndOfLine 0 Array rem 10 Press Backspace twice to remove the two trailing spaces dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array FS Pee aera ee te ae a ee ee tae ee eae ee ee eer rere dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array rem 11 Press Home to move the cursor t
146. IIl gt I T mh hi Subpoints Subpoints 9 Move Up Figure 77 Bullets and Numbering toolbar Hyphenating words You have several choices regarding hyphenation let Writer do it automatically using its hyphenation dictionaries insert conditional hyphens manually where necessary ga 6 Promote One Level with 7 Demote One Level with 8 Insert Unnumbered Entry or don t hyphenate at all Automatic hyphenation To turn automatic hyphenation of words on or off 1 Press F11 T on Mac to open the 2 3 4 Styles and Formatting window On the Paragraph Styles page of the Styles and Formatting window Figure 78 right click on Default and select Modify On the Paragraph Style dialog Figure 79 go to the Text Flow page Under Hyphenation select or deselect the Automatically option Click OK to save T R af t H ri cal iki dd Ys 1 me 4 10 Move Down 11 Move Up with Subpoints 12 Move Down with Subpoints 13 Restart Numbering 14 Bullets and Numbering 5 Styles and Formatting DE D EE Complimentary close Heading Heading 1 Heading 10 Heading 2 Heading 3 Heading 4 m Figure 78 Modifying a style 92 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Organizer Indents amp Spacing Alignment Text Flow Font Font Effects Position Hyphenation 2 Characters at line end 2 S Characters at line begin H ar Maximum number of cons
147. O O S M D xXx VrP ae Cr H Be cp 11 94 3 22 380 000 0 00 Slide 1 1 Default O e amp 100 Figure 284 Copying a a object from the Gallery into a document Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 293 To insert an object as a link 1 Choose Tools gt Gallery and select a theme 2 Select an object with a single click then while pressing the Shift and Control keys drag and drop the object into the document Inserting an image as a background To insert an image as the background to a page or paragraph 1 Choose Tools gt Gallery and select a theme 2 Select an object with a single click right click on the object and choose Insert gt Background gt Page or gt Paragraph Modifying and positioning graphics OpenOffice org provides many tools for resizing modifying filtering and positioning graphics wrapping text around graphics and using graphics as backgrounds and watermarks These tools are described in relevant chapters of the other guides Some sophisticated adjustments of the graphics are best done in an image manipulation program and the results brought into OOo rather than using OOo s inbuilt tools Managing the OpenOffice org Gallery Graphics in the Gallery are grouped by themes such as Bullets Rulers and Backgrounds You can create other groups or themes and add your own pictures or find extensions containing more graphics The box on the left of the gallery window lists
148. OOo to open the linked page in the appropriate program for example the default browser for an HTML page OOo Calc for a ODS file a PDF viewer for a PDF file You can create hotspots of various shapes and include several hotspots in the same image To use the image map editor 1 2 3 4 5 When done click the Save icon In your OOo document select the picture where you want to define the hotspots Choose Edit gt ImageMap from the menu bar The ImageMap Editor Figure 286 opens Use the tools and fields in the dialog described on the next page to define the hotspots and links necessary sf Click the Apply icon to apply the settings H to save the imagemap to a file then click the X in the upper right corner to close the dialog lt q ImageMap Editor v Ba Maore mM Address http www oooauthors org english Text Go to English section of OOoAuthors Frame _self x OcoAuthors Espa ol Portugues Italiano PF ty Hesedty a Romana Aas Nederlands http www oooauthors org english 0 00 cm 0 00 cm 15 31 cm x 7 28 cm Figure 286 The dialog to create or edit an image map The main part of the dialog shows the image on which the hotspots are defined A hotspot is identified by a line indicating its shape The toolbar at the top of the dialog contains the following tools Apply button click this button to apply the changes Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 297
149. Office org opens your default e mail program The document is attached 2 In your e mail program enter the recipient subject and any text you want to add then send the e mail File gt Send gt E mail as OpenDocument Text or Spreadsheet or Presentation has the same effect If you choose E mail as Microsoft Word Excel or Powerpoint OOo first creates a file in one of those formats and then opens your e mail program with the file attached Similarly if you choose E mail as PDF OOo first creates a PDF using your default PDF settings as when using the Export Directly as PDF toolbar button and then opens your email program with the PDF file attached E mailing a document to several recipients To e mail a document to several recipients you can use the features in your e mail program or you can use OOo s mail merge facilities to extract email addresses from an address book You can use OOo s mail merge to send e mail in two ways e Use the Mail Merge Wizard to create the document and send it See Chapter 11 Using Mail Merge of the Writer Guide for details e Create the document in Writer without using the Wizard then use the Wizard to send it This method is described here To use the Mail Merge Wizard to send a previously created Writer document 1 Click Tools gt Mail Merge Wizard On the first page of the wizard select Use the current document and click Next 284 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3
150. Oo extensions page opens in your browser Find and select the extension you want and follow the prompts to install it During installation you will be asked to accept a license agreement 3 When the installation is complete the extension is listed in the Extension Manager dialog For more about extensions see Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org 252 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 m OpenOffice org 3 Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math OpenOffice org s Equation Editor What is Math Math is OpenOffice org s component for writing mathematical equations It is most commonly used as an equation editor for text documents but it can also be used with other types of documents or stand alone When used inside Writer the equation is treated as an object inside the text document The equation editor is for writing equations in symbolic form as in Note equation 1 If you want to evaluate a numeric value see the Calc Guide df x 2 7 btn tate La 1 X Getting started To insert an equation choose Insert gt Object gt Formula The equation editor opens at the bottom of the screen and the floating Elements window called Selection before Math 3 2 and Formula Elements in Math 3 2 may appear You will also see a small box with a gray border in your document where the formula will be displayed G Untitled 1 OpenOffice org Writer File Edit View Format Tools Window Help EE
151. Other customizations are made easy by extensions that you can install from the OpenOffice org website or from other providers Customizations to menus and toolbars can be saved in a template To do so Note first save them in a document and then save the document as a template as described in Chapter 3 Styles and Templates Customizing menu content In addition to changing the menu font described in Chapter 2 you can add and rearrange items on the menu bar add items to menus and make other changes To customize menus 1 Choose Tools gt Customize 2 On the Customize dialog pick the Menus page Customize Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events Openoffice org Writer Menus venu Menu Content Entries 5 Wew l a Lace eee ee cena eee e eee ee ee emeeeeeemeeeeeeeeeeceeeceeseaecesseeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeeneeeay l f Open Recent Documents Save E Save S Save oll Save In OpenOffice org Writer v Description Creates a new OpenOffice org document Figure 314 The Menus page of the Customize dialog 346 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 3 4 5 In the Save In drop down list choose whether to save this changed menu for the application for example OpenOffice org Writer or for a selected document for example MyDoc odt In the section OpenOffice org name of the program example Writer Menus select from the Menu drop down list the menu that you want to customize The li
152. Same as locale setting Default languages for documents izl Default currency Default USD l zl Western Asian Mone CTL None r a ee I FPT A me l w For the current document only Enhanced language support Enabled for Asian languages Enabled for complex text layout CTL Figure 41 Choosing language options If necessary select the options to enable support for Asian languages Chinese Japanese Korean and support for CTL complex text layout languages such as Urdu Thai Hebrew and Arabic If you choose either of these options the next time you open this dialog you will see some extra choices under Language Settings as shown below These choices Searching in Japanese Asian Layout and Complex Text Layout are not discussed here lt Options Language Settings t OpenOffice org gt b Load Save Zea Language Settings Language Settings Languages Writing Aids Searching in Japanese This is where you make settings Asian Layout with OpenOffice org Complex Text Layout Figure 42 Extra pages available when enhanced language support options are selected Choose spelling options To choose the options for checking spelling click Language Settings gt Writing Aids In the Options section of the page Figure 43 choose the settings that are useful for you Some considerations e Ifyou do not want spelling checked while you type deselect Check spelling as you type and
153. See Choosing options for loading and saving documents in Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org Tip Working with text Working with text selecting copying pasting moving in Writer is similar to working with text in any other program OOo also has some convenient ways to select items that are not next to each other select a vertical block of text and paste unformatted text Selecting items that are not consecutive To select nonconsecutive items as shown in Figure 68 using the mouse 1 Select the first piece of text 2 Hold down the Control key and use the mouse to select the next piece of text 3 Repeat as often as needed Now you can work with the selected text copy it delete it change the style or whatever Macintosh users substitute the Command key when instructions in this Note chapter say to use the Control key The Country of the Blind Three hundred miles and more trom AMi iers one hundred from the snows of Cotopaxi wastes OT EMER IOEEEbes Chere lies that mysterious mountain valley cut off from all the w Seis Long years ago that valley lay so far open to the world that men might through frightful gorges and over an icy pass inte its equable meadows and thither indeed r or so of Peruvian halibreeds fleeing from the lust and tyranny of an evil RETENE Ther stupendous outbreak of Mindobamba when it was night in eis for seventeen days and the at Yaguachi and all the fish floating dying even as far
154. The selected 9 September cells then fill in the other items on the list 10 October sequentially repeating from the top of the list IN iber when they reach the end of the list 1d November December Figure 109 Result of fill series selection shown in Figure 110 Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 125 Fill Series Direction Series type Down C Linear hn J ei ies AutoFill Start value January 1 Figure 110 Specifying the start of a fill series result is in Figure 109 You can also use Edit gt Fill gt Series to create a one time fill series for numbers by entering the start and end values and the increment For example if you entered start and end values of 1 and 7 with an increment of 2 you would get the sequence of 1 3 5 7 In all these cases the Fill tool creates only a momentary connection between the cells Once they are filled the cells have no further connection with one another Defining a fill series To define your own fill series 1 Goto Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Calc gt Sort Lists This dialog Shows the previously defined series in the Lists box on the left and the contents of the highlighted list in the Entries box Lists Entries Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesd Mon Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug S Tue January February March April May a u al New Sat Figure 111 Predefined fill series 2
155. The type of payment includes two bank cards and cash So we will create a table with a field for the type of payment and use it in list boxes in the forms Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 203 While we have listed fields we will create in the tables of the database there is one more field that may be needed in a table the field for the Tip primary key In some tables the field for the primary key has already been listed In other tables such as the payment type an additional field for the primary key must be created Creating a new database To create a new database choose File gt New gt Database from the menu bar or click the arrow next to the New icon on the Standard toolbar and select Database from the dropdown menu Both methods open the Database Wizard On the first page of the Database Wizard select Create a new database and then click Next The second page has two questions Make sure the choice for the first question is Yes register the database for me and the choice for the second question is Open the database for editing Click Finish If the database is not registered it will not be accessible to the other OOo Note components such as Writer and Calc If the database is registered other components can access it Save the new database with the name Automobile This opens the Automobile OpenOffice org Base window Figure 175 shows part of this window Create Table in Design View Description Use Wiza
156. US Sizes Text Frame d Fages F Numbering d Overwrite From File Figure 52 Copying styles from a template into the open document 4 Select the categories of styles to be copied Select Overwrite if you want the styles being copied to replace any styles of the same names in the document you are copying them into 5 Click OK to copy the styles You will not see any change on screen Not To copy the styles from another document click the From File button Ore to open a window from which you can select the required document If your document has a table of contents and if you have used custom Caution styles for headings the heading levels associated with outline levels in Tools gt Outline Numbering will revert to the defaults of A Heading 1 Heading 2 and so on when you load styles this way You will need to change these back to your custom heading styles This is a bug Deleting styles You cannot remove delete any of OOo s predefined styles from a document or template even if they are not in use You can remove any user defined custom styles but before you do you should make sure the styles are not in use If an unwanted style is in use you will want to replace it with a substitute style To delete unwanted styles right click on them one at a time in the Styles and Formatting window and click Delete on the pop up menu If the style is in use you receive a warning message Caution Make sure the sty
157. Using the Open and Save As dialogs on page 25 Saving a document To save a new document do one of the following e Press Control S e Choose File gt Save from the menu bar e Click the Save button on the main toolbar When the Save As dialog appears enter the file name verify the file type if applicable and click Save To save an open document with the current file name choose File gt Save This will overwrite the last saved state of the file Password protection To protect an entire document from being viewable without a password use the option on the Save As dialog to enter a password 1 On the Save As dialog select the Save with password option and then click Save You will receive a prompt Figure 11 2 Type the same password in both fields and then click OK If the passwords match the document is saved password protected If the passwords do not 24 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 match you receive an error message Close the message box to return to the Set Password dialog box and enter the password again Caution OOo uses a very strong encryption mechanism that makes it almost impossible to recover the contents of a document in case you lose the password Set Password File encryption password Enter password to open e eVFrnse lt lt lt Confirm password ee Note After a password has been set the document will only open with the password Should yo
158. Wizard 6 Select fields Move all the fields from the Available fields to the Fields in report list Use the gt gt to do so Click Next 7 Label fields Change FuelCost to Fuel Cost by placing a space between the words Click Next 8 Group fields Use gt to move the Date field to the Groupings list Click Next 9 Sort options the wizard skipped this one 10 Choose layout accept the default Click Next 11 Create the report e Change the report name to Fuel Statistics e The default setting is Dynamic report so no change is necessary e Select Modify report layout e Click Finish Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 249 Modifying a report At the end of the last section we left the Fuel Statistics report open in the edit mode Figure 241 We will be working on that report These same steps can be used with any report that you open for editing Dis Fuel Fuel Cost tance Econ Cast pe omy mile Figure 241 A report in edit mode The Author is the name you listed in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt User Data The date is not correct The columns need to be moved to the left to give a better appearance None of the numbers are correct but their only purpose is to show the number of decimal places Step 1 Change the date 1 Click to the right of the date 4 26 20 so that the cursor is next to the field Use the Backspace key to erase the date 2 Insert gt Fields gt Date This places
159. Yes Yes OpenOffice org has been translated localized into over 40 languages so your language probably is supported Additionally there are over 70 spelling hyphenation and thesaurus dictionaries available for languages and dialects that do not have a localized program interface The dictionaries are available from the OpenOffice org website at http lingucomponent openoffice org download_ dict ionary html A large share of the development and much of the support for the project is currently supplied or sponsored by Oracle Corp There are also many other people who work on OOo as volunteers Read the section titled How to get help in Chapter 1 Introducting OpenOffice org The copyright is shared by Oracle Corp and all the volunteers who have contributed No The licenses under which OOo is developed and distributed can never be revoked so it cannot be taken away You may within the parameters set in the LGPL Read the license http www openoffice org license html 366 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Why do I need Java to run OpenOffice org is not written in Java it is written in OOo Is it written in Java the C language Java is one of several languages that can be used to extend OOo The Java JDK JRE is only required for some features The most notable one is the HSQLDB relational database engine Note Java is available at no cost If you do not want to use Java you can still use
160. a better solution is to use AutoText 1 Use Tools gt Macros gt Record Macro to start recording a macro A small window is displayed so you know that OpenOffice org is ETP recording Tse 2 Type the desired information or perform an appropriate series of operations In this case I typed my name Andrew Pitonyak 3 Click the Stop Recording button to stop recording save the macro and display the OpenOffice org Basic Macros dialog 324 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Library Containers Macros Save InspectMetaData f Close Save macro in Existing macros in DBInspe gtion Ca My Macros InspectMetaData OpenOffice org Macros AddResultSetToDoc 0117GS GettingStartedWithMacros ResultSetToData SupportedDEBDrivers New Library DriverArgs New Module 5 A Att Figure 300 OOo Macro Organizer dialog DBInspection library selected Macro name aj DBUtilities j Forms Modulel 4 Be certain to open the library container named My Macros Find the library named Standard under My Macros Be warned every library container has a library named Standard Select the Standard library and click New Module to create a new module to contain the macro 5 The default module name is Module1 Type a descriptive name and click OK to create the module The OpenOffice org Basic Macros dialog is displayed again Showing the new module Name ox R
161. aPilot e Refresh all DataPilots on the current sheet Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org 357 m g OpenOffice org 3 Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts Introduction You can use OpenOffice org OOo without requiring a pointing device such as a mouse or trackball by using its built in keyboard shortcuts This appendix lists some of the most common built in keyboard shortcuts that apply to all components of OpenOffice org For shortcuts specific to Writer Calc Impress Draw or Base read the relevant component guide or search the application Help Some of the shortcuts listed here may not work if your operating system uses the same shortcuts for other tasks Note To get around this problem assign different keys to these shortcuts by reconfiguring either OOo see Chapter 14 or your operating system see system documentation Tip for Macintosh users Some keystrokes are different on a Mac from those used in Windows and Linux The following table gives some common substitutions for the instructions in this book For a more detailed list see the application Help Right click Control click Open context menu Ctrl Control 3 Command Used with other keys F5 Shift F5 Open the Navigator F11 T Open Styles amp Formatting window Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts 359 General keyboard shortcuts Opening menus and menu items Opens a menu where lt gt is the underlined character of the me
162. ables both their field types are Date DATE Whether a single pair of fields from two tables are chosen as the relationship or two or more pairs are chosen certain requirements must Caution be met for the form to work A e No field from the subform can be the Primary key for its table FuelID cannot be used e Each pair of joined fields must have the same file type e One of the fields from the main form must be the Primary key for its table Date would have to be used Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 217 Step 5 Arrange controls Each control in a form consists of two Arrange the controls on your form parts label and field This step in creating the form determines where a control s label and field are placed in relationship rj with each other The four choices from left to right are Columnar left Columnar Labels on top As Data Sheet and In Arrangement of the main form Blocks Labels Above 1 Arrangement of the main form Click the second icon Columnar Labels on top The labels will be placed above their field 2 Arrangement of the subform Click the third icon As Data Sheet The m 2 0 5 alel labels are column headings and the 0 0 Z C C a field entries are in spreadsheet format Click Next As Data Sheet Step 6 Set data entry Unless you have a need for any of these entries to be checked accept the default settings Click Next Step 7
163. age All USD English USA w English USA v User defined 23400 USD Ar 1234 00 USD Currency 1 234 00 a 1 234 Ime 1 234 00 Scientific I erie 1 234 57 Options Decimal places 2 Negative numbers red Leading zeroes 1 Thousands separator Figure 180 Field Format options 4 To access additional formatting options click the button to the right of the Format example field 5 Description can be anything or can be left blank 6 To save and close the table choose File gt Save Name the table Fuel Close the Fuel table Follow the same steps to create the Vacations table The fields and their field types are listed in Figure 181 Make sure you make the Date field the primary key before closing Right click the gray box to the left of Date and select Primary key from the menu Save the table and name it Vacations Close the Vacations table Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 211 Field Name Field Type Date Date DATE Odometer Number NUMERIC Odometer reading Motel Number NUMERIC Tolls Number NUMERIC total tolls Breakfast Number NUMERIC BPayment Text VARCHAR payment type Lunch Number NUMERIC LPayment Text VARCHAR payment type Supper Number NUMERIC SPayment Text VARCHAR payment type SnackNo Number NUMERIC SnackCost Number NUMERIC SnPayment Text VARCHAR payment type for snacks Miscellan
164. age number mode mode changes Figure 7 Left end of status bar in Writer Outline Numbering Level O OO CO O se amp Digital Object View Zoom Zoom siqnature Inform ation lay out slider percent Figure 8 Right end of status bar in Writer Common status bar items are described below Page sheet or slide number Shows the current page sheet or slide number and the total number of pages Sheets or slides in the document Double click on this field to open the Navigator Other uses of this field depend on the component Page style or slide design Shows the current page style or slide design To edit the current page style or Slide design double click on this field Unsaved changes An asterisk appears here if changes to the document have not been saved Digital signature If the document has been digitally signed an icon shows here You can double click the icon to view the certificate Object information Displays information relevant to the cursor s position or the selected element of the document Double clicking in this area usually opens a relevant dialog Zoom slider and percent To change the view magnification drag the Zoom slider or click on the and signs or right click on the zoom level percent to pop up a list of magnification values from which to choose Double clicking on the zoom level percent opens the Zoom amp View Layout dialog Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 2
165. ain toolbar SE E e e The only differences you will see are in the information G h TF F field in the status bar in this case shape selected rather than Rectangle selected Sir O A go w amp Oo Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 187 Symbol shapes The Symbol Shapes icon provides an array of tools Symbol Shapes TX for drawing the various symbols G 4 OB weet ct Jj Dil oee Block arrows The Block Arrows icon opens the Block Arrows Block Arrows x toolbar ana Le b P p b Y om gt P gt rba S To GA PF Flowcharts The tools for drawing flowcharts are accessed by clicking Flowchart xX on the Flowcharts icon T The creation of flowcharts organization charts and similar planning tools are described in Chapter 9 Organization m a W Charts Flow Diagrams and More in the Draw Guide Woe xs 2eAYW E Callouts Use the Callouts icon 7 to open the Callouts Callouts x toolbar Jp p Stars and banners These tools are associated with the Stars icon 7 Stars and Banners X You can add text to all these shapes See Chapter 2 Drawing Basic Shapes and Chapter 10 Advanced Draw Techniques in the Draw Guide for details 188 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Selection modes There are three selection modes moving and changing size editing and rotating points To set the default mode either moving and changing sizes
166. al symbol between the two More than one calculation can be done by using parentheses to group the arithmetical operations Step 9 Run the query and make some modification After we run the query to make sure it works correctly we will hide all of the fields that we do not need 1 Click the Run Query icon in the Design Query toolbar Figure 223 The results are in Figure 231 FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading FuellD Fuel FuellD Distance End Reading Odometer Fuer Odometer End Reading P78 704 2 1 14 5 19 570 1032 3 178 7 1 253 6 12 96 15 150 1239 4 1032 3 1 207 1 13 67 Figure 231 Result of running the fuel economy query Notice that not all of the last column label is visible because some of the labels are long We can fix this problem by using an alias for many of the fields The labels are replaced by their aliases 2 Add Aliases Type in the aliases as they are listed in Figure 232 Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 243 FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer Quanity Begin End End Reading End Reading Fuel End Reading End Reading Fuel Economy Figure 232 Query table with aliases added 3 Run the query again The results are in Figure 233 Quanity Begin End End Reading FuellD Fuer FuellD Distance Fuel Economy 6 430 nri Mi 04 2 1 f4 5 11 59 19 570 1032 3 778 7 1 253 6 12 96 15 150 1239 4 1032 3 1 207 1 13 67
167. ally the File menu Opens context menu Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts 361 Editing Ctrl X Cuts selected items Ctrl C Copies selected items Ctrl V Pastes copied or cut items from the clipboard Ctrl Shift V Opens the Paste Special dialog Ctrl A Selects all Ctrl Z Undoes last action Ctrl Y Redoes last action Ctrl Shift Y Repeats last command Ctrl F Opens the Find amp Replace dialog Ctrl Shift F Searches for the last entered search term Ctrl Shift R Refreshes redraws the document view Ctrl Shift I Shows or hides the cursor in read only text Stopping macros Shift Ctrl Q Stops a running macro Defining keyboard shortcuts In addition to using the built in keyboard shortcuts listed in this Appendix you can define your own See Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org for instructions Further reading For help with OOo s keyboard shortcuts or using OOo with a keyboard only search the application Help using the shortcut keys or accessibility keywords 362 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Si OpenOffice org 3 Appendix B Open Source Open Standards OpenDocument Introduction OpenOffice org is both a product and an open source project If you are new to OOo its open source development and the community that produces and supports it you Should read this appendix A short history of OpenOffice org The OpenOffice org project be
168. ames of the icons shown in the tooltips change to match the selected category for example Next Graphic or Next Bookmark Navigation Figure 14 Navigation toolbar e To jump to a specific page in the document type its page number in the box at the top of the Navigator A bit of experimentation with the other icons will demonstrate their functions Some component specific uses are described in the chapters on Writer and the other components Undoing and redoing changes To undo the most recent change press Control Z or click the Undo icon on the Standard toolbar or choose Edit gt Undo from the menu bar The Edit menu shows the latest change that can be undone see below for an example from Writer m Untitled1 OpenOffice org Writer File Edit View Insert Format Table Te ca Undo Delete rabbit Ctrl Z p Redo Typing fox Ctl Figure 15 Edit gt Undo last action Click the small triangle to the right of the Undo icon to get a list of all the changes that can be undone You can select multiple changes and undo them at the same time 28 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 aste dipboard Delete 1 Change style graphics 17 Undo 1 action Figure 16 List of actions that can be undone After changes have been undone Redo becomes active To redo a change select Edit gt Redo or press Control Y or click on the Redo icon As with Undo click on the triangle to the rig
169. an might call up information about books Writer offers several ways to fill information into a form including check boxes option buttons text boxes pull down lists and spinners See Chapter 15 Using Forms in Writer in the Writer Guide 104 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Se OpenOffice org 3 Chapter 9 Getting Started with Calc Using Spreadsheets in OpenOffice org 105 What ts Calc Calc is the spreadsheet component of OpenOffice org OOo You can enter data usually numerical in a spreadsheet and then manipulate this data to produce certain results Alternatively you can enter data and then use Calc in a What if manner by changing some of the data and observing the results without having to retype the entire spreadsheet Other features provided by Calc include e Functions which can be used to create formulas to perform complex calculations on data e Database functions to arrange store and filter data e Dynamic charts a wide range of 2D and 3D charts e Macros for recording and executing repetitive tasks e Ability to open edit and save Microsoft Excel spreadsheets e Import and export of spreadsheets in multiple formats including HTML CSV PDF and PostScript If you want to use macros written in Microsoft Excel using the VBA macro code in OOo you must first edit the code in the OOo Basic IDE Note editor See Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros in this book and Chapter 12
170. anges to meet your needs Click each field one at a time and make the changes listed below 206 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Selected fields Field information CollectionID Field name CollectionID AlbumTitle artist Feld type DatePurchased Notes l NumberofTracks Entry required Photo Length 10 l Figure 177 Changing field types If any of these fields requires an entry set Entry required to Yes An entry with that field blank will then not be allowed In general only set Entry required to Yes if something must always be put in that field By default Entry required is set to No Note e CollectionID Change AutoValue from No to Yes e AlbumTitle Entry required Leave Entry required as No unless all of your music is in albums Length Unless you have an album title that exceeds 100 characters counting the spaces do not change the length In Base the maximum length of each field must be specified on creation It is not easy to change this later so if in doubt specify a greater length Base uses VCHAR as the field format for text fields This format only uses the actual number of characters in a field up to the limit set So a field containing 20 characters will only use space for 20 characters even if the limit is set at 100 Two album titles containing 25 and 32 characters respectively will use space for 25 and 32 characters and not 100 characters Note e Artist Use the De
171. anity Odometer PaymentT ype Figure 221 Fuel table in query Step 3 Add fields to the table at the bottom 1 Double click the FuellD field in the Fuel table 2 Double click the Odometer field 3 Double click the FuelQuantity field The table at the bottom of the query window should now have three columns Field Odometer FuelQuantity Alias Table Sort Visible Function Criterion Figure 222 Query table FuellD Fuel Fuel Fuel 240 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Step 4 Set the criterion for the query We want the query s FuelID to begin with the numeral 1 1 Type gt 0 in the Criterion cell under FuellID in the query table 2 Click the Run Query icon in the Query Design toolbar Figure 223 Query Design toolbar Figure 224 contains the Fuel table with my entries and the query results based upon the Fuel table the query results are in the right table FuellD Date FuelCost FueQuantity Odometer FuellD FuehQuantity 0 Friday M 16 00 14 690 f04 2 1 MiB 6 430 1 Friday M 7 00 6 430 78 7 2 1032 3 19 570 2 Saturday 20 00 19 570 1032 3 3 1239 4 15 150 3 Saturday 16 00 15 150 1239 4 4 4 sunday lt AutoFie lt AutoF ie Figure 224 Fuel table and query of the fuel table Step 5 Save and close the query Since this query contains the ending odometer reading for our calculations name it Fnd Reading when saving it Then close the query Step 6 Create th
172. are available Please note that some color printers may print in color regardless of the settings you choose Change the printer settings to print in black and white or grayscale 1 Choose File gt Print to open the Print dialog 2 Click Properties to open the Properties dialog for the printer The available choices vary from one printer to another but you should find options for the Color settings See your printer s help or user manual for more information 3 The choices for color might include black and white or grayscale Choose the required setting 4 Click OK to confirm your choice and return to the Print dialog 5 Click the Print button to print the document Tip Grayscale is best if you have any graphics in the document Change the OOo settings to print all color text and graphics as grayscale 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Print 2 Select the Convert colors to grayscale option Click OK to save the change 3 Open the Print dialog File gt Print 4 Click the Print button to print the document Change the OOo Writer or Calc Impress Draw settings to print all color text as black and all graphics as grayscale 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Component gt Print 2 Under Contents select the Print text in black option Click OK to save the change 3 Open the Print dialog File gt Print 4 Click the Print button to print the document Previewing pages sheet
173. arts are given in the Calc Guide Adding images to a document Images can be added to a document in several ways by inserting an image file directly from a graphics program or a scanner or from the OOo Gallery Inserting an image file When the image is in a file stored on the computer you can insert it into an OOo document using either of the following methods Drag and drop 1 Open a file browser window and locate the image you want to insert 2 Drag the image into the Writer document and drop it where you want it to appear A faint vertical line marks where the image will be dropped This method embeds saves a copy of the image file in the Writer document To link the file instead of embedding it hold down the Control Shift keys while dragging the image Insert Picture dialog 1 Click in the OOo document where you want the image to appear 2 Choose Insert gt Picture gt From File from the menu bar 3 On the Insert Picture dialog navigate to the file to be inserted select it and click Open At the bottom of the dialog are two options Preview and Link Choose Preview to view a thumbnail of the selected image on the right so you can verify that you have the correct file See below for the use of Link 290 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Insert picture D Profiles rgs02c My Documents My Pictures Date modified 06 20 2006 21 31 04 lza ned20qi jpa Graphics jpg 5779 Bytes 07 05 2006 20 39 0
174. ate e Changing a style using the Style dialog e Updating a style from a selection e Use AutoUpdate paragraph and frame styles only e Load or copy styles from another document or template Any changes you make to a style are effective only in the current document To change styles in more than one document you need to Tip change the template or copy the styles into the other documents as described on page 62 Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 59 Changing a style using the Style dialog To change an existing style using the Style dialog right click on the required style in the Styles and Formatting window and select Modify from the pop up menu The Style dialog displayed depends on the type of style selected Each style dialog has several tabs See the chapters on styles in the user guides for details Updating a style from a selection To update a style from a selection 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window 2 In the document select an item that has the format you want to adopt as a style Caution Make sure that there are unique properties in this paragraph For example if there are two different font sizes or font styles that A particular property will remain the same as before 3 In the Styles and Formatting window select the style you want to update single click not double click then long click on the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon and click on Update Style
175. bTester Help HH aE GetCalcLanguageData GetCellAl GetCellByName GetDocURL He YA Figure 309 Use the Macro Selector dialog to run macros Although you can use Tools gt Macros gt Run Macro to run all macros this is not efficient for frequently run macros A more common technique is to assign a macro to a toolbar button menu item keyboard shortcut or a button embedded in a document While choosing a method it is also good to ask questions such as Should the macro be available for only one document or globally for all documents Does the macro pertain to a specific document type such as a Calc document e How frequently will the macro be used The answers will determine where to store the macro and how to make it available For example you will probably not add a rarely used macro to a toolbar To help determine your choices see Table 4 Table 4 Methods for starting a macro Toolbar No Yes Yes Menu No Yes Yes Shortcut Yes Yes No Event Yes No Yes 338 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 To add a menu item keyboard shortcut or toolbar icon that calls a macro use the Customize dialog see Figure 308 Open this dialog in either of these ways e Choose Tools gt Customize from the main menu bar e Each toolbar has an icon that opens a menu choose the Customize Toolbar option Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events OpenOffice org Writer Toolbars Toolbar
176. based on existing relation Which relation do you want Binns to add Subform based on manual selection of fields a Asubform is a form that is inserted in another form Use subforms to show data from tables or queries with a one to many Figure 189 Adding a subform 216 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Step 3 Add subform fields This step is exactly the same as step 1 The only difference is that not all of the fields will be used in the subform 1 Fuel is preselected under Tables or queries 2 Use the gt gt button to move all the fields to the right 3 Click the FuellID field to highlight it 4 Use the lt button to move the FuellID to the left 5 Click Next Select the fields of your subform Tables or queries Available fields oF c Fields in the form Date FuelCoast FuelQuanity Odometer PaymentT ype Figure 190 Selecting fields of a subform Step 4 Get joined fields This step is for tables or queries for which no relationship has been defined Because we have already defined the relationship the wizard skips this step It is possible to create a relationship between two tables that is based Note upon more than one pair of fields How to do that and why is discussed in the Base Guide When selecting a pair of fields from two tables to use as a relationship they have to have the same field type That is why we used the Date field from both t
177. bought When working with a query more than one table can be used Since different tables may contain the same field names the format for naming Note fields in a query is Table name field name with a period between the table name and the field name For example The Lunch field of the Vacation table used in a query has the name Vacation Lunch Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 237 Step 1 Select the fields 1 Select the CD Collection table from the dropdown list of tables 2 Select fields from the CD Collection table in the Available fields list a Click Artist and use the gt button to move it to the Fields in the Query list b Move the AlbumTitle and DatePurchased fields in the same manner c Click Next Tip click the up or down arrow To change the order of the fields select the field you want to move and Tables Table CD Collection Available fields CollectionID Format Notes Numberoflracks Photo A V Select the fields columns for your query Fields in the Query CD Collection Artist CD Collection AlbumTitle CD Collection DatePurchased Figure 218 First page of the Query Wizard Step 2 Select the sorting order Up to four fields can be used to sort the information of our query A little simple logic helps at this point Which field is most important In our query the artist is most important The album title is less important and the date purchased is of
178. ca Figure 152 Ruler units 176 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Status bar The Status bar is located at the bottom of the screen in all OOo components it includes several Draw specific fields For details on the contents and use of these fields see Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org in this book and Chapter 1 Introducing Draw in the Draw Guide The sizes are given in the current measurement unit not to be confused with the ruler units This unit is defined in Tools gt Options Note gt OpenOffice org Draw gt General where you can also change the scale of the page Another way to change the scale is to double click on the number shown in the status bar Rectangle selected i 1SGf4 63 4 95x 290 Information Position Unsaved natal changes signature Figure 153 Left end of the Draw status bar Slide 1 1 Layout Default e amp 75 i Slide Page oom slider oom number style percent Figure 154 Right end of Draw status bar Toolbars To display or hide the various Draw toolbars choose View gt Toolbars On the menu that appears select which toolbars you want to display For more about working with toolbars see Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org in this book The tools available in the Draw toolbars are explained in the following sections The appearance of the toolbar icons may vary depending on your operating system and the selection of icon size and style in Tools gt
179. cale Scaling mode 6 Reduce enlarge printout v Scaling factor cancei Help Reset Figure 9 Dialog showing common controls 1 Tabbed page not strictly speaking a control 2 Radio buttons only one can be selected at a time 3 Checkbox more than one can be selected at a time 4 Spin box click the up and down arrows to change the number shown in the text box next to it or type in the text box 5 Thumbnail or preview 6 Drop down list from which to select an item 7 Push buttons 22 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Starting a new document You can start a new blank document in OOo in several ways When OOo is open but no document is open for example if you close all the open documents but leave the program running the Start Center is shown Click one of the icons to open a new document of that type or click the Templates icon to start a new document using a template m e OpenOffice org 3 Drawing Spreadsheet gt Database Presentation v Formula Open iS Templates ORACLE Figure 10 OpenOffice org Start Center You can also start a new document in one of the following ways e Use File gt New and choose the type of document e Use the arrow next to the New button on the main toolbar From the drop down menu select the type of document to be created e Press Control N on the keyboard e Use File gt Wizards for some special types of documents If a
180. cellaneous This report will not require an additional query The second report involves the Fuel table Since this table includes fuel purchases at times other than during the vacation we need to create a query that contains only the fuel purchased during the vacation Vacations table report To create a new report 1 Click the Reports icon in the Database list in the Automobile OpenOffice org Base window Figure 175 2 In the Tasks list click Use Wizard to Create Report The Report Wizard opens Step 1 Field selection 1 Select Table Vacations in the Tables or Queries dropdown list 2 Use the gt to move these fields from the Available fields list to the Fields in report list Date Motel Tolls Miscellaneous Breakfast Lunch Supper and SnackCost Click Next Tables or queries Table Vacations iai Available fields Fields in report Odometer BPayment LPayment oPayment onackNo Breakfast onPayment Lunch Supper MiscNotes onackGost A V MiscPayment Figure 236 Adding fields to a report Step 2 Labeling fields Change any field labels you wish We will shorten Miscellaneous to Misc Click Next Step 3 Grouping Since we are grouping by the date use the gt button to move the Date field to the Grouping list Click Next Fields Groupings Motel Date Figure 237 Selecting fields for grouping data 246 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Step
181. click the name of the table In our case do this for both Vacations and Fuel Or click the name of the table and then click Add for each table 3 Click Close to close the Add Tables dialog when you have added the tables you want 4 You can define the relationship between the Vacations and Fuel tables in two ways Click and drag the Date field in the Fuel table to the Date field in the Vacations table When you release the mouse button a connecting line forms between the two date fields Figure 183 Vacations E Fuel 1 Date FuellD D Odometer FuelCost Breakfast Lunch FuelQuanity i Erle maata E eee Figure 183 Designation for a 1 n relationship Or click the New Relation icon This opens the Relations window Figure 184 Our two tables are listed in the Tables involved section In the Fields involved section click the dropdown list under the Fuel label Select Date from the Fuel table list Click in the cell to the right of this dropdown list This opens a dropdown list for the Vacations table Select Date from the Vacations table list It should now look like Figure 1384 Click OK Tables involved Fuel Vacations ba Fields involved Vacations Date Date Figure 184 Selected fields in a relationship 5 Modifying the Update options and Delete options section of the Relation window a Right click the line connecting the Date fields in the
182. clip art and add it to the Gallery Draw can import graphics from many common formats and save them in over 20 formats including PNG HTML PDF and Flash Base database Base provides tools for day to day database work within a simple interface It can create and edit forms reports queries tables views and relations so that managing a connected database is much the same as in other popular database applications Base provides many new features such as the ability to analyze and edit relationships from a diagram view Base incorporates HSQLDB as its default relational database engine It can also use dBASE Microsoft Access MySQL or Oracle or any ODBC compliant or JOBC compliant database Base also provides support for a subset of ANSI 92 SQL Math formula editor Math is OOo s formula or equation editor You can use it to create complex equations that include symbols or characters not available in standard font sets While it is most commonly used to create formulas in other documents such as Writer and Impress files Math can also work as a standalone tool You can save formulas in the standard Mathematical Markup Language MathML format for inclusion in web pages and other documents not created by OOo The advantages of OpenOffice org Here are some of the advantages of OpenOffice org over other office suites e No licensing fees OOo is free for anyone to use and distribute at no cost Many features that are available a
183. commands to a toolbar by clicking on the Add button These actions are described below 4 When you have finished making all your changes click OK to save them Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org 349 Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events OpenGffice arg Writer Toolbars Toolbar Content Commands B Save As Document as E mail a Frit File qt Save In OpenOrrice arg Writer ha Description Creates a new OpenOffice org document Figure 317 The Toolbars page of the Customize dialog Creating a new toolbar To create a new toolbar 1 Choose Tools gt Customize gt Toolbars from the menu bar 2 Click New On the Name dialog type the new toolbar s name and choose from the Save In drop down list where to save this changed menu for the application for example Writer or for a selected document Toolbar Name New Toolbar 1l Save In OOo dev Writer s The new toolbar now appears on the list of toolbars in the Customize dialog After creating a new toolbar you need to add some commands to it as described below OK pK Adding a command to a toolbar If the list of available buttons for a toolbar does not include all the commands you want on that toolbar you can add commands When you create a new toolbar you need to add commands to it 1 On the Toolbars page of the Customize dialog select the toolbar in the Toolbar list and click the Add button in the Toolbar Content section of the dialog
184. control 3 Drag the cursor to the bottom right of the group of controls and release the mouse button As you drag the cursor a dashed box appears showing what is contained in your selection Make sure it is big enough to include the entire length of all the controls When you release the mouse button a border with its green handles appears around the controls you selected Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 219 Lu nch Tolls Le Figure 193 Selecting multiple controls Move the cursor over one of the fields It changes to a drag icon Drag the group of controls to where you want them When either changing size or moving a control two properties of the Form Design toolbar should be selected Snap to Grid and Guides when Moving Tip Your controls will line up better and an outline of what you are moving moves as the cursor moves You should also have both rulers active View gt Ruler Step 1 Change the Date field 1 Control click the Date field to select it 2 Move the cursor over the middle green handle on the right side It should change to a double headed arrow 3 Hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor to the right until the length is 6 cm The vertical dashed line is lined up with the 6 Release the mouse button 4 Click the Control icon in the Form Controls toolbar The Properties Date Field window opens Each line contains a property of the field COTE k m G EW Ba aac SO m
185. cts all components However OOo options can be set at a component level or even document level e File compatibility In addition to its native OpenDocument formats OOo includes PDF and Flash export capabilities as well as support for opening and Saving files in many common formats including Microsoft Office HTML XML WordPerfect and Lotus 1 2 3 formats New in OO03 using an extension the ability to import and edit some PDF files e No vendor lock in OO03 uses OpenDocument an XML eXtensible Markup Language file format developed as an industry standard by OASIS Organization for the Advancement of Structured Information Standards These files can easily be unzipped and read by any text editor and their framework is open and published e You have a voice Enhancements software fixes and release dates are community driven You can join the community and affect the course of the product you use You can read more about OpenOffice org its mission history licensing and other organizational information on the OpenOffice org website http www openoffice org Minimum requirements OpenOffice org 3 x requires one of the following operating systems e Microsoft Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or higher XP Vista or 7 e GNU Linux Kernel version 2 4 and glibc 2 3 2 or higher starting with OOo 3 3 glibc2 version 2 5 or higher is required e Mac OS X 10 4 Tiger or higher e Solaris 10 OS or higher Some OpenOffice org featur
186. d 1 OpenOffice org Writer File Edit View Format Tools Window Help Fonts Font Sze Spacing Alignment Text Mode Figure 258 Changing the font size oranan 2 Select a larger font size under Base size top most entry Font Sizes Base size OK Relative sizes Cancel Text Default Indexes Functions ih Operators Limits Figure 259 Edit Base size top to make a formula bigger The result of this change is illustrated in Figure 260 Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 261 Before m 3 141459 After mT 3 14159 Figure 260 Result of changing the base font size Formula layout The most difficult part of using Math comes when writing complicated formulas This section provides some advice Brackets are your friends Math knows nothing about order of operation You must use brackets to state the order of operations explicitly Consider the following example 2 over x 1 24 x 2 over x 1 2 x 1 Equations over more than one line Suppose you want to type an equation covering more than one line For example x 3 yo Your first reaction would be to simply press the Enter key However if you press the Enter key though the markup goes to a new line the resulting equation does not You must type the newline command explicitly This is illustrated in the table below xX 3 ged x 3 y 1 x 3 newline x3 y 1 y How do I add limits to my sum
187. d 153 presentations saving 309 primary key 208 primary key database 208 Print dialog 268 print file directly 268 print options general 37 print preview Calc 277 Writer 276 print ranges Calc 137 printer settings 47 printing black and white on color printer 276 booklet 274 brochure 274 Calc 137 272 PDF envelopes labels business cards 275 general options 269 376 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 grayscale on color printer 276 handouts 274 headers and footers Calc 141 Impress and Draw 273 multiple pages per sheet 270 notes Impress 274 page break Calc 140 page order details scale in Calc 138 page orientation 269 rows or columns on every page 139 selecting what to print 271 Writer 271 Professional Template Pack extension 356 Q queries database aliases 243 creating using a Wizard 237 creating using Design View 239 joined fields 217 search conditions 239 Query Wizard database 237 Quickstarter 15 enabling 34 quotation marks 124 R raster graphics 199 rectangle drawing 183 redlines 100 redo change 28 regular expressions 84 relationships database 213 REM 326 remove manual formatting 169 remove personal information on saving 42 removing personal data 287 renaming files 25 replacement table font 41 Report Builder extension 356 Report Wizard database 246 revision marks 100 RGB 178 right to left RTL layout 11 right click context menus 20 rotating an object 192 rows in Calc d
188. d Open This opened the directory which was not initially shown andrewO home andy openoffice org 0 user basic MacroFormatterADP cs ca 4p A s A E z ate fe dialog xlb XLB File 296 Bytes 10 26 2006 22 53 06 script xlb XLB File 357 Bytes 10 26 2006 22 53 06 File name script xlb oa Open File type BAS cancat__ Figure 307 Select a macro library to import 336 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Navigate to the directory containing the library to import There are usually two files from which to choose dialog xlb and script xlb It does not matter which of these two files you select both will be imported Select a file and click Open to continue File name script xlb MacroFormatterADP Options Insert as reference read only Replace existing libraries Figure 308 Choose library import options If the library already exists it will not be replaced unless Replace existing libraries is checked If Insert as reference is checked the library is referenced in its current location but you cannot edit the library If Insert as reference is not checked however the library is copied to the user s macro directory Macros can be stored in libraries inside OpenOffice org documents Select a document rather than a directory on disk as shown in Figure 307 to import libraries contained in a document Downloading macros to import Macros are available for download Some macros are contained in doc
189. d view is a slide sorter view with the slide thumbnails Not The Presenter Console works only on an operating system that supports ee multiple displays Report Builder Creates stylish complex database reports from Base You can define group and page headers group and page footers and calculation fields Export your reports into PDF or OpenDocument formats or send them as email attachments Professional Template Pack Il Provides more than 120 templates for Writer Calc and Impress Available in several languages After you have installed this extension you will find the templates under File gt New gt Templates and Documents Template Changer for Writer Adds two new items to the File gt Templates menu in Writer that allow you to assign a new template to the current document or to a folder of documents All styles and formatting will be loaded from that template and the document will behave as it was created using that template Solver for Nonlinear Programming for Calc Calc ships with a solver engine for linear programming only This extension adds more solvers which are capable of handling nonlinear problems as well as linear ones e DEPS Differential Evolution amp Particle Swarm Optimization e SCO Social Cognitive Optimization DataPilot Tools for Calc Adds some utility functions that make using the Calc DataPilot easier e Display the current source range for a DataPilot e Change the source range for a Dat
190. de transition section has a very useful choice Automatic preview Select its checkbox Then when you make any changes in a slide transition the new slide is previewed in the Slide Design area including its transition effect Tip Automatic slides advance You can set the presentation to automatically advance to the next slide after a set amount of time for example kiosk mode or carousel from the Slide Show gt Slide Show Settings menu or to advance automatically after a pre set amount of time different for each slide To set up the latter choose Slide Show gt Rehearse Timings When using this tool start the slide show a small timer is displayed in the bottom left corner When you are ready to advance to the next slide click on the timer Impress will memorize the timings and at the next slide show will advance automatically after the timer expires 172 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Running the slide show To run the slide show do one of the following e Click Slide Show gt Slide Show e Click the Slide Show button on the Presentation toolbar Presentation x Slide al Slide Design Slide Show e Press F5 or F9 on the keyboard If the slide transition is Automatic after x seconds let the slide show run by itself If the slide transition is On mouse click do one of the following to move from one Slide to the next e Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to go to the next slide or to go back to the previo
191. default somewhere other than My Documents To make changes select an item in the list shown in Figure 25 and click Edit On the Select Path dialog not shown may also be titled Edit Paths add or delete folders as required and then click OK to return to the Options dialog Note that some items can have at least two paths listed one to a shared folder which might be on a network and one to a user specific folder normally on the user s personal computer You can use the entries in the OpenOffice org Paths dialog to compile Tip a list of files such as those containing AutoText that you need to back up or copy to another computer 38 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Paths used by OpenOffice org Type PA Path AutoCorrect C Users Jared AppData Roaming OpenOffice org 3 user a Auto T ext Cc Users Jared AppData Roaming OpenOffice org 3 user a Backups Cs Users Jared AppData Roaming OpenOffice org 3 user b Gallery CA Users Jared AppData Roaming OpenOffice org s user g Graphics C Users Jared AppData Roaming OpenOffice org 3 userig My Documents Cs Users Jared Documents Templates CA Users Jared AppData Roaming OpenOffice org usert Temporary files CA Users Jared AppData Local Temp mn t Default Edit Figure 25 Viewing the paths of files used by OpenOffice org Color options On the OpenOffice org Colors page you can specify colors to use in OOo documents You can select a color from a co
192. delete any of the inbuilt themes To delete a theme from the Gallery 1 Go to Tools gt Gallery 2 In the left part of the Gallery select in the list the theme you wish to delete 3 Right click on the theme then click Delete on the pop up menu Location of the Gallery and the objects in it Graphics and other objects shown in the Gallery can be located anywhere on your computer s hard disk on a network drive or on a CD ROM Listings in the Gallery refer to the location of each object When you add graphics to the Gallery the files are not moved or copied only the location of each new object is added as a reference In a workgroup situation you may have access to a shared Gallery where you cannot change the contents unless authorized to do so and a user Gallery where you can add change or delete objects The location of the user Gallery is specified in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Paths You can change this location and you can copy your gallery files sdv to other computers Gallery contents provided with OOo are stored in a different location You cannot change this location 296 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Creating an image map An image map defines areas of an image called hotspots with hyperlinks to web addresses other files on the computer or parts of the same document Hotspots are the graphic equivalent of text hyperlinks described in Chapter 12 Clicking on a hotspot causes
193. dently Removing split views To remove a split view do any of the following e Double click on each split line e Click on and drag the split lines back to their places at the ends of the scroll bars e Choose Window gt Split to remove all split lines at the same time 122 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Entering data using the keyboard Most data entry in Calc can be accomplished using the keyboard Entering numbers Click in the cell and type in the number using the number keys on either the main keyboard or the numeric keypad To enter a negative number either type a minus sign in front of it or enclose it in parentheses brackets like this 1234 By default numbers are right aligned and negative numbers have a leading minus symbol Not If a number beginning with 0 is entered in to a cell Calc will drop the 0 ore for example 01234 becomes 1234 To enter a number and retain the leading 0 right click on the cell and choose Format Cells gt Numbers In the Format Cells dialog under Options select the required number of Leading zeros The number selected for leading zeros needs to be one higher than the digits ina number For example if the number is 1234 the number entered for the leading zero will be 5 Format Cells ent Sr Numbers Font Font Effects Alignment Background Cell Protection Category Format Language All 1234 1 Default English UK User defined 71 204 Number P
194. deselects it Moving and dynamically adjusting an object s size There are several ways of moving or changing the size of an object The dynamic method described here uses the mouse When you dynamically change an object remember to check the left hand area of the status bar at the bottom of the Draw window This area shows detailed information about the ongoing manipulation This information changes when the mouse is moved Dynamic movement of objects To move an object select it and then click within the object s border and hold down the left mouse button while dragging the mouse During movement the shape of the object appears a faded version of the shape to help with repositioning To drop the object at its new location release the mouse button The new position appears immediately in the Status Bar Dynamic size modification of objects To change the size of a selected object or group of selected objects with the mouse move one of the handles located around the selection As shown in the following illustration a faded version of the new object shape is shown The results depend on which handle you use To resize an object along one axis use the appropriate side handle To resize both axes use a corner handle The new size appears immediately in the status bar If you press the Shift key while resizing an object the change in size Note will be carried out symmetrically with respect to the two axes so that the
195. dialog to select the elements you want to appear on each handout page and their contents More details on how to use this dialog are provided in the Impress Guide es Header and Footer Slide Notes and Handouts Include on page Header Header text Apply to All Cancel Help Date and time O Fixed Variable Language 08 10 10 S English UK Footer Footer text Page number Figure 136 Dialog to set the page information for handouts and notes Slide Sorter view Slide Sorter view contains all of the slide thumbnails Use this view to work with a group of slides or with only one slide Normal Outine Notes Handout Slide Sorter Crag ing gn gra rr Prec ritin Slide 1 Sk kar oe Ley eta Fc ce al cl fee r nli Slide 3 Slide 4 Figure 137 Slide Sorter view Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 151 Customizing Slide Sorter view To change the number of slides per row 1 Check View gt Toolbars gt Slide View to make the Slide View toolbar visible a fei E f4 Slides 3 Figure 138 Slide Sorter and Slide View toolbars 2 Adjust the number of slides up to a maximum of 15 Moving a slide using Slide Sorter To move a slide in a presentation in the Slide Sorter 1 Click the slide A thick black border is drawn around it 2 Drag and drop it to the location you want e As you move the slide a black vertical line appears to one side of the slide e Drag the slide u
196. different tables Vacations and Fuel So this report requires creating a query Creating a static report We will create a report on vacation expenses Certain questions need to be asked before creating the report e What information do we want in the report e How do we want the information arranged e What fields are required to provide this information e Will a query have to be created because these fields are in different tables e Are there any calculations required in the data before being added to the report The expenses for our vacation are motel tolls miscellaneous breakfast lunch Supper snacks and fuel One possible report would simply list the totals of each of these expense groups Another possible report would list the expense totals for each day of the vacation A third possible report would list the totals for each expense group for each type of payment This would let us know where the money came from to pay the expenses The best way to create reports like these is to create the queries needed to gather the needed data insert the query data into a spreadsheet and use the necessary Calc functions on this data We will create two reports one listing the expenses each day other than fuel and the second listing the fuel costs each day Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 245 The fields we need for the first report from the Vacations table are Date Motel Toll Breakfast Lunch Supper SnackCost and Mis
197. document is already open in OOo the new document opens in a new window Opening an existing document When no document is open the Start Center provides an icon for opening an existing document or choosing from a list of recently edited documents Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 23 Open a file browser Open a list of recently edited documents You can also open an existing document in one of the following ways e Choose File gt Open e Click the Open button on the main toolbar e Press Control O on the keyboard In each case the Open dialog appears Select the file you want and then click Open If a document is already open in OOo the second document opens in a new window In the Open dialog you can reduce the list of files by selecting the type of file you are looking for For example if you choose Text documents as the file type you will only see documents Writer can open including odt doc txt if you choose Spreadsheets you will see ods xsl and other files that Calc opens You can also open an existing document that is in an OpenDocument format by double clicking on the file s icon on the desktop or in a file manager such as Windows Explorer If you have associated Microsoft Office file formats with OOo you can also open these files by double clicking on them Under Microsoft Windows you can use either the OOo Open and Save As Note dialogs or the ones provided by Microsoft Windows See
198. done in Slide Sorter view where you can see most of the Slides simultaneously Choose View gt Slide Sorter from the menu bar or click the Slide Sorter tab at the top of the workspace One slide set multiple presentations In many situations you may find that you have more slides than the time available to present them or you may want to provide a rapid overview without dwelling on the details Rather than having to create a new presentation you can use two tools that Impress offers hiding slides and custom slide shows To hide a slide right click on the slide thumbnail either in the Slide pane or in the work area if you are using the Slide Sorter view and choose Hide Slide from the pop up menu Hidden slides are marked by a slashed slide number If you want to reorder the presentation choose Slide Show gt Custom Slide Show Click on the New button to create a new sequence of slides and save it You can have as many slide shows as you want from a single slide set Slide transitions Slide transition is the animation that is played when a slide is changed You can configure the slide transition from the Slide Transition drawer in the Tasks pane Select the desired transition the speed of the animation and whether the transition Should happen when you click the mouse preferred or automatically after a certain number of seconds Click Apply to all slides unless you prefer to have different transitions in the presentation The Sli
199. e English USA locale for numbers When importing numbers from an HTML page the decimal and thousands separator characters differ according to the locale of the HTML page The clipboard however contains no information about the locale If this option is not selected numbers will be interpreted according to the Language Locale setting in Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Languages see page 51 If this option is selected numbers will be interpreted as for the English USA locale Import Import unknown HTML tags as fields Select this option if you want tags that are not recognized by OOo to be imported as fields For an opening tag an HTML ON field will be created with the value of the tag name For a closing tag an HTML OFF will be created These fields will be converted to tags in the HTML export Import Ignore font settings Select this option to have OOo ignore all font settings when importing The fonts that were defined in the HTML Page Style will be used Export To optimize the HTML export select a browser or HTML standard from the Export box If OpenOffice org Writer is selected specific OpenOffice org Writer instructions are exported Export OpenOffice org Basic Select this option to include OOo Basic macros scripts when exporting to HTML format You must activate this option before you create the OpenOffice org Basic macro otherwise the script will not be inserted OpenOffice org Basic macros must b
200. e A macro given in the Note below to re enable this feature If you are using Writer you can also use the Template Changer extension see page 71 to reactivate the template 68 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Note To re enable updating from a template 1 Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic Select the document from the list click the expansion symbol or triangle and select Standard If Standard has an expansion symbol beside it click that and select a module 2 If the Edit button is active click it If the Edit button is not active click New 3 In the Basic window enter the following Sub FixDocV3 set UpdateFromTemplate oDocSettings ThisComponent createInstance _ com sun star document Settings oDocSettings UpdateFromTemplate True End Sub FixDocV3 4 Click the Run BASIC icon then close the Basic window 5 Save the document Next time when you open this document you will have the update from template feature back Adding templates using the Extension Manager The Extension Manager provides an easy way to install collections of templates graphics macros or other add ins that have been packaged into files with a OXT extension See Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org for more about the Extension Manager This Web page lists many of the available extensions http extensions services openoffice org To install an extension follow these ste
201. e For example to select the range that would go from A3 to C6 you would enter A3 C6 Range of non contiguous cells 1 Select the cell or range of cells using one of the methods above 2 Move the mouse pointer to the start of the next range or single cell 3 Hold down the Control key and click or click and drag to select a range 4 Repeat as necessary Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 115 Selecting columns and rows Entire columns and rows can be selected very quickly in OOo Single column or row To select a single column click on the column identifier letter see Figure 88 To select a single row click on the row identifier number Multiple columns or rows To select multiple columns or rows that are contiguous 1 Click on the first column or row in the group 2 Hold down the Shift key 3 Click the last column or row in the group To select multiple columns or rows that are not contiguous 1 Click on the first column or row in the group 2 Hold down the Control key 3 Click on all of the subsequent columns or rows while holding down the Control key Entire sheet To select the entire sheet click on the small box between the A column header and the 1 row header Select All Figure 99 Select All box You can also press Control A to select the entire sheet Selecting sheets You can select either one or multiple sheets It can be advantageous to select multiple Sheets at times when yo
202. e H ie 10111213 14 15 1 Line 5 Line Color 9 To Foreground 13 Alignment 2 Arrow Style 6 Area 10 To Background 14 Change Anchor 3 Line Style 7 Area Style Filling 11 Bring to Front 15 Ungroup 4 Line Width 8 Rotate 12 Send to Back 16 Group Figure 288 Drawing Object Properties toolbar The default you set applies to the current document and session It is not retained when you close the document or close Writer and it does not apply to any other document you open The defaults apply to all the drawing objects except text objects To change the properties for an existing drawing object 1 Select the object 2 Continue as described above You can also specify the position and size rotation and slant and corner radius properties of the drawing object 1 Right click on the drawing object and then choose Position and Size from the pop up menu The Position and Size dialog is displayed 2 Choose any properties as required Resizing a drawing object The same considerations for resizing an image apply also to resizing an object Select the object click on one of the eight handles around it and drag it to its new position For a scaled resizing select one of the corner handles and keep the Shift key pressed while dragging the handle to its new position For more sophisticated control of the size of the object choose Format gt Object gt Position and Size from the menu bar Use the Position and Size dialog to set the w
203. e to add macros that someone else has written and to use the built in macro recorder which records your keystrokes and saves them for use Most tasks in OpenOffice org are accomplished by dispatching a command sending a command which is intercepted and used The macro recorder works by recording the commands that are dispatched see The dispatch framework on page 332 Adding an existing macro The first step in learning macro programming is to find and use existing macros This section assumes that you have a macro that you want to use the macro may be in an email on a web page or even in a book For this example use the macro in Listing 1 Listing 1 Simple macro that says hello Sub HelloMacro Print Hello End Sub You must create a library and module to contain your macro this is covered in Macro organization on page 333 Use these steps to create a library to contain your macro 1 Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic to open the OOo Macro dialog see Figure 300 and Figure 305 2 Click Organizer to open the OOo Basic Macro Organizer dialog see Figure 306 3 Select the Libraries tab 4 Set the Location to My Macros amp Dialogs which is the default 5 Click New to open the New Library dialog Enter a library name such as TestLibrary and click OK 6 Select the Modules tab 7 In the Module list expand My Macros and select TestLibrary A module named
204. e Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros for more information Editing hyperlinks To edit an existing link click anywhere in the link text and then click the Hyperlink icon G on the Standard toolbar or choose Edit gt Hyperlink from the menu bar The Hyperlink dialog opens Make your changes and click Apply If you need to edit several hyperlinks you can leave the Hyperlink dialog open until you have edited all of them Be sure to click Apply after each one When you are finished click Close The standard default behavior for activating hyperlinks within OOo is to use Ctrl click This behavior can be changed in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Security gt Options by deselecting the option Ctrl click required to follow hyperlinks If clicking in your links activates them check that page to see if the option has been deselected Removing hyperlinks You can remove the clickable link from hyperlink text leaving just the text by right clicking on the link and selecting Default Formatting This option is also available from the Format menu You may then need to re apply some formatting in order for the text to match the rest of your document To erase the link text or button from the document completely select it and press the Backspace or Delete key Saving Writer documents as web pages Writer s HTML capabilities include saving existing documents in HTML format creating new documents as HTML not described he
205. e HTML document For those who may be interested the resulting HTML files conform to the HTML 4 Transitional F Hame and Path of the HTML Document Save in 4 001 9 100 testdocs webpage html My Recent Documents Ss Desktop biy Network PI cae File name webpage Save az type HTML Document Cancel styles Heading 1 Default Figure Heading 1 Figure 299 Creating a series of web pages from one document Creating web pages using a Wizard OOo s Web wizard allows you to create several types of standard web pages To use it 1 Choose File gt Wizards gt Web Page On the first page of the Wizard choose settings and click Next If this is your first web page the only choice is lt default gt Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages 313 Web Wizard Introduction This Web Wizard is to aid you in publishing documents on the Internet Documents It will convert the documents so that they can be viewed by a web browser In addition it Will generate a Table of Contents page with links For easy access bo the documents The Web Wizard will also allow you bo customize the design and lawout of your web site You Will be able to keep the documents you have published on the web up to date and add or remove documents at any time Choose settings For the Web Wizard default gt ha 2 Choose or browse to the document you would like to format The Title Summary and Aut
206. e Load Save and Select icons e Tools for drawing a hotspot shape these tools work in exactly the same way as the corresponding tools in the Drawing toolbar e Edit Move Insert Delete Points advanced editing tools to manipulate the Shape of a polygon hotspot Choose the Edit Points tool to activate the other tools e Active icon toggles the status of a selected hotspot between active and inactive e Macro associates a macro with the hotspot instead of just associating an hyperlink e Properties sets the hyperlink properties and adds the Name attribute to the hyperlink Below the toolbar specify for the selected hotspot e Address the address pointed by the hyperlink You can also point to an anchor in a document to do this write the address in this format file lt path gt document name anchor name e Text type the text that you want to be displayed when the mouse pointer is moved over the hotspot e Frame where the target of the hyperlink will open pick among blank opens in a new browser window self opens in the active browser window top or _parent The value self for the target frame will work just fine in the vast majority Tip of occasions It is therefore not recommended to use the other choices unless absolutely necessary Using OO0o s drawing tools You can use Ooo s drawing tools to create graphics such as simple diagrams using rectangles circles lines text and other predefined shapes
207. e added to the list Calc Drag a cell selection to the Styles and Formatting window to create cell styles Draw Impress Select and drag drawing objects to the Styles and Formatting window to create graphics styles Copying and moving styles You can copy or move styles from one template or document into another template or document in two ways e Using the Template Management dialog e Loading styles from a template or document Using the Template Management dialog To copy or move styles using the Template Management dialog 1 Click File gt Templates gt Organize 2 Inthe Template Management dialog Figure 50 set the lists at the bottom to either Templates or Documents as needed The default is Templates on the left and Documents on the right To copy styles from a file that is not open click the File button When Tip you return to this dialog both lists show the selected file as well as all the currently open documents 3 Open the folders and find the templates from and to which you want to copy Double click on the name of the template or document and then double click the Styles icon to show the list of individual styles Figure 51 4 To copy a style hold down the Ctrl key and drag the name of the style from one list to the other Caution If you do not hold down the Control key when dragging the style will be moved from one list to the other The style will be deleted from the list you are dragging it from
208. e and anybody can build a program that interprets these files For this reason ODF is quickly becoming the preferred file format for government agencies schools and other companies who prefer not to be too dependent on a particular software supplier OpenOffice org by default saves documents in Open Document Format OpenOffice org 3 has adopted version 1 2 of the OpenDocument standard OOo can also open and save many other file formats see File formats OOo can open on page 367 File formats OOo can save to on page 369 and Exporting to other formats on page 370 Appendix B Open Source Open Standards OpenDocument 365 OpenDocument filename extensions The most common filename extensions used for OpenDocument documents are odt for word processing text documents ods for spreadsheets odp for presentations odb for databases x odg for graphics vector drawings odf for formulas mathematical equations Frequently asked questions May I distribute OOo to anyone How many computers may I install it on May I sell it May I use OpenOffice org in a business Is OpenOffice available in my language How can you make it for free What if I need technical Support Who owns the software Does that mean that they can take away the software I am writing a software application May I use programming code from OpenOffice org in my program Yes As many as you like
209. e and produce the other tables by cutting and pasting See Creating a table by copying an existing table on page 208 212 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Adding data to the list table List tables do not require a form Instead add their data directly to the table In this example use the names of the two people with a bank card and Cash for cash purchases 1 In the main database window click on the Tables icon Figure 175 In the list of tables right click on Payment Type and select Open from the pop up menu a Enter Dan in the Type column in the first row Press the Tab key to move to the second row Notice that the PaymentID value for this row changes from lt AutoField gt to 0 b Enter Kevin in the second row The PaymentID changes to 1 c Enter Cash in the third row The PaymentID changes to 2 2 Save and close the table window You can also use the Enter key to move from entry field to entry field or use the down arrow key to move from row to row Tip Defining relationships Now that the tables have been created what are the relationships between our tables This is the time to define them based upon the questions we asked and answered in the beginning When on vacation we want to enter all of our expenses all at one time each day Most of these expenses are in the Vacations table but the fuel we buy is not So we will relate these two tables using the Date fields Since the Fuel table may ha
210. e authority Whenever someone changes something in the document this change breaks the digital signature On Windows operating systems the Windows features of validating a signature are used On Solaris and Linux systems files that are supplied by Thunderbird Mozilla or Firefox are used For a more detailed description of how to get and manage a certificate and signature validation see About Digital Signatures in the OOo Help Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 287 To sign a document 1 Choose File gt Digital Signatures 2 If you have not saved the document since the last change a message box appears Click Yes to save the file 3 After saving you see the Digital Signatures dialog Click Add to add a public key to the document 4 In the Select Certificate dialog select your certificate and click OK 5 You see again the Digital Signatures dialog where you can add more certificates if you want Click OK to add the public key to the saved file A signed document shows an icon in the status bar You can double click the icon to view the certificate Removing personal data You may wish to ensure that personal data versions notes hidden information or recorded changes are removed from files before you send them to other people or create PDFs from them In Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Security gt Options you can set OOo to remind warn you when files contain certain information and
211. e called the macro is then called an event handler Full coverage of event handlers is well beyond the scope of this document but a little knowledge can accomplish much Be careful when you configure an event handler For example Caution assume that you write an event handler that is called every time that a key is pressed but you make a mistake so the event is not properly handled One possible result is that your event handler will consume all key presses forcing you to forcibly terminate OpenOffice org Use Tools gt Customize to open the Customize dialog and select the Events tab see Figure 311 The events in the Customize dialog are related to the entire application and specific documents Use the Save In box to choose OpenOffice org or a specific document A common use is to assign the Open Document event to call a specific macro The macro then performs certain setup tasks for the document Select the desired event and click the Macro button to open the Macro Selector dialog see Figure 312 Select the desired macro and click OK to assign the macro to the event The Events tab shows that the event has been assigned to a macro see Figure 313 When the document opens the PrintHello macro is run Many objects in a document can be set to call macros when events occur The most common usage is to add a control such as a button into a document Even double clicking on a graphic opens a dialog with a Macros tab that allows
212. e features Adding and formatting text Many of your slides are likely to contain some text This section gives you some guidelines on how to add text and how to change its appearance Text in slides is contained in text boxes There are two types of text boxes that you can add to a slide e Choose a predefined layout from the Layouts section of the Tasks pane and do not select any special contents type These text boxes are called AutoLayout text boxes e Create a text box using the text tool in the Drawing toolbar Using text boxes created from the Layout pane In Normal view 1 Click in the text box that reads Click to add text Click to add an outline or a Similar notation 2 Type or paste your text in the text box Using text boxes created from the text box tool In Normal view 1 Click on the Text icon T on the Drawing toolbar If the toolbar with the text icon is not visible choose View gt Toolbars gt Drawing 2 Click and drag to draw a box for the text on the slide Do not worry about the vertical size and position the text box will expand if needed as you type 3 Release the mouse button when finished The cursor appears in the text box which is now in edit mode gray hashed border with green resizing handles shown in Figure 144 4 Type or paste your text in the text box 5 Click outside the text box to deselect it Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 159 a 21 Click and drag to draw
213. e for now 6 Click Create A new presentation is created You might want to accept the default values for both Effect and Speed unless you are skilled at doing this Both of these values can be Tip changed later while working with Slide transitions and animations These two features are explained in more detail in Chapter 9 of the Impress Guide If you selected From template on step 1 of the Wizard the Next button Note will be active on step 3 and other pages will be available These pages are not described here Remember to save frequently while working on the presentation to Caution prevent any loss of information should something unexpected occur You might also want to activate the AutoRecovery function A Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General Make sure Save AutoRecovery information every is selected and that you have entered a recovery frequency Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 155 Formatting a presentation A new presentation contains only one empty slide In this section we will start adding new slides and preparing them for the intended contents Inserting slides This can be done in a variety of ways take your pick e Insert gt Slide e Right click on the present slide and select Slide gt New Slide from the pop up menu e Click the Slide icon in the Presentation toolbar Presentation x Slide kal Slide Design Slide Show Sometimes rather than starting from a new slide y
214. e list An active toolbar shows a checkmark beside its name Tear off toolbars are not listed in the View menu Submenus and tear off toolbars Toolbar icons with a small triangle to the right will display submenus tear off toolbars and other ways of selecting things depending on the icon Figure 2 shows a tear off toolbar from the Drawing toolbar The tear off toolbars can be floating or docked along an edge of the screen or in one of the existing toolbar areas To move a floating tear off toolbar drag it by the title bar See Moving toolbars below 18 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Flowchart T x E 2 i p g g T E EE p p g T 5 WASGe v rS To n 7 SV ad wp xe AW P e m S e H P Ag Click here and drag Toolbar tears off and floats Figure 2 Example of a tear off toolbar Moving toolbars To move a docked toolbar place the mouse pointer over the toolbar handle the small vertical bar to the left of the toolbar hold down the left mouse button drag the toolbar to the new location and then release the mouse button Figure 3 To move a floating toolbar click on its title bar and drag it to a new location Figure 4 Handles of docked toolbars fe Untitled 1 OpenOffice org Writer File Edit View Insert Format Table Tools Window Help B BHS a2 a 11 I L fad Default CentSchbook BT Fh Figure 3 Moving a docked toolbar
215. e loaded 14 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Note for Windows users If you have associated Microsoft Office file types with OOo then when you double click on a doc Word file it opens in Writer xls Excel files open in Calc and ppt PowerPoint files open in Impress If you did not associate the file types then when you double click on a Microsoft Word document it opens in Microsoft Word if Word is installed on your computer Excel files open in Excel and PowerPoint files open in PowerPoint You can use another method to open Microsoft Office files in OOo and save in those formats from OOo See Opening an existing document on page 23 for more information Using the Quickstarter under Windows The Quickstarter is an icon that is placed in the Windows system tray during system startup It indicates that OpenOffice org has been loaded and is ready to use The Quickstarter loads library DLL files required by OOo thus shortening the startup time for OOo components by about half If the Quickstarter is disabled see Reactivating the Quickstarter if you want to enable it Using the Quickstarter Icon Right click the Quickstarter icon in the system tray to open a pop up menu Figure 1 from which you can open a new document open the Templates and Documents dialog or choose an existing document to open You can also double click the Quickstarter icon to display the Templates and Documents dialog
216. e located in the header of the HTML document Once you have created the macro in the OpenOffice org Basic IDE it appears in the source text of the HTML document in the header If you want the macro to run automatically when the HTML document is opened choose Tools gt Customize gt Events See Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros for more information Export Display warning When the OpenOffice org Basic option see above is not selected the Display warning option becomes available If the Display warning option is selected then when exporting to HTML a warning is shown that OpenOffice org Basic macros will be lost Export Print layout Select this option to export the print layout of the current document as well The HTML filter supports CSS2 Cascading Style Sheets Level 2 for printing documents These capabilities are only effective if print layout export is activated Export Copy local graphics to Internet Select this option to automatically upload the embedded pictures to the Internet server when uploading using FTP Export Character set Select the appropriate character set for the export 50 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Choosing language settings You may need to do several things to set the language settings to what you want e Install the required dictionaries e Change some locale and language settings e Choose spelling options Install the required dictionaries OOo automatically installs sev
217. e query to calculate the fuel economy 1 Click Create Query in Design View to open a new query 2 Add the Fuel table to the query just as you did in step 2 Add tables But do not close the Add Tables window 3 Add the End Reading query to this query a Click Queries to get the list of queries in the database Add Table or Query C Tables Queries Query_CD Collection Figure 225 Selecting queries to add to another query b Click End Reading c Click Add and then click Close Step 7 Add fields to the table at the bottom of the query We are going to calculate the fuel economy To do this we need the FuelQuantity and distance traveled Since the FuelQuantity we want to use is at the ending odometer reading we will use the End Reading query to get it We will also use the Odometer field from the Fuel table and End Reading query Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 241 Fuel E End Reading dr r FuellD FuellD Date Odometer FuelCost FuelQuantity Coes last Figure 226 Tables in this query 1 Double click FuelQuantity in the End Reading query 2 Double click Odometer in the End Reading query 3 Double click Odometer in the Fuel table Field IFuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading End Reading Fuel Function Criterion Or Figure 227 Added fields to the query Step 8 Enter the FuelID difference field We want the difference between the FuelID value of the F
218. e shapes include rectangles and squares circles ellipses and arcs 3D objects curves lines and arrows text and connectors All shapes in Draw are called objects See the Draw Guide for a complete description of the shapes available When you draw a basic shape or select one for editing the Info field at Note the left side in the status bar changes to reflect the present action Line created Text frame xxyy selected and so on Figure 160 shows part of the Drawing toolbar with the icons needed in the following sections The Text icon is also included M m T n Figure 160 Part of the Drawing toolbar Drawing a straight line Click on the Line icon on the Drawing toolbar and position the mouse pointer where you want to start the line Drag the mouse while keeping the button pressed Release the mouse button at the point where you want to end the line A selection handle appears at each end of the line showing that this is the currently selected object Figure 161 Drawing a straight line To restrict the angle of the line to a multiple of 45 degrees 0 45 90 135 and so on hold down the Shift key while you draw the line To snap the end of the line to the nearest grid point hold down the Control Ctrl key pressed while drawing the line The effect of the Ctrl key depends on the settings of the Snap to Grid option on the View gt Grid menu Snap to Grid on Ctrl deactivates the snap option for this activity
219. e spreadsheet are populated with data from the row you selected and the Form Navigation toolbar appears at the bottom of the spreadsheet 3A Record 2 of 2 Cu gt Do Figure 215 Navigation arrows of a form 9 Click the arrows on the Form Navigation toolbar to view the different records of the table The arrows are circled in red The number in the box changes when you change the record number by clicking an arrow The data in the fields changes correspondingly to the data for that particular record number Entering data in a form Records are used to organize the data we enter into a form They also organize the data we enter into a subform Fach type of field allows a different method to enter the data In many if not all cases more than one method can be used The first step to entering data in a form is to open it from the main database window Figure 175 1 Click the Forms icon in the Database list 2 Find the form s name in the Forms list Vacations 3 Double click the form s name The quickest way to enter a date in the Date field is to click the arrow that opens the dropdown calendar Then click the day the you want Then press the Tab key to go to the Odometer field q September 2008 p SMTWTFS 123 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 190 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 26 29 30 Today None Figure 216 Calendar dropdown Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 235 The Odometer Tolls and Motel fields
220. e still your entire file Closing OpenOffice org To close OOo completely choose File gt Exit or close the last open document as described in Closing a document above If all the documents have been saved OOo closes immediately If any documents have been modified but not saved a warning message appears Follow the procedure in Closing a document to save or discard your changes Using OpenOffice org on a Mac Some keystrokes and menu items are different on a Mac from those used in Windows and Linux The following table gives some common substitutions for the instructions in this book For a more detailed list see the application Help Tools gt Options OpenOffice org gt Access setup options menu selection Preferences Right click Control click Open context menu Ctrl Control 3s Command Used with other keys F5 Shift F5 Open the Navigator F11 T Open the Styles and Formatting window 30 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 m OpenOffice org 3 Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org Choosing Options to Suit the Way You Work Choosing options for all of OOo This section covers some of the settings that apply to all the components of OpenOffice org For information on settings not discussed here see the online help Click Tools gt Options The list in the left hand box of the Options OpenOffice org dialog varies depending on which component of OOo is open The illustra
221. e text continues from the left hand column to the right hand column and then to the next page all in sequence also known as snaking columns of text use page styles with two columns If the title of the document on the first page is full page width put it in a single column Basic layout section is in two columns 94 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 For a newsletter with complex layout two or three columns on the page and some articles that continue from one page to some place several pages later use page styles for basic layout Place articles in linked frames and anchor graphics to fixed positions on the This frame is page if necessary a oa a tye authors For a document with terms and translations to appear side by side in what appear to be columns use a table to keep items lined up and so you can type in both columns This is a borderless table Each pair of words is in a Separate cell of the table Ce ERLEEL eepe LYLE HU oe Pe oe oe Pa ae se ae a az Pas arn arasa mra a ae a arat ara mre ms fe ee De tes E imar drn Amn damre je Aaj oe Aj i Amm dart daf e Eme Jamal Creating headers and footers A header is an area that appears at the top of a page A footer appears at the bottom of the page Information such as page numbers inserted into a header or footer displays on every page of the document with that page style To
222. e the word page and a space then insert the page number as above 2 Press the spacebar once type the word of and a space then choose Insert gt Fields gt Page Count The Page Count field inserts the total number of pages in the document as shown on the Statistics tab of the document s Properties window File gt Properties If you restart page numbering anywhere in the document then the total page count may not be what you want See Chapter 4 Formatting Pages in the Writer Guide for more information Note Restarting page numbering Often you will want to restart the page numbering at 1 for example on the page following a title page or a table of contents In addition many documents have the front matter such as the table of contents numbered with Roman numerals and the main body of the document numbered in Arabic numerals starting with 1 You can restart page numbering in two ways Method 1 1 Place the cursor in the first paragraph of the new page 2 Choose Format gt Paragraph 3 On the Text Flow tab of the Paragraph dialog Figure 81 select Breaks 4 Select Insert and then With Page Style and specify the page style to use 5 Specify the page number to start from and then click OK Method 1 is also useful for numbering the first page of a document with a page number greater than 1 For example you may be writing a book with each chapter in a separate file Chapter 1 may start with page 1
223. eate it Notes view Use the Notes view to add notes to a slide 1 Click the Notes tab in the Workspace 2 Select the slide to which you want to add notes e Click the slide in the Slides pane or Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 149 e Double click the slide s name in the Navigator 3 In the text box below the slide click on the words Click to add notes and begin typing You can resize the Notes text box using the green resizing handles which appear when you click on the edge of the box You can also move the box by placing the pointer on the border then clicking and dragging To make changes in the text style press the F11 key to open the Styles and Formatting window Normal Qutine Motes Handout Slide Sorter Figure 134 Notes view Handout view Handout view is for setting up the layout of your slide for a printed handout Click the Handout tab in the workspace then choose Layouts in the Tasks pane You can then choose to print 1 2 3 4 6 or 9 slides per page v Layouts Figure 135 Handout layouts Use this view also to customize the information printed on the handout Refer to Chapter 10 of the Impress Guide for instructions on printing slides handouts and notes Select from the main menu Insert gt Page Number or Insert gt Date and Time and in the dialog box that opens click on the Notes and Handouts tab see Figure 136 150 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Use this
224. ecify which items are visible and the colors used to display various items Color scheme Scheme OpenOffice org SAVE Custom colors On User interface elements Color setting Preview General F Document background C Automatic 7 E T Tet bound Cane Application background 7 Objet boundaries Cane Table boundaries jont colo Cromail iy E a O M 4 Figure 31 Showing or hiding text object and table boundaries Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 43 e To show or hide items such as text boundaries select or deselect the options next to the names of the items e To change the default colors for items click the down arrow in the Color Setting column by the name of the item and select a color from the pop up box e To save your color changes as a color scheme click Save type a name in the Scheme box then click OK Accessibility options Accessibility options include whether to allow animated graphics or text how long help tips remain showing some options for high contrast display and a way to change the font for the user interface of the OpenOffice org program Accessibility support relies on Sun Microsystems Java technology for communications with assistive technology tools See Java options below The Support assistive technology tools option is not shown on all OOo installations See Assistive Tools in OpenOffice org in the Help for other requirements and information Select or d
225. ecorded canel e Figure 301 Give your module a meaningful name 6 Highlight the newly created module In the upper left corner type the macro name to use such as EnterMyname and then click Save to save the macro If you followed all of the steps the Standard library now contains a module named Recorded which contains the EnterMyName macro as shown in Figure 302 When OOo creates a new module it automatically adds the macro named Main Running the macro Use Tools gt Macros gt Run Macro to open the Macro Selector dialog Select the newly created macro and click Run Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 325 Select the library that contains the macro you want Then select the macro under Macro name Library Macro name Pitonyak EqgenterMyName Run l PitonyakDatabase Main PitonyakUtil Cancel Readability RemoveFormattin Help Schedule ScriptBindingLibra Standard Modulel Template Tools ArayDyn iS a Description BREE eee amp amp m HEE lalale Figure 302 Select your macro and click Run There are other methods to run a macro For example use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic to open the macro organizer which contains a Run button as well Another method is to use the macro organizer the dialog usually opens faster but the selection process may be slightly slower Viewing and editing the macro You can view a
226. ecutive hyphens Figure 79 Turning on automatic hyphenation Turning on hyphenation for the Default paragraph style affects all other paragraph styles that are based on Default You can individually change other styles so that hyphenation is not active for example you might not want headings to be hyphenated Any styles that are not based on Default are not affected See Chapter 3 Styles and Templates for more about styles based on other styles Note You can also set hyphenation choices through Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Writing Aids In Options near the bottom of the dialog scroll down to find the hyphenation settings Options Characters before line break 2 Characters after line break 2 Hyphenate without inquiry Hyphenate special regions Figure 80 Setting hyphenation options To change the minimum number of characters for hyphenation the minimum number of characters before a line break or the minimum number of characters after a line break select the item and then click the Edit button in the Options section Hyphenation options set on the Writing Aids dialog are effective only if hyphenation is turned on through paragraph styles Manual hyphenation To manually hyphenate words do not use a normal hyphen which will remain visible even if the word is no longer at the end of a line when you add or delete text or change margins or font size Instead use a conditional hyphen which is
227. ed in terms of unions and intersections of the subsets tables To explain how to use a database we will create one for automobile expenses In the process we will be explaining how a database works Planning a database The first step in creating a database is to ask yourself many questions Write them down and leave some space between the questions to later write the answers At least some of the answers should seem obvious after you take some time to think You may have to go through this process a few times before everything becomes clear in your mind and on paper Using a text document for these questions and answers makes it easier to move the questions around add additional questions or change the answers Here are some of the questions and answers I developed before I created a database for automobile expenses I had an idea of what I wanted before I started but as I began asking questions and listing the answers I discovered that I needed additional tables and fields What are the fields going to be My expenses divided into three broad areas fuel purchases maintenance and vacations The annual cost for the car s license plate and driver s license every four years did not fit into any of these It will be a table of its own license fees What fields fit the fuel purchases area Date purchased odometer reading fuel cost fuel quantity and payment method fit Fuel economy can be calculated with a query What fie
228. een appearance of text Enter the smallest font size to apply anti aliasing Menu icons in menus Causes icons as well as words to be visible in menus Font Lists Show preview of fonts Causes the font list to look like Figure 23 Left with the font names shown as an example of the font with the option deselected the font list shows only the font names not their formatting Figure 23 Right The fonts you will see listed are those that are installed on your system Bitstream Vera Sans u w BI d Bitstream Vera Sans 11 AtArial i f Al Arial Black AT Arial Narrow AtAvantGarde Bk BT AtAvaniGarde Md BI Al BakerSienet BT Figure 23 Font list Left With preview Right Without preview Bitstream Vera Sans Bitstream Vera Sans Mono Bitstream Vera Serif Font Lists Show font history Causes the last five fonts you have assigned to the current document are displayed at the top of the font list Otherwise fonts are shown in alphabetical order Graphics output Use hardware acceleration Directly accesses hardware features of the graphical display adapter to improve the screen display Not supported on all operating systems and OOo distributions Graphics output Use anti aliasing Enables and disables anti aliasing which makes the display of most graphical objects look smoother and with fewer artifacts Not supported on all operating systems and OOo distributions Press Shift Control R to restore or refresh the view
229. eleting 118 freezing 120 inserting 117 selecting 116 rulers Draw 176 S Save as web page 311 save AutoRecovery information 47 Save original Basic code 48 Save relative URLs 47 saving files 24 scaling factor user interface 35 scanner 292 screen font antialiasing 36 security 24 security options 41 selecting nonconsecutive items 82 vertical block of text 83 selecting objects 190 selection clipboard 37 selection lists Calc 127 selection modes 189 selection in Calc cells 115 columns 116 rows 116 Sheets 116 send backward 190 send document as e mail 284 sequence of styles automatic 75 setup options 32 Shadows 195 Shapes Draw 187 Shared extension 355 Sheet tabs Calc 109 Sheets in Calc deleting 119 inserting 1138 renaming 119 selecting 116 Shortcut keys 358 size optimization 47 Slanting an object 192 Slide Design dialog 168 Slide elements modifying 158 Slide master 166 adding text 169 apply 167 author information 171 Creating 167 description 166 loading additional 168 modifying 169 Slide show automatically advance 172 See presentation 145 transitions 172 Slide show modifying 159 Slide Sorter view Impress 151 Slides adding charts 165 adding comments 171 adding graphics spreadsheets other objects 165 adding media clips 165 Index 377 adding pictures 163 adding tables 164 adding text 158 layouts 156 master 166 modifying 158 rename 153 Slides pane Impress 146 Snap functions 179
230. enOffice org 3 3 To limit the size of the presentation file you may want to minimize the number of slide masters used Tip Modifying a slide master The following items can be changed on a slide master e Background color gradient hatching or bitmap e Background objects for example add a logo or decorative graphics e Size placement and contents of header and footer elements to appear on every slide e Size and placement of default frames for slide titles and content Before working on the slide master make sure that the Styles and Formatting window is open To select the slide master for modification 1 Select View gt Master gt Slide Master from the menu bar This unlocks the properties of the slide master so you can edit it 2 Click Master Pages in the Tasks pane This gives you access to the pre packaged slide masters 3 Click on the slide master you want to modify among the ones available Figure 146 4 Make changes as required then click the Close Master View icon on the Master View toolbar For details see Chapter 2 of the Impress Guide 5 Save the file before continuing Any changes made to one slide when in Master View mode will appear Caution on all slides using this slide master Always make sure you close Master View and return to Normal view before working on any of the A presentation slides Select View gt Normal from the menu bar or click Close Master View in the Master View toolbar to return
231. end commands back to the UI User Interface For example after saving the document the File Save command is disabled As soon as the document has been changed the File Save command is enabled If we see a dispatch command it is text such as uno InsertObject or uno GoToStartOfLine The command is sent to the document s frame and the frame passes on the command until an object is found that can handle the command How the macro recorder uses the dispatch framework The macro recorder records the generated dispatches The recorder is relatively simple to implement and the same commands that are issued are recorded for later use The problem is that not all dispatched commands are complete For example inserting an object generates the following code dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertObject 0 Array It is not possible to specify what kind of object to create or insert If an object is inserted from a file you cannot specify which file to insert I recorded a macro and used Tools gt Options to open and modify configuration items The generated macro does not record any configuration changes in fact the generated code is commented so it will not even be run rem dispatcher executeDispatch document uno OptionsTreeDialog 0 Array If a dialog is opened the command to open the dialog is likely to be generated Any work done inside the dialog is not usually recorded Examples include macro
232. ent Exit Sub End If REM Get the view cursor from the current controller oCurs oDoc currentController getViewCursor REM Move the cursor to the end of the document oCurs gotoEnd False REM Insert text Hello at the end of the document oCurs Text insertString oCurs Hello False End Sub Finding more information Numerous resources are available that provide help with writing macros Use Help gt OpenOffice org Help to open the OOo help pages The upper left corner of the OOo help system contains a drop down list that determines which help set is displayed To view the help for Basic choose OpenOffice org Basic from this list Included material Many excellent macros are included with OOo Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic to open the Macro dialog Expand the Tools library in the OpenOffice org library container Inspect the Debug module some good examples include WritedbgInfo document and printdbgInfo sheet Online resources The following links and references contain information regarding macro programming http user services openoffice org OOo forums well supported http api openoffice org docs common ref com sun star module ix html official IDL reference here you ll find almost every command with a description http wiki services openoffice org wiki Documentation BASIC Guide official OpenOffice org BASIC Programming Guide http wiki services openoffice org wiki
233. ents OpenOf Published drafts Title Type Size Date modified E 010165 WhatIsoona odt OpenDocument Text 259 1 EB 02 08 2005 17 01 56 E 010265 StartingoOd adt OpenDocument Text 437 4 KE 19 07 2005 20 45 00 E 010365 FileManagement odt OpenDocument Text 450 9 KE 30 09 2005 10 42 5 E 010465 Menus4ndToolbars od OpenDocument Text 305 6 KE 19 07 2005 20 40 2 ai 010555 SettinglpOte odt OpenDocument Text S62 5KB OF I082005 08 09 28 01065 GettingStartedwithwr OpenDocument Text 1 66 ME 21 07 2005 15 39 5 010765 GettingStartedWwithCal OpenDocument Text 691 4KB 19 07 2005 19 45 54 File name 010365 FileManagement File type OpenDocument Text odt OpenDocument Text odt OpenDocument Text Template otk l OpenGffice arg 1 0 Text Document sx Save with passwo OpenOfFice arg 1 0 Text Document Template C stw Microsoft Word 97200078P doc Microsoft Word 95 doc Microsoft Word 6 0 doc Rich Text Format rth Starwriter 5 0 sd Starwriter 5 0 Template tvor Figure 12 The OpenOffice org Save As dialog The three buttons in the top right of the OOo Open and Save As dialogs are from left to right e Go Up One Level in the folder directory hierarchy Click and hold this button for a second to drop down a list of higher level folders to go to one of the folders on the list move the mouse pointer over its name and release the mouse button e Create New Folder e Default Directory For OOo documents that
234. eous Number NUMERIC misc costs MPayment Text VARCHAR payment type for motel MiscNotes Memo LONGVARCHE a MiscPayment Text VARCHAR payment type for miscellaneous Figure 181 Fields in Vacations table Creating tables for the list box When the same information can be used in several fields design a table for each type of information Each table will contain two fields the information field and JD in that order You must create these tables with the information field listed first and the ID field listed last Failure to do so will produce the wrong results Caution For my Payment table I use Name and ID as my fields with Dan Kevin and Cash being the Name entries The corresponding ID entries are 0 1 2 When the Name field is listed first in the table one of the three names will appear in the payment field of the Fuel table If the ID field is listed first 0 1 or 2 appear in the payment field instead 1 Follow the directions in Creating tables in Design View on page 209 In the table the two fields can be Type and PaymentlID In the Field Properties set AutoValue to Yes for the PaymentID field Set the PaymentID field as the primary key See Figure 182 2 Save the table using the name Payment Type Field Name Field Type ype Text VARCHAR PaymentiD Integer INTEGER Figure 182 Table in Design View If you have several tables to create with the same fields design one table Not
235. equires the name of the table which contains the field Single word table names do not require quotation marks but multiple word table names do e Repeat these steps for the payment fields for Lunch Supper Motel Snacks and Misc The main form should look like Figure 201 as far as where the controls are located It also shows what the Note control should look like Those changes are explained in the next step e Close the Properties window Figure 201 Position of controls in main form Step 7 Change the Misc Notes field We want the Misc Notes control which has a field type of Memo to have a vertical scrollbar for additional text space if desired 1 Control click the Misc Notes field The green handles should surround the field but not its label 224 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 2 Click the Control icon to open the Properties window Figure 202 3 Scroll down to the Scrollbars setting Change the selection from None to Vertical in this dropdown list General Data Events Background color __ 0x0ODDDDDD A Border cccccssssceseeess 3D look Text typ ccccseese Multi line Text lines end with LF Unix nd Serollbars Verica None Horizontal Hide selection Additional information Both Help TEXT ettteesseeees Halip 9 Soeoeeeereea ier aes Figure 202 Scrollbar selections in the Prope
236. er print them save them and work with them in other ways If you are using a Unix or Linux based operating system including Mac OS X an additional page of E mail options is available where you can specify the e mail program to use when you send the current document as e mail Under Windows the operating system s default e mail program is always used Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org J3 S Options Internet E mail rx OpenOffice or parma i Sending documents as e mail attachments Language Settings OpenOffice org Base E mail program thunderbird Charts Internet Proxy Search E mail Browser Plug in Figure 44 Internet options showing E mail page available to Linux users qvvvvye Controlling OOo s AutoCorrect functions Some people find some or all of the items in OOo s AutoCorrect function annoying because they change what you type when you do not want it changed Many people find some of the AutoCorrect functions quite helpful if you do then select the relevant options But if you find unexplained changes appearing in your document this is a good place to look to find the cause To open the AutoCorrect dialog click Tools gt AutoCorrect Options You need to have a document open for this menu item to appear In Writer this dialog has five tabs as shown in Figure 45 In other components of OOo the dialog has only four tabs AutoCorrect Replacements and exceptions for language English
237. er below this table right click and select Paste The Copy table dialog opens Change the table name to Pop and click Next Click the gt gt button to move all the fields from the left box to the right box and click Next Since all the fields already have the proper Field type no changes should be needed However this is the time and place to make any changes if they are 208 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 needed See Caution below for the reason why Click Create The new table is created Caution A Once tables have been created using the wizard and data has been entered editing them should be very limited Fields can be added or deleted but adding a field requires taking the time to enter the data for that one field for every record having an entry for that field Deleting a field deletes all the data once contained in that field Changing the field type of a field can lead to data being lost either partially or completely When creating a new table it pays to create the fields with the correct names length and format before you add any data Deleting a table removes all of the data contained in every field of the table Unless you are sure do not delete a table Creating tables in Design View Design View is a more advanced method for creating a new table in which you directly enter information about each field in the table We will use this method for the tables of our database Note While t
238. eral dictionaries with the program To add other dictionaries be sure you are connected to the Internet and then use Tools gt Language gt More Dictionaries Online OOo will open your default web browser to a page containing links to additional dictionaries that you can install Follow the prompts to select and install the ones you want Change locale and language settings You can change some details of the locale and language settings that OOo uses for all documents or for specific documents In the Options dialog click Language Settings gt Languages Options Language Settings OpenOffice org b Load Save Language Settings Language Settings Languages Writing Aids b OpenOffice org Base This is where you make settings b Charts with OpenOffice org b Internet Figure 40 Language Setting Options On the right hand side of the Language Settings Languages page change the User interface Locale setting Default currency and Default languages for documents as required In the example English UK has been chosen for all the appropriate settings If you want the language dictionary setting to apply to the current document only instead of being the default for all new documents select the option labelled For the current document only Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 51 Lanquage of User interface Default English USA Locale setting Default English USA Decimal separator key W
239. ercent Currency Date Time 01234 Options Decimal places E Negative numbers red L Thousands separator Format code gogoo User defined Figure 107 Adjusting leading zeros Entering text Click in the cell and type the text Text is left aligned by default Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 123 Entering numbers as text A number can be entered as text to preserve a leading zero by entering an apostrophe before the number like this 01481 The data is now regarded as text by Calc and displayed exactly as entered Typically formulas will treat the entry as a zero and functions will ignore it Take care that the cell containing the number is not used in a formula If smart quotes are used for apostrophes the apostrophe remains visible in the cell Note To choose the type of apostrophe use Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Custom Quotes The selection of the apostrophe type affects both Calc and Writer Entering dates and times Select the cell and type the date or time You can separate the date elements with a Slant or a hyphen or use text such as 10 Oct 03 Calc recognizes a variety of date formats You can separate time elements with colons such as 10 43 45 Deactivating automatic changes Calc automatically applies many changes during data input unless you deactivate those changes You can also immediately undo any automatic changes with Ctrl Z AutoCorrect changes Aut
240. erge letter A Shop stock list could be a data source managed through OOo OpenOffice org uses the terms Data Source and Database to refer to Note the same thing which could be a database such as MySQL or dBase ora spreadsheet or text document holding data This chapter covers creating a database showing what is contained in a database and how the different parts are used by OOo It also covers using the Base component of OOo to register other data sources A data source can be a database spreadsheet or text document OOo Base uses the HSQL database engine All of the files created by this Note engine are kept in one zipped file The database forms are included in this zipped file A database consists of a number of fields that contain the individual pieces of data Fach table of the database is a group of fields When creating a table you also determine the characteristics of each field in the table Forms are for data entry into the fields of one or more tables associated with the form They can also be used for viewing fields from one or more tables associated with the form A query creates a new table from the existing tables based upon how you create the query A report organizes the information of the fields of a query in a document according to your requirements The database in OOo requires Java Runtime Environment JRE If you do not have it on your computer you can download it from www java com Caution and install i
241. errdeasnenvendivanrnnenssx 355 Adding functionality with EXtensSiOns cccccecececescececececenceceeneesececesenseceeseesensen 355 Appendix A PDT a O a EEA E TA ee eeeeone en 358 pr aaa Sia ate ee nes eet eters EIN ESIE E EASI E S E T OEE TEET TA 359 General keyboard SROrtOUTS ene ne ninani ri EE a 360 Denning keypoard SNOriCUtS essrrairiiri n EE E EAEE 362 Poro CO e rN EE A EE 362 Appendix B Open Source Open Standards OpenDocument ceessesssesseesseerereessecesessseeereeeseees 363 Pug 016 E A nn re ner ee Ter en ee ee enn ee eer ree eee eT a ey eee 364 A short history OF OpenOffice Org eeessssssresreesresseessersseesseesseessersseresseereeeeseseeeee 364 The Oponice org communi eee AE 364 How is OpenOffice org NECN SC 8 icdeecin sci csdwascrsnacansezeraness inenadaberteeebenacneeadeoacmancianss 364 Whal is open SOUrCE P orriei ann arn ee eter Rao eT Teen nn One en ery na 365 What are open StLANGATOS 7 isisccnsccaisccssentsadeasveyaeraoersensssiasengacimveneesscanaaraneneaeranan sees 365 Wiar a LOCU oeeie eae tein EEEE EEE EEEE 365 Frequently asked QUeCStIONS cccccccececececencecececeesececenensesecenseseceeeeseeseeseesentensen 366 File formats OOo can ope n sssssesssesssseesoossossessoosssesssoesssorssssssssosesssessssssooseeeese 367 BR OTC aE T aa 369 Eoo OOT oi ade gee EAE EEEE OTETTA 370 Iai al eerste ETE A SIES PET EERE FEIIET ES AA AI AETA E TE ETIE E A 371 Getting Started with OpenOff
242. ersions of Microsoft Word files It also connects to your email client Calc spreadsheet Calc has all of the advanced analysis charting and decision making features expected from a high end spreadsheet It includes over 300 functions for financial Statistical and mathematical operations among others The Scenario Manager provides what if analysis Calc generates 2 D and 3 D charts which can be integrated into other OOo documents You can also open and work with Microsoft Excel workbooks and save them in Excel format Calc can export spreadsheets to Adobe s PDF and to HTML Impress presentations Impress provides all the common multimedia presentation tools such as special effects animation and drawing tools It is integrated with the advanced graphics capabilities of OOo s Draw and Math components Slide shows can be further enhanced with Fontwork s special effects text as well as sound and video clips Impress is compatible with Microsoft s PowerPoint file format and can also save your work in numerous graphics formats including Macromedia Flash SWF Draw vector graphics Draw is a vector drawing tool that can produce everything from simple diagrams or flowcharts to 3 D artwork Its Smart Connectors feature allows you to define your 10 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 own connection points You can use Draw to create drawings for use in any of OOo s other components and you can create your own
243. es View Outline prints the title and headings of each slide in outline format To print handouts notes or outlines 1 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 2 In the Print section of the Print dialog select the required option 3 For Handouts you can then choose how many slides to print per page and the order in which they are printed 4 Click the Print button Range and copies All slides Number of copies n Slides 1 5 Selection Collate AA ee Print eer Slides per page Default w Order Left to right then down w Printing a brochure In Writer Impress and Draw you can print a document with two pages on each side of a sheet of paper arranged so that when the printed pages are folded in half the pages are in the correct order to form a booklet or brochure Ti Plan your document so it will look good when printed half size choose Ip appropriate margins font sizes and so on You may need to experiment 274 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 To print a brochure on a single sided printer 1 Choose File gt Print 2 Inthe Print dialog click Properties 3 Check the printer is set to the same orientation portrait or landscape as specified in the page setup for your document Usually the orientation does not matter but it does for brochures Click OK to return to the Print dialog 4 Select the Page layout tab in the Print dialog 5 Select the Brochure option 6 In the
244. es wizards and the HSQLDB database engine require that the Java Runtime Environment JRE 1 5 x or higher be installed on your computer Although OOo will work without Java support some features will not be available You can download OOo for some operating systems with or without JRE included If you have a slow machine and do not often need the features requiring JRE you can try to disable it to speed up the loading of the program For a more detailed and up to date listing of requirements see the OpenOffice org website http www openoffice org dev docs source sys reqs 30 html How to get the software Many new computers come with OpenOffice org installed In addition most Linux distributions such as Ubuntu include OpenOffice org If you need to install it yourself you can download the installation package from the project s home page or by using a Peer to Peer client such as BitTorrent Instructions for BitTorrent are here http distribution openoffice org p2p The installation package is approximately 150MB People with slow Internet connections may prefer to purchase a copy on a CD or DVD from a third party distributor The project maintains a list of distributors but the distributors are not 12 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 connected with nor endorsed by OpenOffice org http distribution openoffice org cdrom sellers html How to install the software Information on installing and setting up OpenOff
245. es of slides or selections of slides for printing Range and copies All slides Number of copies n E O Slides 1 5 l a Selection Collate Sa Sa Print Document Slides per page Devat Order Left to right then down Printing an individual slide 1 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 2 Select the slide to print a In the Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog select the Slides option b Enter the number of the slide to print 3 Click the Print button Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 273 Printing a range of pages 1 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 2 Select the slides to print a In the Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog select the Slides option b Enter the number of the slides to print for example 1 4 or 1 3 7 11 3 Click the Print button Printing a selection of a slide or a selection from multiple slides 1 In the document select the section of the slide to print 2 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 3 Select the Selection option in the Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog 4 Click the Print button Printing handouts notes or outlines in Impress Handouts prints the slides in reduced size on the page from one to nine slides per page The slides can be printed horizontally landscape orientation or vertically portrait orientation on the page Notes prints a single slide per page with any notes entered for that slide in Not
246. es will be made to these as well Replace all the fields whose label ends in Payment with a list box containing the entries from the Payment Type table Lengthen the Note field vertically add a scroll bar and move it Make changes in the Date and PaymentType columns of the subform that are Similar to the changes in the main form Add headings for each group in the main form Change the background to a picture then modify some of the labels so that they can be read clearly Change the font color of the headings Here are some methods that we will be using in these steps The controls in the main form consists of a label and its field Sometimes we want to work with the entire control other times we want to work with only the label or the field and there are times when we want to work with a group of controls Clicking a label or field selects the entire control A border appears around the control with eight green handles You can then drag and drop it where you want D o o Figure 191 A selected control Control click a label or field selects only the label or the field You can press the Tab key to change the selection from the field to the label or the label to the field Tolls o E Figure 192 Selecting a field of a control Moving a group of controls is almost as easy as moving one of them 1 Click the field of the top left control to be moved to select it 2 Move the cursor to just above and to the left of the selected
247. eselect the options as required Miscellaneous options Use text selection cursor in read only text documents 7 Allov animated graphics Allow animated text v Help tips disappear after 4 seconds Options for high contrast appearance Automatically detect high contrast mode of operating system Use automatic font color for screen display v Use system colors for page previews Figure 32 Choosing accessibility options Java options If you install or update a Java Runtime Environment JRE after you install OpenOffice org or if you have more than one JRE installed on your computer you can use the OpenOffice org Java options page to choose the JRE for OOo to use If you are a system administrator programmer or other person who customizes JRE installations you can use the Parameters and Class Path pages reached from the Java page to specify this information If you do not see anything listed in the middle of the page wait a few minutes while OOo searches for JREs on the hard disk If OOo finds one or more JREs it will display them there You can then select the Use a Java runtime environment option and if necessary choose one of the JREs listed 44 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Java options Use a Java runtime environment Java runtime environments JRE already installed Vendor Version Features Sd Sun Microsystems Inc 1 6 0 21 Sun Microsystems Inc 1 6 0_18 Paramete
248. esentation or you may want to add to your presentation a slide from a different presentation based on a template available on the hard disk The Slide Design dialog makes this possible Access this dialog either from the menu bar Format gt Slide design or by right clicking on a slide in the Slides pane The main window in the dialog shows the slide masters already available for use To add more 1 Click the Load button 2 Select in the new dialog the template containing the slide master Click OK 3 Click OK again to close the slide design dialog The slide masters in the template you selected are now shown also in the Master Pages section of the Tasks pane in the Available for use subsection 5 Slide Design E3 Select a slide design Cancel Help Default Exchange background page Load CI Delete unused backgrounds Load Slide Design Ea Categories Templates My Templates introducing a New Product MediaWiki Recommendation of a Strategy Presentation Backgrounds Presentations Figure 147 Loading slide masters from a presentation template The slide masters you have loaded will also be available the next time you load the presentation If you want to delete the unused slide Note masters click the corresponding checkbox in the Slide Design dialog Due to a bug if the slide master was not used in the presentation it is removed from the list of available slide masters anyway 168 Getting Started with Op
249. ess 165 Working with slide masters and styles A slide master is a slide that is used as the starting point for other slides It is similar to a page style in Writer it controls the basic formatting of all slides based on it A Slide show can have more than one slide master OOo uses three terms for a slide that is used to create other slides Note master slide slide master and master page This book uses the term slide master except when describing the user interface A slide master has a defined set of characteristics including the background color graphic or gradient objects such as logos decorative lines and other graphics in the background headers and footers placement and size of text frames and the formatting of text Styles All of the characteristics of slide masters are controlled by styles The styles of any new slide you create are inherited from the slide master from which it was created In other words the styles of the slide master are available and applied to all slides created from that slide master Changing a style in a slide master results in changes to all the slides based on that slide master but you can modify individual slides without affecting the slide master Slide masters have two types of styles associated with them presentation styles and graphic styles The prepackaged presentation styles can be modified but new presentation styles cannot be created In the case of graphic styles you can modif
250. ew format is now available in the Format list in the AutoFormat dialog Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 133 Formatting spreadsheets using themes Calc comes with a predefined set of formatting themes that you can apply to your spreadsheets It is not possible to add themes to Calc and they cannot be modified However you can modify their styles after you apply them to a spreadsheet To apply a theme to a spreadsheet 1 Click the Choose Themes icon in the Tools toolbar If this toolbar is not visible you can show it using View gt Toolbars gt Tools The Theme Selection dialog appears This dialog lists the available themes for the whole spreadsheet Tools X 2 In the Theme Selection dialog select the theme that you want to apply to the spreadsheet As soon as you select a theme some of the properties of the custom styles are applied to the open spreadsheet and are immediately visible 3 Click OK If you wish you can now go to the Styles and Formatting window to modify specific styles These modifications do not change the theme they only change the appearance of this specific spreadsheet document Using conditional formatting You can set up cell formats to change depending on conditions that you specify For example in a table of numbers you can show all the values above the average in green and all those below the average in red Conditional formatting depends upon the use of styles and the AutoCalcula
251. ey have no effect on an object s border Customizing line and arrow styles You can modify the line and arrow styles and create your own See Chapter 4 Changing Object Attributes in the Draw Guide for details Editing the inside fill of an object The OpenOffice org term for the inside of an object is Area fill The area fill of an object can be a uniform color a gradient a hatching or an image It can be made partly or fully transparent and can throw a shadow In most cases you will choose one of the standard fill options which are all available from the Line and Filling toolbar You can also define your own area fills see Chapter 4 of the Draw Guide for details 194 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Adding a shadow In Draw shadows are considered as an area property Click on the Shadow icon on the Line and Filling toolbar You can customize the position distance color and transparency of shadows by using Format gt Area gt Shadow or by right clicking on the selected object and choosing Area gt Shadow Adding transparency You can make objects partly or fully transparent or even with a varying degree of transparency as a gradient Using styles Suppose that you want to apply the same area fill line thickness and border to a set of objects This repetitive process can be greatly s
252. f you type in references to other parts of the document those references can easily get out of date if you reword a heading add or remove figures or reorganize topics Replace any typed cross references with automatic ones and when you update fields all the references will update automatically to show the current wording or page 102 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 numbers The Cross references tab of the Fields dialog lists some items such as headings bookmarks figures tables and numbered items such as steps ina procedure You can also create your own reference items see Setting References in Chapter 14 Working with Fields in the Writer Guide for instructions To insert a cross reference to a heading figure bookmark or other item 1 In your document place the cursor where you want the cross reference to appear 2 Ifthe Fields dialog is not open click Insert gt Cross reference On the Cross references tab in the Type list select the type of item to be referenced for example Heading or Figure You can leave this page open while you insert many cross references Document Cross references Functions Doclinformation Variables Database Type selection set Reference Preface Insert Reference Why use OpenOffice org Headings What do you need to do first Numbered Paragraphs Other sources of information Table Acknowledgments ChapterNumber 1 Introduction to Writer Figure The Writer workspace Boo
253. fault setting And since music has artists set Entry Required to Yes e Date Purchased Field type default date setting Entry required should be No You may not know the date e Format Only change the Entry Required setting from No to Yes e Notes No changes are required e NumberofTracks Change the Field Type to Tiny Integer TINYINT Your allowable number of tracks will be 999 Small Integer SMALLINT would allow 99999 tracks if you needed more than 999 tracks e Photo Use the default settings When you have finished click Next Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 207 Note Fach field has a Field Type which must be specified Types include text integer date and decimal If the field is going to have general information in it for example a name or a description use text If the field will always contain a number for example a price the type should be decimal or another numerical field The wizard picks the right field type so to get an idea of how this works see what the wizard has chosen for different fields Step 3 Set primary key 1 2 3 4 5 Create a primary key should be checked Select option Use an existing field as a primary key In the Fieldname dropdown list select CollectionID Check Auto value if it is not already checked Click Next A primary key uniquely identifies an item or record in the table For example you might know two people called Randy Herring or three
254. fice Assistant Microsoft 33 online update options 45 OOo Macro Organizer dialog 324 Open and Save As dialogs 25 Open Source Initiative OSI 363 364 Open Save dialogs 34 OpenDocument Format 12 47 opening a document 23 OpenOffice org Basic Macros dialog 323 Options Bar Draw 178 orientation of page 74 outline group controls Calc 135 outline level 162 Outline view Impress 149 OXT extension 69 P page break Calc 140 page layout different first page 73 landscape page 74 orientation 74 page layouts 94 page margins 97 page numbering 96 parts of the main window 17 password protection 24 password protect PDF 282 paste text 83 pasting unformatted text 161 path options 38 blank page export 279 digital rights management DRM 282 embed standard fonts 279 encrypt 282 EPS image 279 export documents to 277 form 279 image compression and resolution 278 initial view selection 280 pages to export 278 password protect 282 security settings 282 tagged 279 user interface settings 280 PDF import 355 PDF Options dialog 277 PDF A 1a 279 personal data removing 287 pictures adding from file 289 linking 290 pictures add to slides 163 Pitonyak Andrew 14 pixels 175 polygons Draw 185 positioning objects 199 Powerpoint See Impress 145 preloading OOo under Linux KDE 16 presentation formatting 156 output medium 154 running 173 slide design 154 transition effect 155 transitions 155 presentation styles 166 Presentation Wizar
255. file 1 Important First save your document in the file format used by OOo Writer odt If you do not any changes you made since the last time you saved will appear only in the Microsoft Word version of the document 2 Then choose File gt Save As On the Save As dialog in the File type or Save as type drop down menu select the type of Word format you need Click Save Save as x D Bocument Files Microsoft Office Titi Size r C Auto Save Folder CI Family Folder CI Graphic Images Folder 7 Miscellaneous Folder CI Outlook Folder 7 Templates Folder File name chapter_template_V2 File type OpenDocument Text odt OpenDocument Text odt OpenDocument Text Template ott T OpenOffice org 1 0 Text Document sxw L Save with passwo OpenOffice org 1 0 Text Document Template stw Microsoft Word 97 2000 P doc Microsoft Word 95 doc Microsoft Word 6 0 doc Rich Text Format rtf StarWriter 5 0 sdw Star Writer 5 0 Template vor Figure 67 Saving a file in Microsoft Word format Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 81 From this point on all changes you make to the document will occur only in the Microsoft Word document You have changed the name and file type of your document If you want to go back to working with the odt version of your document you must open it again To have OOo save documents by default in the Microsoft Word file format go to Tools gt Options gt Load Save
256. for personal macros called My Macros As shown in Figure 305 only two documents are currently open Macro name Macro from Existing macros in Recorded c meas Macros H E OpenOffice org Macros 0117GS GettingStartedWithMacros_ AndrewBase New Organizer Help a ml Figure 305 Library containers are shown on the left The OpenOffice org Macros are stored with the application runtime code which may not be editable to you unless you are an administrator This is just as well since these macros should not be changed and you should not store your own macros in the OOo container Unless your macros are applicable to a single document and only to a single document your macros will probably be stored in the My Macros container The My Macros container is stored in your user area or home directory If a macro is contained in a document then a recorded macro will attempt to work on that document primarily because it uses ThisComponent for its actions 334 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Every library container contains a library named Standard It is better to create your own libraries with meaningful names than to use the Standard library Not only are meaningful names easier to manage but they can also be imported into other library containers whereas the Standard library cannot OpenOffice org allows you to import libraries into a library container but it will not allow you to overwrite the l
257. formula E mc 2 Now you can double click on the formula to edit it For example here is the Riemann Zeta function c zj gt L 3 n 1 A You can reference an equation as shown in Equation 2 with these steps 1 Choose Insert gt Cross reference from the menu bar 2 On the Cross references tab Figure 262 under Type select Text 3 Under Selection select the equation number 4 Under Format select Reference 5 Click Insert Done If you later add more equations to the paper before the referenced equation all the equations will automatically renumber and the cross references will update To insert the equation number without parenthesis around it choose Numbering instead of Reference under Format Tip Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 265 Sek Reference Insert Reference Headings Numbered Paragraphs Figure Bookmarks Insert reference to Above below 45 Page Style Category and Number Caption Text Numbering Figure 262 Inserting a cross reference to an equation number 266 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Si OpenOffice org 3 Chapter 1 O Printing Exporting and E mailing Introduction This chapter provides general information about printing exporting and e mailing documents from OOo Quick printing Click the Print File Directly icon to send the entire document to the default printer defined for your computer You can change the action of
258. from the command line You may want to start OOo from the command line using the keyboard instead of the mouse By using the command line you have more control over what happens when OOo is started For example using the command line you can tell Writer to load a document and print it immediately or to start without showing the splash screen Note Most users will never need to do this There is more than one way to start OOo from the command line depending on whether you have installed a customized version or the standard download from the OOo website If you installed using the download on the OOo website you can start Writer by typing at the command line soffice writer ooffice writer or Owriter Writer will start and create a new document Likewise you can start other OOo components from the command line in Windows 16 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Text Writer writer Spreadsheet Calc calc Drawing Draw draw Presentation Impress impress Formula Math math Database Base base Web page Writer web To see a list of options you can use when starting Writer at the command line in Windows type soffice Below is a list of some of the more popular options help Get a complete list of options nologo Do not show the startup screen Show lt odp file gt Start presentation immediately view lt documents gt Open documents in viewer read only mode minimi
259. g more than 100 is expanded Tight Spacing Normal Loose Very Tight Very Loose Custom Kern Character Pairs Using the Formatting toolbar Now let us go further and customize the Fontwork object with several more attributes Click on the Fontwork object The Formatting toolbar changes to show the options for editing the object The toolbar shown in Figure 294 appears when you use Fontwork in Writer Line Colour Area Style Filling Figure 294 Formatting toolbar for a Fontwork object in Writer This figure shows the toolbar floating In its default docked position it is one of the toolbars located below the menu bar The example toolbar has also been customized to show all of the available options by default only a subset of these options is shown On the Formatting toolbar you have a large choice of options for customizing your object These choices are the same as the ones for other drawing objects For more information see the Draw Guide 304 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Line options Line icon Opens a dialog with three tabs Line Line Styles Arrow Styles Use the Line tab to edit the most common properties of the line around the selected Fontwork object by choosing from previously defined attributes including line style line color and arrow styles Use the Lines Styles and Arrow Styles tabs to edit the properties of line and arrow styles and define new styles Arrow Style icon Choose from
260. g OLE objects into the corresponding Microsoft OLE objects when a document is saved in a Microsoft format mnemonic S for save 48 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 i penOffice org Math or reverse WinWord to OpenOffice org Writer or reverse Excel to OpenOffice org Cale or reverse PowerPoint to OpenOffice org Impress or reverse Aa HIG W L Load and convert the object Convert and save the object Figure 38 Choosing Load Save Microsoft Office options HTML compatibility Load Save options Choices made on the Load Save HTML Compatibility page affect HTML pages imported into OpenOffice org and those exported from OOo See HTML documents importing exporting in the Help for more information Font sizes Use these fields to define the respective font sizes for the HTML lt font size 1 gt to lt font size 7 gt tags if they are used in the HTML pages Many pages no longer use these tags Font sizes __ Import Size 1 7 E Use English USA locale for numbers Size 2 10 L Import unknown HTML tags as fields l C Ignore font settings Size 3 12 Export Size 4 14 sal Netscape Navigator Size 5 18 OpenOffice org Basic Size 24 E Display warning i gt Print layout Copy local graphics to Internet Character set Western Europe Windows 1 Figure 39 Choosing HTML compatibility options Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 49 Import Us
261. gan when Sun Microsystems released the source code blueprints for its StarOffice software to the open source community on October 13 2000 OpenOffice org 1 0 the product was released on April 30 2002 On January 26 2010 Oracle Corporation acquired Sun Microsystems Major updates to OpenOffice org include version 2 0 in October 2005 and version 3 0 in October 2008 Since version 2 0 OpenOffice org has supported the open standard OASIS OpenDocument as its default file format Read more about OpenOffice org s history and organization at http about openoffice org The OpenOffice org community OpenOffice org s Mission Statement is To create as a community the leading international office suite that will run on all major platforms and provide access to all functionality and data through open component based APIs and an XML based file format The OpenOffice org project is primarily sponsored by Oracle Corp which is the primary contributor of code to the project Our other major corporate contributors include Novell RedHat RedFlag CH2000 IBM and Google Additonally over 450 000 people from nearly every part of the globe have joined this project with the idea of creating the best possible office suite that all can use This is the essence of an open source community With its free software licence and active Native Language Confederation OpenOffice org is a key player in the drive to eradicate digital exc
262. ghting 2 Apply Style 8 Superscript 14 Background Color 3 Font Name 9 Subscript 15 Open Character 4 Font Size 10 Increase Font Format Dialog 5 Bold 11 Reduce Font Figure 76 Formatting toolbar showing icons for character formatting To remove manual formatting select the text and choose Format gt Default Formatting or right click and choose Default Formatting Tip Autoformatting You can set Writer to automatically format parts of a document according to the choices made on the Options page of the AutoCorrect dialog Tools gt AutoCorrect Options If you notice unexpected formatting changes occurring in your document this is the first place to look for the cause Tip Some common unwanted or unexpected formatting changes include e Horizontal lines If you type three or more hyphens underscores __ or equal signs on a line and then press Enter the paragraph is replaced by a horizontal line as wide as the page The line is actually the lower border of the preceding paragraph e Bulleted and numbered lists A bulleted list is created when you type a hyphen star or plus sign followed by a space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph A numbered list is created when you type a number followed by a period followed by a space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph Automatic numbering is only applied to paragraphs formatted with the Default Text body or Text body indent paragraph styles To
263. grams it is capable of producing and editing very good 3D drawings Draw offers two types of 3D objects 3D bodies and 3D shapes Depending on which type you choose there are different possibilities for further editing of the object rotation illumination perspective 3D shapes are simpler to set up and edit than 3D bodies but 3D bodies currently allow for more customization See Chapter 7 Working with 3D Objects in the Draw Guide for details Exporting graphics To save a Draw image in a format other than odg use File gt Export Draw can Save to many graphic file formats as listed in Appendix B Background Information of this book You can export the entire file or selected objects You can also export Draw files to HTML PDF or Flash PDF export is the same as for any part of OpenOffice org as described in Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing of this book Flash export creates a swf file HTML export uses a conversion wizard that creates as many web pages as there are pages in your Draw document You can optionally choose to display the pages in frames with a navigator and can set an index page For more information see Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages Saving Documents as HTML Files of this book Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 199 Adding comments to a drawing Starting with OOo 3 2 Draw supports comments formerly called notes similar to those in Writer and Calc Choose Insert gt Comment from
264. h OpenOffice org 3 3 OpenOffice org 3 Chapter 1 2 Creating Web Pages Saving Documents as HTML Files Introduction This chapter describes how to do the following in Writer Calc Draw and Impress e Create hyperlinks within a document and to other documents such as web pages PDFs and other files e Save documents as web pages HTML documents When creating a document that you plan to deliver as a web page you need to consider the following e In an HTML document hyperlinks are active clickable but other cross references inserted by OOo are not active links e An object such as a image is saved as a separate file However if that object has been placed in a frame for example with an associated caption it is not Saved and does not appear in the HTML document instead the name of the frame appears Relative and absolute hyperlinks Hyperlinks stored within a file can be either relative or absolute A relative hyperlink says Here is how to get there starting from where you are now meaning from the folder in which your current document is saved while an absolute hyperlink says Here is how to get there no matter where you start from An absolute link will stop working if the target is moved A relative link will stop working if the start and target locations change relative to each other For instance if you have two spreadsheets in the same folder linked to each other and you move the entire folder to a
265. he Field type and formatting are different in Design View the concepts are the same as in the Wizard The first table to be created is Fuel Its fields are FuelID Date FuelCost FuelQuantity Odometer and PaymentType 1 Click Create Table in Design View 2 FuellD field a b Tip C d Type FuelID as the first Field Name Press the Tab key to move to the Field Type column Select Integer INTEGER as the Field Type from the dropdown list The default setting is Text VARCHAR A shortcut for selecting from the Field Type dropdown list press the key for the first letter of the choice You can cycle through the choices for a given letter by repeatedly pressing that key Change the Field Properties in the bottom section Change AutoValue from No to Yes Set FuelID as the Primary key Right click on the green triangle to the left of FuelID Figure 178 and choose Primary Key from the menu This places a key icon in front of FuellD Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 209 _ Field Name Field Type v Primary Key Field Properties AutoValue Yes y Auto increment state IDENTITY Length 10 Format example o ma Description FuellD Cut Copy Delete Insert Rows integer INTEGER Figure 178 Defining the primary key field Note The primary key serves only one purpose to uniquely identify the record Any name can be used for this field We have used FuelID for convenience so we
266. he wide variety of other options available to fine tune AutoCorrect AutoCorrect can be used as a quick way to insert special characters Tip For example c will be autocorrected to You can add your own special characters Using word completion If Word Completion is enabled Writer tries to guess which word you are typing and offers to complete the word for you To accept the suggestion press Enter Otherwise continue typing To turn off Word Completion select Tools gt AutoCorrect Options gt Word Completion and deselect Enable word completion You can customize word completion from the Word Completion page of the AutoCorrect dialog e Add append a space automatically after an accepted word e Show the suggested word as a tip hovering over the word rather than completing the text as you type e Change the maximum number of words remembered for word completion and the length of the smallest words to be remembered e Delete specific entries from the word completion list e Change the key that accepts a suggested entry the options are Right arrow End key Return Enter and Space bar Automatic word completion only occurs after you type a word for the Note second time in a document Using AutoText Use AutoText to store text tables graphics and other items for reuse and assign them to a key combination for easy retrieval For example rather than typing Senior Management every time you use that phrase you can set up
267. hor information is picked up from the document s properties if necessary edit it Click Next Web Wizard Steps Select the documents you want to publish 1 Introduction Web site content Export to File Format anes 011765 CreatingwebPages sxv HTML Main layout Document information Title Style Creating Web Pages Layout details o Web site information Summary Preview Fields to edit Chapter Title Description tab gt Title Chanter Sobre leer Defined Author Remove 314 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 3 Chose a layout for the web site by clicking on the layout boxes Click Next eb Weard Steps Choose a layout for the table of contents of your web site Introduction Layouts Documents Main layout Layout details Style Web site information 0 Preview 4 Chose the information to be listed and the screen resolution Click Next Web Wizard Steps Customize the selected layout Introduction Include the Following information For each document in the table of contents Documents File name File format Main layout Description File Format icon _ author _ Number of pages Creation date Size in KB Last change date Web site information Optimize the layout For screen resolution Preview O 640x480 800x600 O 1024x768 Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages 315 5 Select a style for the page Use the drop down list to ch
268. ht of the arrow to get a list of the changes that can be reapplied To modify the number of changes OpenOffice org remembers choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Memory and in the Undo section change Number of steps Be aware that asking OOo to remember more changes consumes more computer memory Closing a document To close a document choose File gt Close You can also close a document by clicking on the Close icon on the document window This button looks like the X shown in Figure 17 It may be in a different location on your operating system Figure 17 Close icons If more than one OOo window is open each window looks like the sample shown on the left in Figure 17 Closing this window leaves the other OOo windows open If only one OOo window is open it looks like the sample shown on the right in Figure 17 Notice the small X below the large X Clicking the small X closes the document but leaves OOo open Clicking the large X closes OOo completely If the document has not been saved since the last change a message box is displayed Choose whether to save or discard your changes e Save The document is saved and then closed e Discard The document is closed and all modifications since the last save are lost e Cancel Nothing happens and you return to the document Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 29 we Not saving your document could result in the loss of recently made changes or wors
269. hyperlink specify whether to edit the newly created document immediately Edit now or just create it Edit later enter the file name and select the type of document to create text spreadsheet and so on Click the Select Path button to open a file browser and choose where to store the file The Further settings section in the bottom right part of the dialog is common to all the hyperlink categories although some choices are more relevant to some types of links e Set the value of Frame to determine how the hyperlink will open This applies to documents that open in a Web browser e Form specifies if the link is to be presented as text or as a button Figure 298 Shows a link formatted as a button A hyperlink button is a type of form control See Chapter 15 of the Writer Guide for more information 1 2 a OOo Authors df 5 Ld Figure 298 OOo Authors hyperlink as button e Text specifies the text that will be visible to the user If you do not enter anything here OOo uses the full URL or path as the link text Note that if the link is relative and you move the file this text will not change though the target will Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages 311 e Name is applicable to HTML documents It specifies text that will be added as a NAME attribute in the HTML code behind the hyperlink Bre e Events button click this button to open the Assign Macro dialog and choose a macro to run when the link is clicked Se
270. ibrary named Standard A Therefore if you store your macros in the Standard library you cannot import them into another library container Caution Just as it makes good sense to give your libraries meaningful names it is prudent to use meaningful names for your modules By default OpenOffice org uses names such as Module1 Feel free to use your own meaningful name As you create your macros you must decide where to store them Storing a macro in a document is useful if the document will be shared and you want the macro to be included with the document Macros stored in the application library container named My Macros however are globally available to all documents Macros are not available until the library that contains them is loaded The Standard library and Template library however are automatically loaded A loaded library is displayed differently from a library that is not loaded To load the library and the modules it contains double click on the library Where are macros stored OpenOffice org stores user specific data in a directory under the user s home directory The location is operating system specific Use Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Paths to view where other configuration data is stored On Windows XP this is C Documents and Settings lt name gt Application Data User macros are stored in OpenOffice org 3 user basic Each library is stored in its own directory off the basic directory It i
271. ice Menu bar Under the Title bar is the Menu bar When you choose one of the menus a submenu appears with other options You can modify the Menu bar as discussed in Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org Toolbars Three toolbars are located under the Menu bar by default the Standard toolbar the Formatting toolbar and the Formula Bar The icons buttons on these toolbars provide a wide range of common commands and functions You can also modify these toolbars as discussed in Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org In the Formatting toolbar the three boxes on the left are the Apply Style Font Name and Font Size lists They show the current setting for the selected cell or area The Apply Style list may not be visible by default Click the down arrow to the right of each box to open the list Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 107 B U gt fe Default a drial mw 10 we Al vl Ai EB nn Te S Dp O OE O Figure 89 Apply Style Font Name and Font Size lists Formula bar On the left hand side of the Formula bar is a small text box called the Name Box with a letter and number combination in it such as D7 This combination called the cell reference is the column letter and row number of the selected cell Al v Fe Input line i Name box Sum button Function button Figure 90 Formula Bar To the right of the Name box are the the Function Wizard Sum and Function buttons Clicking
272. ice org 3 3 Z Free eBook Edition OpenOffice org 3 Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org What is OpenOffice org OpenOffice org OOo is both a software product and a community of volunteers who produce and support the software Because someone else owns the trademark OpenOffice the correct Note name for both the open source project and its software is OpenOffice org The OpenOffice org software is a freely available full featured office productivity suite If you have used previous versions of OpenOffice org you might want to look over the new features lists at http www openoffice org dev_docs features 3 0 http www openoffice org dev_docs features 3 1 http www openoffice org dev_docs features 3 2 and http www openoffice org dev_docs features 3 3 OOo s native file format is OpenDocument an open standard format that is being adopted by governments worldwide as a required file format for publishing and accepting documents OOo can also open and save documents in many other formats including those used by several versions of Microsoft Office OOo includes the following components Writer word processor Writer is a feature rich tool for creating letters books reports newsletters brochures and other documents You can insert graphics and objects from other components into Writer documents Writer can export files to HTML XHTML XML Adobe s Portable Document Format PDF and several v
273. ice org on the various supported operating systems is given here http download openoffice org common instructions html You can also download the more detailed Installation Guide from http wiki services openoffice org wiki Documentation Extensions and add ons Extensions and add ons to enhance OpenOffice org are collected in the official extensions repository http extensions services openoffice org Most are free but some are not See Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org for more information How to get help This book the other OOo user guides the built in Help system and user support systems assume that you are familiar with your computer and basic functions such as starting a program opening and saving files Help system OOo comes with an extensive Help system This is your first line of support for using OOo To display the full Help system press F1 or select OpenOffice org Help from the Help menu In addition you can choose whether to activate Tips Extended tips and the Help Agent using Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt General If Tips are enabled place the mouse pointer over any of the icons to see a small box tooltip with a brief explanation of the icon s function For a more detailed explanation select Help gt What s This and hold the pointer over the icon Free online support The OpenOffice org community not only develops software but provides free volunteer based support
274. ick the first control you want to move A border appears around the control with eight green handles 2 Move the cursor over the label or field of the control It change shape to a drag icon 3 Drag and drop the control to where you want it Caution Do not use Control click when moving a field It moves either the field or the label but not both To move both use a mouse click and drag to the desired spot 4 Use the same steps to move the rest of the controls to where they belong Step 4 Change the label wording Field names have been single words for some time However the labels for the fields in a form can be more than one word So we will change them by editing the text in the label Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 221 The table wizard in Base contains suggested fields which are single words often consisting of two separate words Table names in the wizard Note have been that way also However you can use multiple words as the name of a field label or table We will do so when we create a list box for each of the payment type controls 1 Control click the SnackNo label Do one of the following e Right click the SnackNo label and select Control from the pop up menu Or click the Control icon in the Form Control toolbar Figure 194 2 The dialog that opens is labeled Properties Label Field It contains all of the properties of the selected label In the Label selection edit the label to Snack No
275. ide or show the Elements window with View gt Elements Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 2909 Example 1 5x4 For this example we will enter a simple formula 5X4 On the Elements window 1 Select the top left button of the categories top section 2 Click on the multiplication symbol Multiplication Figure 248 Selecting the multiplication symbol When you select the multiplication symbol on the Elements window two things happen e The equation editor shows the markup lt gt times lt gt e The body of the document shows a gray box like this UxU lt OB Gt 4 gt lt gt times lt gt a 4 Figure 249 Result of selecting the multiplication symbol The lt gt symbols shown in Figure 249 are placeholders that you can replace by other text for example 5 and 4 The equation will update automatically and the result should resemble Figure 250 To keep the equation from updating automatically choose View Tip gt AutoUpdate display from the menu bar To update a formula manually press F9 or choose View gt Update 256 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 arin pe e Figure 250 Result of entering 5 and 4 next to the times operator Right click menu Another way to access mathematical symbols is to right click on the equation editor This pops up the menu shown in Figure 251 The items in this menu correspond exactly to those in the Elements window
276. idth and height independently If the Keep ratio Option is selected then the two dimensions change so that the proportion is maintained allowing for a scaled resizing Grouping drawing objects To group drawing objects 1 Select one object then hold down the Shift key and select the others you want to include in the group The bounding box expands to include all the selected objects 2 With the objects selected hover the mouse pointer over one of the objects and choose Format gt Group gt Group from the menu bar or right click and choose Group gt Group from the pop up menu You cannot include an embedded or linked graphic in a group with Note drawing objects 300 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Using Fontwork With Fontwork you can create graphical text art objects for making your work more attractive There are many different settings for text art objects line area position size and more so you have a large choice You will surely find one that fits your document Fontwork is available with each component of OOo but you will notice small differences in the way that each component displays it The Fontwork toolbars You can use two different toolbars for creating and editing a Fontwork object e Go to View gt Toolbars gt Fontwork Fantwark X A T r Aa AV Figure 289 The floating Fontwork toolbar e Ifyou click on an existing Fontwork object the Formatting toolbar changes to display the Fo
277. iew a document Print Layout Web Layout and Full Screen To access these and other choices go to the View menu and click on the required view When in Full Screen view press the Esc key to return to either Print or Web Layout view When in Print Layout you can use both the Zoom slider and the View Layout icons on the status bar In Web Layout you can use the Zoom slider Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 79 You can also choose View gt Zoom from the menu bar to display the Zoom amp View Layout dialog where you can set the same options as on the Status bar In Web Layout view most of the choices are not available g Zoom amp View Layout foom factor View layout Optimal Automatic Fit width and height Single page Fit width Columns E Le ee Figure 64 Choosing Zoom and View Layout options Moving quickly through a document In addition to the navigation features of the Status bar described above you can use the main Navigator window and the Navigation toolbar as described in Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org In Writer you can also display the Navigation toolbar by clicking on the small Navigation icon near the lower right hand corner of the window below the vertical scroll bar as shown in Figure 65 se Previous 4 Figure 65 Navigation icons The Navigation toolbar Figure 66 shows icons for all the object types shown in the Navigator plus some extras for example
278. ify the process by creating outline groups which add a set of controls for hiding and showing the cells in the group that are quick to use and always available If the contents of cells falls into a regular pattern such as four cells followed by a total then you can use Data gt Group and Outline gt AutoOutline to have Calc add outline controls based on the pattern Otherwise you can set outline groups manually by selecting the cells for grouping then choosing Data gt Group and Outline gt Group On the Group dialog you can choose whether to group the selected cells by rows or columns When you close the dialog the outline group controls are visible between either the row or column headers and the edges of the editing window The controls resemble the tree structure of a file manager in appearance and can be hidden by selecting Data gt Outline gt Hide Details They are strictly for on screen use and do not print Figure 122 Outline group controls The basic outline controls have plus or minus signs at the start of the group to show or hide hidden cells However if outline groups are nested the controls have numbered buttons for hiding different levels If you no longer need a group place the mouse cursor in any cell in it and select Data gt Group and Outline gt Ungroup To remove all groups on a sheet select Data gt Group and Outline gt Remove Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 135 Filtering which cell
279. implified by the use of styles Styles allow you to define a formatting template a style and then to apply that style to multiple objects For more information about styles see Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates in this book Special effects With Draw you can apply many special effects to objects and groups of objects This section describes a few of these effects More effects include distorting shadows and transparency can be found in Chapter 4 Changing object Attributes of the Draw Guide Flip an object Select an object and click on the Flip icon bo You will see a dashed line through the middle of the object This dashed line is the axis of symmetry The object will be flipped around this line Move one or both ends of the line with your mouse to set the orientation of the axis Then grab any one of the eight green handles and move it across to the other side of the dashed line The new position of the figure is shown dashed until the mouse is released If you hold down the Shift key while moving the line the line will rotate Note in 45 degree increments Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 195 Mirror copies Move the axis of symmetry to the desired location of the mirror axis Copy the object to the clipboard Flip the object then click on an empty area of the Draw screen in order to deselect the object Paste from the clipboard to put a copy of the object in its original location and now you have a mirror
280. improve consistency in a document They also make major formatting changes easy For example you may decide to change the indentation of all paragraphs or change the font of all titles For a long document this simple task can be prohibitive Styles make the task easy In addition styles are used by OpenOffice org for many processes even if you are not aware of them For example Writer relies on heading styles or other styles you specify when it compiles a table of contents Some common examples of style use are given in Examples of style use on page 73 OpenOffice org supports the following types of styles e Page styles include margins headers and footers borders and backgrounds In Calc page styles also include the sequence for printing sheets e Paragraph styles control all aspects of a paragraph s appearance such as text alignment tab stops line spacing and borders and can include character formatting e Character styles affect selected text within a paragraph such as the font and size of text or bold and italic formats e Frame styles are used to format graphic and text frames including wrapping type borders backgrounds and columns 56 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Numbering styles apply similar alignment numbering or bullet characters and fonts to numbered or bulleted lists Cell styles include fonts alignment borders background number formats for example currency date number a
281. in the Calc Guide Spreadsheets sheets and cells Calc works with documents called spreadsheets Spreadsheets consist of a number of individual sheets each sheet containing cells arranged in rows and columns A particular cell is identified by its row number and column letter Cells hold the individual elements text numbers formulas and so on that make up the data to display and manipulate Fach spreadsheet can have many sheets and each sheet can have many individual cells In Calc 3 3 each sheet can have a maximum of 1 048 576 rows 65 536 rows in Calc 3 2 and earlier and a maximum of 1024 columns 106 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Parts of the main Calc window When Calc is started the main window looks similar to Figure 88 E Untitled 1 OpenOffice ore Cale Hile zdt ew olnsert Format loos Data Window Help es _ m 2 AB FF E 2 ea 5 B H Sg w CX l 2 a ES g Pl Default Arial i e B 7 Bir G r pA ib toolbar Active cell Active cell reference Column Headers Name box Fow Headers Sheet Sheetz Ka r gt Shee 1 3 Defauk e 100 1 Z q E Figure 88 Parts of the Calc window Title bar The Title bar located at the top shows the name of the current spreadsheet When the spreadsheet is newly created its name is Untitled X where X is a number When you save a spreadsheet for the first time you are prompted to enter a name of your cho
282. ing 3 Ifthe mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol the image refers to a hyperlink In this case press the Alt key while you click the image to select it without activating the link If the mouse pointer does not change to a hand symbol you can simply click the image to select it 4 Once the image is selected evident from the green selection handles around it release the mouse button Click again on the image keeping the mouse button pressed for more than two seconds Without releasing the mouse button drag the image into the document 5 Release the mouse button Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 295 Deleting images from the Gallery To delete an image from a theme that you created 1 Right click on the name of the image file or its thumbnail in the Gallery 2 Click Delete on the pop up menu A message appears asking if you want to delete this object Click Yes Deleting the name of a file from the list in the Gallery does not delete Note the file from the hard disk or other location Adding a new theme to the Gallery To add a new theme to the Gallery 1 Click the New Theme button above the list of themes Figure 285 2 In the Properties of New Theme dialog click the General tab and type a name for the new theme 3 Click the Files tab and add images to the theme as described earlier Deleting a theme from the Gallery You can delete only theme that you have added to the Gallery you cannot
283. ing z FuellD Date Odometer FuelCost FuelQuantity wee eee jeld Date FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading Alias Quanity Begin End Distance Table Fuel End Reading Fuel End Reading sort Visible De De EJ EJ EJ unction Jriterion gt 0 Figure 239 Appearance of query when opened for editing 1 Add the FuelCost field to the End Reading query a Right click the End Reading query and select Edit from the pop up menu 248 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 b Inthe Fuel table list double click to add FuelCost to the bottom table Figure 240 c Save and close the query FuellD Odometer FuelQuantity FuelCost Fuel Fuel Fuel Fuel g g x x gt 0 Figure 240 Adding an additional field to the query 2 Add the FuelCost field from the End Reading query to the Fuel Economy query e Right click the Fuel Economy query and select Edit from the pop up menu e Double click the FuelCost field in the End Reading query list to add it to the query table at the bottom 3 Add a calculation field to the right of the FuelCost field e Type the following in a Field cell in the table at the bottom End Reading FuelCost End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer e Type the following in its Alias cell cost per mile Note If you use the metric system cost per kmis the appropriate alias 4 Save and close the query 5 Open anew report Right click the Fuel Economy query and select Report
284. ing Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Figure 217 is a record with data inserted in its fields Mil Friday May 25 2007 ecu Paks rcs I iooi d a s aj a Fuel Cost Fuel Quanity Payment Type Friday May 25 2007 16 00 14 692 704 2 Kevin Friday May 25 2007 7 00 6 428 778 7 Dan Figure 217 Sample record of the Vacation form and subform Creating queries Queries are used to get specific information from a database Query results are Special tables within the database To demonstrate the use of queries we will use two different methods e Using our CD Collection table we will create a list of albums by a particular artist We will do this using the Wizard e The information we might want from the Fuel table includes what our fuel economy is We will do this using the Design View Queries that require calculations are best created with the Design view Using the Wizard to create a query Queries created by the wizard provide a list or lists of information based upon what one wants to know It is possible to obtain a single answer or multiple answers depending upon the circumstances In the main database window Figure 175 click the Queries icon in the Databases section then in the Tasks section click Use Wizard to Create Query The Query Wizard window opens Figure 218 The information we want is what albums are by a certain musical group or individual the album s author We can include when each album was
285. ing in the document Paste into the blank document created in step 1 3 Update the table of contents if there is one Save the file Method 2 Writer only This method does not include any graphics or text from the new template it simply includes styles from the new template and establishes an association between the template and the document 1 Download the Template Changer extension from http extensions services openoffice org and install it as described on page 2 Close and reopen OpenOffice org Now the File gt Templates menu has two new choices in Writer Assign Template current document and Assign Template folder In Calc Impress and Draw only the Assign Template folder choice is available 3 Open the document whose template you want to change Choose File gt Templates gt Assign Template current document Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 71 4 In the Select Template window find and select the required template and click Open 5 Save the document If you now look in File gt Properties you will see the new template listed at the bottom of the General page Organizing templates OOo can only use templates that are in OOo template folders You can create new OOo template folders and use them to organize your templates For example you might have one template folder for report templates and another for letter templates You can also import and export templates To begin choose File gt Temp
286. ing upon your language s default setting for dates Tip 3 Open anew report e Right click the Vacation Fuel Purchases query e Select Report Wizard from the pop up menu Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 247 When a new report is opened in this way the query used to open it is Note automatically selected in the Tables or queries dropdown list in the Report Wizard 4 Create the report Use gt gt to move both fields from the Available fields list to the Fields in report list Click Next 5 Label fields Add a space to FuelCost to make it Fuel Cost two words Click Next 6 Group fields Click Date to highlight it Use gt to move the Date field to the Groupings list Click Next 7 Choose layout We will be making no changes in the layout Click Next 8 Create report final settings e Use the suggested name which is the same as the query e Select Static report Click Finish Creating a dynamic report Now we will create a report with some statistics on our fuel consumption To do this we have to modify two queries End Reading and Fuel Economy We will be adding the FuelCost field to the End Reading query Then we will add the FuelCost field from the End Reading query to the Fuel Economy query When opening a query to edit it it might appear as in Figure 239 If you Tip move your cursor over the black line circled it becomes a double headed arrow Drag it to a lower position E Fuel E End Read
287. insert a header choose Insert gt Header gt Default or the page style if not Default Other information such as document titles and chapter titles is often put into the header or footer These items are best added as fields That way if something changes the headers and footers are updated automatically Here is one common example To insert the document title into the header 1 Choose File gt Properties gt Description and type a title for your document 2 Add a header Insert gt Header gt Default 3 Place the cursor in the header part of the page 4 Choose Insert gt Fields gt Title The title should appear on a gray background which does not show when printed and can be turned off Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 95 5 To change the title for the whole document go back to File gt Properties gt Description Fields are covered in detail in Chapter 14 Working with Fields in the Writer Guide For more about headers and footers see Chapter 4 Formatting Pages and Chapter 6 Introduction to Styles in the Writer Guide Numbering pages To automatically number pages 1 Insert a header or footer as described in Creating headers and footers on page 95 2 Place the cursor in the header or footer where you want the page number to appear and choose Insert gt Fields gt Page Number Including the total number of pages To include the total number of pages as in page 1 of 12 1 Typ
288. insert as a hyperlink 6 Drag the item to where you want to insert the hyperlink in the document The name of the item is inserted in the document as an active hyperlink Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages 309 5 Navigator lt Insert as Hyperlink Insert as Link Insert as Copy Headings Copyright Introduction 7 Relative and absolute hyperli Saving Calc spreadsheets as Saving Impress presentations Figure 296 Inserting a hyperlink using the Navigator When using the Navigator to hyperlink to an object such as a graphic to have the hyperlink show useful text such as 2009 Sales Graph you need to give such objects useful names instead of leaving them as the default names Graphics6 or you need to edit the resulting link text using the Hyperlink dialog as described below You can also use the Navigator to insert a hyperlink from one document the source to a specific place in another document the target Open the Navigator in the target document and drag the item to the spot in the source document where you want the hyperlink to appear Using the Hyperlink dialog To display the dialog click the Hyperlink icon amp on the Standard toolbar or choose Insert gt Hyperlink from the menu bar To turn existing text into a link highlight it before opening the dialog Hyperlink Hyperlink type Web C Telnet Internet Target Further settings Text Mame Hew Document
289. inting Range and copies o oe Number of copies 1 E Selected sheets Selected cells Collate Sa rs Thereof print All pages Pages 1 3 Figure 268 Choosing what to print in Calc Printing an individual sheet 1 In the spreadsheet click on the sheet tab to select the sheet you want to print 2 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 272 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 3 In the Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog choose the Selected sheets option 4 Click the Print button Printing a range of sheets 1 In the spreadsheet select the sheets to print a Select the first sheet b Hold down the Control key c Click on the additional sheet tabs d Release the Control key when all required sheets are selected 2 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 3 In the Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog choose the Selected sheets option 4 Click the Print button Printing a selection of cells 1 In the document select the section of cells to print 2 Choose File gt Print from the menu 3 In the Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog select the Selected cells option 4 Click the Print button Caution After printing be sure to deselect the extra sheets If you keep them selected the next time you enter data on one sheet you enter data on all the selected sheets This might not be what you want Impress and Draw You can choose individual slides rang
290. irection of the arrows Using Home End Page Up and Page Down e Home moves the focus to the start of a row e End moves the focus to the column furthest to the right that contains data e Page Down moves the display down one complete screen and Page Up moves the display up one complete screen e Combinations of Control and Alt with Home End Page Down Page Up and the cursor keys move the focus of the current cell in other ways See the Help or Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts in the Calc Guide for details Tip Use one of the four Alt Arrow key combinations to resize a cell Customizing the Enter key You can customize the direction in which the Enter key moves the focus by selecting Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Calc gt General The four choices for the direction of the Enter key are shown on the right hand side of Figure 97 It can move the focus down right up or left Depending on the file being used or on the type of data being entered setting a different direction can be useful The Enter key can also be used to switch into and out of editing mode Use the first two options under Input settings in Figure 97 to change the Enter key settings Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 113 Input settings Press Enter to move selection E Press Enter to switch to edit mode E Expand formatting C Expand references when new columns rows are inserted Highlight selection in column row headers
291. ired to use the mobile device ote filters for AportisDoc Palm Pocket Word and Pocket Excel Saving presentations In addition to OpenDocument formats odp otp and odg Impress 3 can save in these formats OpenOffice org 1 x Presentation sxi OpenOffice org 1 x Presentation Template sti Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP ppt Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP Template pot StarDraw StarImpress sda sdd and vor Unified Office Format presentation uop Impress can also export to MacroMedia Flash swf and any of the graphics formats listed for Draw Saving drawings Draw 3 can only save in the OpenDocument Drawing formats odg and otg the OpenOffice org 1 x formats sxd and std and StarDraw format sda sdd and vor However Draw can also export to BMP EMF EPS GIF JPEG MET PBM PCT PGM PNG PPM RAS SVG SVM TIFF WMF and XPM Writer Web can save in these formats HTML document html and htm as HTML 4 0 Transitional OpenOffice org 1 0 HTML Template stw OpenOffice org 2 x HTML Template oth StarWriter Web 4 0 and 5 0 vor Text OpenOffice org Writer Web txt Text Encoded OpenOffice org Writer Web txt Exporting to other formats OOo uses the term export for some file operations involving a change of file type If you cannot find what you want under Save As look under Export as well OpenOffice org can export files to XHTML In addition Draw and Impress can export
292. irst line indent Hanging indent Heading Heading 1 Heading 10 Heading 3 Heading 4 Heading 5 oe ol m Figure 206 Styles and Formatting window Click OK to close the dialog Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 227 Learning how to use styles can be very helpful at times By using styles we changed the font color for all three headings at one time There are Tip other methods of changing the font color but they require repeating the Same steps for each heading 4 To adda graphic to the background a Right click on the background and select Page from the pop up menu b On the Page Style dialog click the Background tab change the As dropdown list from Color to Graphic c Click Browse to find and select the graphic file you want to use and click Open In the Type section of the Background tab select Area d Click OK to close the dialog The form should look like Figure 207 SB we e Fuscuanty Osometor Payment Tye Record of Figure 207 Finished form Step 11 Change the tab order The Tab key moves the cursor from field to field This is much easier to do than to click each field to enter data into it It also permits us to group our expenses into areas before we begin entering data For example all of our meal receipts can be grouped together as can our snacks and also our fuel purchases 1 Control click the Date field 2 Click the Form Design icon in the Form Controls toolbar t
293. ish Australia Cancel From row Separator options Fixed width Separated by E Tab Comma E Other Semicolon Z Merge delimiters Text delimiter Other options Quoted field as text E Detect special numbers Fields Column type __ Standardstandard_ Standard Standard Standardstandardstandard _ 1 surname es oo a Sa pang anaa 2 Weber Jean PO Box 640 Airlie Beach QLD 4802 Australia Figure 93 Text Import dialog with Comma selected as the separator and double quotation mark as the text delimiter 110 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Saving as a CSV file To save a spreadsheet as a comma separate value CSV file 1 Choose File gt Save As 2 In the File name box type a name for the file 3 In the File type list select Text CSV csv and click Save You may see the message box shown below Click Keep Current Format This document may contain Formatting or content that cannot be sawed in the Text CSV File Format Do you want bo save the document in this Format anyway Use the latest ODF file Format and be sure all formatting and content is saved correctly Save in ODF Format 4sk when not saving in ODF Format 4 In the Export of text files dialog select the options you want and then click OK Field options Character set Field delimiter Text delimiter Save cell content as shown Fixed column width Figure 94 Choosing options whe
294. it see Figure 149 Impress has automatically added your name and the date at the bottom of this text box Type or paste your comment into the text box You can optionally apply some basic formatting to parts of the text by selecting it right clicking and choosing from the pop up menu From this menu you can also delete the current comment all the comments from the same author or all the comments in the document Normal Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorte This is a comment X Jean Hollis Weber Today 04 43 Figure 149 A comment You can move the small comment markers to anywhere you wish on the page Typically you might place it on or near an object you refer to in the comment To show or hide the comment markers choose View gt Comments Select Tools gt Options gt User Data to configure the name you want to appear in the Author field of the comment or to change it If more than one person edits the document each author is automatically allocated a different background color Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 171 Setting up the slide show As mentioned in Modifying the slide show on page 159 Impress allocates reasonable default settings for slide shows while at the same time allowing for customizing many aspects of the slide show experience This section covers only some aspects advanced techniques are explained in Chapter 9 Slide Shows in the Impress Guide Most of the tasks are best
295. ith OpenOffice org 3 3 and total row as well as the first and last columns of the table and apply a banded appearance to the rows and columns Having completed the table design entering data into the cells is similar to working with text box objects Click in the cell you wish to add data to and begin typing To move around cells quickly use the following key options e The arrow keys move the cursor to the next table cell if the cell is empty otherwise they move the cursor to the next character in the cell e The Tab key moves to the next cell skipping over the contents of the cell Shift Tab move backwards in this manner Adding charts To insert a chart in a slide you can either use the Insert Chart feature or select Chart as type for one of the contents box In both cases Impress will insert a default chart To modify the chart type insert your own data and change the formatting refer to the Impress Guide Adding media clips You can insert various types of music and movie clips into your slide by selecting the Insert Movie button in an empty contents box A media player will open at the bottom of the screen and you can preview the media In case of an audio file the contents box will be filled with a loudspeaker image In Linux based systems such as Ubuntu media do not work straight out of the box You need to download the Java Media Framework API JMF and add the path to jmf jar to the Class Path in Tools gt Options gt
296. ith comments from two different authors Choose Tools gt Options gt User Data to configure the name you want to appear in the Author field of the comment or to change it If more than one person edits the document each author is automatically allocated a different background color Right clicking on a comment pops up a menu where you can delete the current comment all the comments from the same author or all the comments in the document From this menu you can also apply some basic formatting to the text of the comment You can also change the font type size and alignment from the main menu 98 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Note sample riter document has been vastly improved in i OOo notes are now displayed at the side of j i Daiei erg ee r ee peja EEE ichele Zarri user who created them To insert a note in Yesterday 23 34 1 the text the note refers to and select he anchor point of the note is connected by Cello Suite 1 le ofthe page where you can type your 0 BWV100 7 ttom the author of the note as well as a Prelude created lt ref gt shows an example of text Allemande Minuets gt onfigure the name you want to appear in Sarabande It Courante nt each author will be alitomatically GIgue Johan Sebastian Bach Today 23 37 Lr Figure 84 Example of comments To navigate from one comment to another open the Navigator F5 expand the Comments section and click on the comment text to
297. ized object is drawn automatically in the work area the size shape and color are all standard values These attributes can be changed later if desired Note Drawing curves The tools for drawing curves or polygons are on the toolbar that appears when you click arrow next to the Curve icon 7 on the Drawing toolbar This toolbar contains eight tools Figure 165 If you move the mouse cursor over one of the icons a tooltip pops up with a description of the function Hovering the mouse pointer over this icon gives a tooltip of Curve If Note you convert the icon to a floating toolbar however the title is Lines as shown in Figure 165 184 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 1 Curve filled 4 Freeform line Filled 7 Polygon 45 2 Polygon filled 5 Curve 8 Freeform line 3 Polygon 45 filled 6 Polygon Figure 165 Curves toolbar incorrectly titled Lines Polygons Draw the first line from the start point with the left mouse button held down As soon as you release the mouse button a first corner point is drawn move the mouse to see how the second line will look Every mouse click sets another corner point A double click ends the drawing A filled polygon automatically joins the last point to the first point to close off the figure and fills it with the current standard fill color A polygon without filling will not be closed at the end of the drawing Polygon 45 Like ordinary polygons these are formed fr
298. izing OpenOffice org 355 To get extensions that are listed in the repository you can open the Extension Manager and click the Get more extensions here link Extension Manager MA English spelling and hyphenation dictionaries and thesaurus 2009 05 08 oe Ee Tip French Classic and Reform 1990 spelling thesaurus and hyphen 3 4 1 Dicollecte oe Professional Template Pack II English 1 0 Sun Microsystems The second template pack by Sun Microsystems provides more than 120 professionally designed document spreadsheet presentation and database templates For professional and stunning looking documents and presentations Spanish spelling dictionary 2008 07 01 Temonlate C hanner 175 Get more extensions online Figure 322 Using the Extension Manager To install a shared extension you need write access to the OpenOffice org Note installation directory Some popular extensions This section describes a few of the more important and popular extensions to OpenOffice org In each case you need to first install the extension as described in the previous section All tools listed here are open source and free of charge PDF Import Enables you to make minor modifications to the text of existing PDF files when the original source files do not exist or you are unable to open the source files Whenever possible modify the source and regenerate the PDF to obtain the best results When the extension is installed PDF is
299. kmarks a table of contents list displayed by some PDF readers including Adobe Reader Export comments Exports comments in Writer and Calc documents as PDF notes You may not want this In Impress exports a set of Comments pages following the set of slides Export automatically inserted blank pages If selected automatically inserted blank pages are exported to the PDF This is best if you are printing the PDF double sided For example books usually have chapters set to always start on an odd numbered right hand page When the previous chapter ends Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 279 on an odd page OOo inserts a blank page between the two odd pages This option controls whether to export that blank page e Embed standard fonts In previous versions of OOo the standard fonts Times Helvetica Courier Symbol and ZapfDingbats were only embedded into the PDF when the resulting file was of the PDF A type since the PDF A standards requires this In version 3 3 you can choose to embed these fonts in all PDF documents created by OOo to enhance display accuracy in PDF viewers Initial View page of PDF Options dialog On the Initial View page you can choose how the PDF opens by default in a PDF viewer The selections should be self explanatory General Initial View User Interface Links Security Panes Page only Bookmarks and page Thumbnails and page Open on page 1 a Magnification
300. kmarks Toolbars Footnotes i amn lassie me i dia aa o oa l a nen Insert reference to Page l Introduction to Writer Chapter Reference Above Below As Page Style a Number Number no context Number full context Figure 86 The Cross references tab of the Fields dialog 3 Click on the required item in the Selection list which shows all the items of the selected type In the Format list choose the format required Usually this will be Reference to insert the full text of the heading or caption Category and Number to insert the word Figure or Table and its number but without the caption text Numbering to insert only the figure or table number without the word Figure or Table or Page to insert the number of the page the referenced text is on Click Insert Using bookmarks Bookmarks are listed in the Navigator and can be accessed directly from there with a single mouse click You can cross reference to bookmarks and create hyperlinks to bookmarks as described above 1 Select the text you want to bookmark Click Insert gt Bookmark 2 On the Insert Bookmark dialog the larger box lists any previously defined bookmarks Type a name for this bookmark in the top box and then click OK Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 103 Insert Bookmark Bookmarks E K insertpagenum usedocproperties Figure 87 Inserting a bookmark Using master documents Master documents a
301. l gt Help and mark the Tips checkbox If the Extended tips checkbox is also marked you will get more detailed tooltip information but the tooltip names themselves will not be provided Tip Several layouts contain one or more content boxes Each of these boxes can be configured to contain one of the following elements Text Media clip Picture Chart or Table You can choose the type of contents by clicking on the corresponding icon that is displayed in the middle of the contents box as shown in Figure 143 If instead you intend to use the contents box for text just click anywhere on the box to get a cursor Click to add title e Click to add text Insert Table Insert Chart Insert Picture Insert Media clip Figure 143 Selecting the desired contents type for a contents box To select or change the layout place the slide in the work area and select the desired layout from the layout drawer in the Task Pane If you have selected a layout with one or more contents boxes this is a good time to decide what type of contents you want to insert Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 157 Modifying the slide elements At present each slide will contain only the elements that are present in the slide master you are using such as background images logos header footer and so on It is however unlikely that the predefined layouts will suit all your needs Although Impress does not have the functionality to create new layouts i
302. l print on This can be useful if a large amount of data needs to be printed compactly or if you want the text enlarged to make it easier to read e Reduce Enlarge printout scales the data in the printout either larger or smaller For example if a sheet would normally print out as four pages two high and two wide a scaling of 50 would print as one page both width and height are halved e Fit print range s on number of pages defines exactly how many pages the printout will take up This option will only reduce a printout it will not enlarge it To enlarge a printout the reduce enlarge option must be used e Fit print range s to width height defines how high and wide the printout will be in pages Printing rows or columns on every page If a sheet is printed on multiple pages you can set up certain rows or columns to repeat on each printed page Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 139 For example if the top two rows of the sheet as well as column A need to be printed on all pages do the following 1 Choose Format gt Print Ranges gt Edit On the Edit Print Ranges dialog type the rows in the text entry box under Rows to repeat For example to repeat rows 1 and 2 type 1 2 This automatically changes Rows to repeat from none to user defined Edit Print Ranges Print range Rows to repeat user defined Columns to repeat none pe Figure 124 Specifying repeating rows 2 To re
303. lar category To apply an existing style except for character styles position the insertion point in the paragraph frame or page and then double click on the name of the style in one of these lists To apply a character style select the characters first Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates OF At the bottom of the Styles and Formatting window is a dropdown list Ti In Figure 46 the window shows Automatic meaning the list includes Ip only styles applied automatically by OOo You can choose to show all styles or other groups of styles for example only custom styles New Style from Selection Update Style Load Styles Fill Format Mode Heading 10 Heading 2 Mean Figure 46 The Styles and Formatting window for Writer showing paragraph styles Using Fill Format mode Use Fill Format to apply a style to many different areas quickly without having to go back to the Styles and Formatting window and double click every time This method is quite useful when you need to format many scattered paragraphs cells or other items with the same style 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window and select the style you want to apply 2 Click the Fill Format mode icon A 3 To apply a paragraph page or frame style hover the mouse over the paragraph page or frame and click To apply a character style hold down the mouse button while selecting the characters Clicking on a word applies the character style for tha
304. lates gt Organize from the main menu The Template Management dialog opens All the actions made by the Commands button in the Template Note Management dialog can be made as well by right clicking on the templates or the folders Creating a template folder To create a template folder 1 In the Template Management dialog click any folder 2 Click the Commands button and choose New from the drop down menu A new folder called Untitled appears 3 Type a name for the new folder and then press Enter OOo saves the folder with the name that you entered Deleting a template folder You cannot delete template folders supplied with OOo or installed using the Extension Manager you can only delete template folders that you have created To delete a template folder that you have created 1 In the Template Management dialog select the folder that you want to delete 2 Click the Commands button and choose Delete from the drop down menu A message box appears and asks you to confirm the deletion Click Yes Moving a template To move a template from one template folder to another template folder 1 In the Template Management dialog double click the folder that contains the template you want to move A list of the templates contained in that folder appears underneath the folder name 2 Click the template that you want to move and drag it to the desired folder If you do not have the authority to delete templates from the source fo
305. lc dates and times 124 fill series 125 Fill tool 125 numbers 123 numbers as text 124 selection lists 127 sharing content 127 speeding up 124 text 123 validating cell contents 127 data source description 202 editing 231 linking 230 registering 230 using in OOo documents 232 viewing 231 data validity 127 database AutoValue 209 creating 204 creating tables 205 field types and formats 206 list table 213 planning 203 primary key 205 208 210 registering 230 Report Wizard 246 Table Wizard 205 tables 205 database form activation order 229 background 227 creating in Design View 229 creating using a Wizard 215 entering data 235 modifying 218 subform 216 tab order 229 database reports creating 245 modifying 250 static 245 database table create using wizard 205 dynamic 248 joined fields 217 relationships 213 DataPilot Tools 356 date conversion automatic 124 default file format 47 default formatting 161 169 default template 70 deleting files 25 derivative markup Math 264 Design View Base creating a new table 209 creating forms 229 creating queries 239 dictionaries installing 51 dictionary 87 different first page 73 digital rights management DRM 282 digital signature 287 DIM 326 dispatch framework 331 dispatch helper 327 distorting animage 196 divide document into chapters 74 dockable window 20 document closing 29 create from template 65 creating 23 opening 23 Starting new 23 document status option 34
306. lder this action copies the template instead of moving it 72 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Deleting a template You cannot delete templates supplied with OOo or installed using the Extension Manager you can only delete templates that you have created or imported To delete a template 1 In the Template Management dialog double click the folder that contains the template you want to delete A list of the templates contained in that folder appears underneath the folder name 2 Click the template that you want to delete 3 Click the Commands button and choose Delete from the drop down menu A message box appears and asks you to confirm the deletion Click Yes Importing a template If the template that you want to use is in a different location you must import it into an OOo template folder To import a template into a template folder 1 Inthe Template Management dialog select the folder into which you want to import the template 2 Click the Commands button and choose Import Template from the drop down menu A standard file browser window opens 3 Find and select the template that you want to import and click Open The file browser window closes and the template appears in the selected folder 4 If you want type a new name for the template and then press Enter Exporting a template To export a template from a template folder to another location 1 In the Template Management dialog double click the
307. lds fit the maintenance area Date of service odometer reading type of service cost of service and next scheduled service of this type for example for oil changes list when the next oil change should be But it would be nice if there was a way to write notes So a field for notes was added to the list What fields fit the vacations area Date odometer reading fuel including all the fields of the fuel table food including meals and snacks motel total tolls and miscellaneous Since these purchases are made by one of two bank cards or with cash I want a field to state which payment type was used for each item What fields fit into the food category Breakfast lunch supper and snacks seem to fit Do I list all the snacks individually or list the total cost for snacks for the day I chose to divide snacks into two fields number of snacks and total cost of snacks I also need a payment type for each of these breakfast lunch supper and total cost of Snacks What are the fields that are common to more than one area Date appears in all of the areas as does odometer reading and payment type How will I use this information about these three fields While on vacation I want the expenses for each day to be listed together The date fields suggest a relationship between the vacation table and the dates in each of these tables fuel and food This means that the date fields in these tables will be linked as we create the database
308. le is not in use before deletion Otherwise all objects with that style will return to the default style and retain their A formatting as manual formatting This can be a problem in a long document If the style is not in use you receive a confirmation message click Yes 64 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Using a template to create a document To use a template to create a document 1 From the main menu choose File gt New gt Templates and Documents The Templates and Documents dialog opens 2 In the box on the left click the Templates icon if it is not already selected A list of template folders appears in the center box 3 Double click the folder that contains the template that you want to use A list of all the templates contained in that folder appears in the center box 4 Select the template that you want to use You can preview the selected template or view the template s properties e To preview the template click the Preview icon template appears in the box on the right e To view the template s properties click the Document Properties icon A preview of the E The template s properties appear in the box on the right 5 Click Open The Templates and Documents dialog closes and a new document based on the selected template opens in OOo You can then edit and save the new document just as you would any other document Templates and Documents Business Correspondence BE
309. leting a single column or row above Working with sheets Like any other Calc element sheets can be inserted deleted and renamed Inserting new sheets There are several ways to insert a new sheet The first step for all of the methods is to select the sheets that the new sheet will be inserted next to Then any of the following options can be used e Choose Insert gt Sheet from the menu bar e Right click on the sheet tab and choose Insert Sheet e Click in an empty space at the end of the line of sheet tabs Click here to insert a new sheet Inactive Sheet Inactive Sheet2 Figure 100 Creating a new sheet Active Sheet Fl Each method will open the Insert Sheet dialog Figure 101 Here you can select whether the new sheet is to go before or after the selected sheet and how many sheets you want to insert If you are inserting only one sheet there is the opportunity to give the sheet a name 118 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Insert Sheet Position Before current sheet After current sheet Cancel Sheet Help New sheet Mo of sheets 1 Mame Sheet4 From file Figure 101 Insert Sheet dialog Deleting sheets Sheets can be deleted individually or in groups Single sheet Right click on the tab of the sheet you want to delete and choose Delete Sheet from the pop up menu or chose Edit gt Sheet gt Delete from the menu bar Multiple sheets T
310. letters and numbers These are the column and row headers The columns start at A and go on to the right and the rows start at 1 and go down These column and row headers form the cell references that appear in the Name Box on the Formula Bar Figure 90 You can turn these headers off by selecting View gt Column amp Row Headers Sheet tabs At the bottom of the grid of cells are the sheet tabs These tabs enable access to each individual sheet with the visible active sheet having a white tab From Calc 3 3 you can choose colors for the different sheet tabs Clicking on another sheet tab displays that sheet and its tab turns white You can also select multiple sheet tabs at once by holding down the Control key while you click the names Status bar At the very bottom of the Calc window is the status bar which provides information about the spreadsheet and convenient ways to quickly change some of its features Most of the fields are similar to those in other components of OOo see Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org in this book and Chapter 1 Introducing Calc in the Calc Guide Sheet 1 3 Default INSRT STD Sheet Page Insert Selection Unsaved number style mode mode changes Figure 91 Left end of Calc status bar Sum 0 gt amp 100 I Digital Cell or object Zoom Zoom signature information slider percent Figure 92 Right end of Calc status bar Opening and saving CSV files Chapter 1 In
311. list Click Add to select recipients From a different list IF you do not have an 6 Edit document address list you can create one by clicking Create 7 Personalize document Your recipients are currently selected From 6 Save print or send address test Addresses Figure 279 Selecting an address list 4 Back on the Select address list page click Next On the Create salutation page deselect This document should contain a salutation Mail Merge Wizard Steps Create a salutation 1 Select starting document This document should contain a salutation z Select document type 3 Select address list Dear Mrs lt Last Name gt Dear Mr lt Last Mame 6 Edit document 7 Personalize document 5 Save print or send Figure 280 Deselecting a salutation 5 In the left hand list click 8 Save print or send OOo displays a Creating documents message and then displays the Save print or send page of the Wizard 6 Select Send merged document as E Mail The lower part of the page changes to show e mail settings choices 286 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Mail Merge Wizard Steps Save print or send the document 1 Select starting document Select one of the options below 2 Select document type Save starting document 3 Select address list Save merged document Print merged document 4 Create salutation E Mail settings m Edit doc
312. listed as a choice in the File Type drop down list in the File gt Open dialog Best results can be achieved with the PDF ODF hybrid file format which this extension also enables A hybrid PDF ODF file is a PDF file that contains an embedded ODF source file Hybrid PDF ODF files will be opened in OpenOffice org as an ODF file without any layout changes Non hybrid PDF documents open in Draw Depending on the complexity of the layout changes may be easy or difficult to make and the saved result may or may not preserve the original layout Font substitution may occur 356 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Documents with more sophisticated layouts such as those created with professional desktop publishing applications that use special fonts and complex vector graphics are not suitable for the PDF Import Extension Similarly longer documents gt 20 pages may cause some performance and stability problems Presenter Console Provides extra control over slide shows presentations for example the presenter has ability to see the upcoming slide the slide notes and a presentation timer while the audience sees only the current slide The Presenter Console displays the elements in three easily changeable views e The first view displays the current slide including the effects and the upcoming slide The second view shows the speaker s notes in large clear and scalable type plus the current and upcoming slide e The thir
313. lists Now select the desired shortcut keys in the Shortcut keys list and click the Modify button at the upper right Click OK to accept the change Now the chosen shortcut keys will execute the function chosen in step 3 above whenever they are pressed All existing shortcut keys for the currently selected Function are listed in the Keys selection box If the Keys list is empty it indicates that the chosen key combination is free for use If it were not and you wanted to Note reassign a shortcut key combination that is already in use you must first delete the existing key Shortcut keys that are greyed out in the listing on the Customize dialog such as F1 and F10 are not available for reassignment Example Assigning styles to shortcut keys You can configure shortcut keys to quickly assign styles in your document Some shortcuts are predefined such as Ctrl 0 for the Text body paragraph style Ctrl 1 for the Heading 1 style and Ctrl 2 for Heading 2 You can modify these shortcuts and create your own 1 2 3 4 Click Tools gt Customize gt Keyboard The Keyboard page of the Customize dialog Figure 321 opens To have the shortcut key assignment available only with one component for example Writer select that component s name in the upper right corner of the page otherwise select OpenOffice org button to make it available to every component Choose the shortcut keys you want to assign a style to In this e
314. lists while for normal text boxes an additional step is required to create a bulleted list Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 161 Creating lists in AutoLayout text boxes Every text box included in the available layouts is already formatted as a bulleted list therefore to create a bulleted list the only necessary steps are 1 From the Layout pane choose a slide design that contains a text box Those are easily recognizable from the thumbnail 2 Click in the text box that reads Click to add an outline 3 Type the text then press Enter to start a new bulleted line The methods for switching between bulleted and numbered lists are explained in Changing the appearance of the list on page 162 Press Shift Enter to start a new line without creating a new bullet or number The new line will have the same indentation of the previous Tip line To switch off bullets altogether click the bullets button on the text formatting toolbar If the text formatting toolbar is not showing enable it selecting View gt Toolbar gt Formatting in the menu bar Creating lists in other text boxes To create a list in a text box follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the text box i 2 Click the Bullets On Off button on the text formatting toolbar If the text formatting toolbar is not showing enable it by selecting View gt Toolbar gt Formatting from the menu bar 3 Type the text and press Enter to start a new bulleted line
315. lor table edit an existing color and define new colors These colors are stored in your color palette and are then available in all components of OOo Properties Name Blue8 Add Color L Blue Modify Color table a laa E EENEN EHEH loo aa i _ Saae EERE Figure 26 Defining colors to use in color palettes in OOo Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 39 To modify a color 1 Select the color to modify from the list or the color table 2 Enter the new values that define the color If necessary change the settings from RGB Red Green Blue to CMYK Cyan Magenta Yellow Black or vice versa The changed color appears in the lower of the two color preview boxes at the top 3 Modify the Name as required 4 Click the Modify button The newly defined color is now listed in the Color table Alternatively click the Edit button to open the Color dialog shown in Figure 27 Here you can select a color from one of the color windows in the upper area or you can enter values in the lower area using your choice of RGB CMYK or HSB Hue Saturation and Brightness values The upper right color window is linked directly with the color input fields in the lower area as you choose a color in
316. ls from the menu bar or press Ctrl 1 On the Alignment tab Figure 114 under Properties select Wrap text automatically and click OK The results are shown in Figure 115 Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 129 Cell Protection Borders Background Font Effects Alignment Numbers Text alignment Horizontal ine Vertical lw Opt Text orientation i Degrees L Vertically stacked i e F jo gt ABCD 2 F Reference edge Ar Wee Figure 114 Format Cells gt Alignment dialog This cell is not set to wrap text automatically So they text will just keep going and goir This cell is set to wrap text automatically The cell will fit more text without getting wider Figure 115 Automatic text wrap Using manual line breaks To insert a manual line break while typing in a cell press Ctrl Enter This method does not work with the cursor in the input line When editing text first double click the cell then single click at the position where you want the line break When a manual line break is entered the cell width does not change Figure 116 Shows the results of using two manual line breaks after the first line of text This line contains manual litte breaks Lines can be spaced out this way Also the cell width doesnt change but the text can go on C Figure 11
317. lusion and preserve minority languages threatened by being on the wrong side of the digital divide The OpenOffice org community invites contributors Whatever you do best you can do it for OpenOffice org As well as software developers the Community welcomes translators artists technical writers and editors testers people offering user support sales and marketing people lobbyists donors the list is long The Community operates internationally in all time zones linked by the internet How is OpenOffice org licensed OpenOffice org is distributed under the Open Source Initiative OSI approved Lesser General Public License LGPL The LGPL can be viewed on the OOo website at http www openoffice org licenses Igpl license html For more general information on OOo s licensing please refer to http www openoffice org license html 364 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 What is open source The four essential rights of open source software are embodied within the Free Software Foundation s General Public License GPL e The right to use the software for any purpose e Freedom to redistribute the software for free or for a fee e Access to the complete source code of the program that is the blueprints e The right to modify any part of the source or use portions of it in other programs The basic idea behind open source is very simple When programmers can read redistribute and modify the so
318. mats BMP JPEG JPG PCX PSD SGV WMF DXF MET PGM RAS SVM XBM EMF PBM PLT SDA TGA XPM EPS PCD PNG SDD TIF TIFF GIF PCT PPM SGF VOR Opening formula files In addition to OpenDocument Formula odf files Math 3 can open the format used by OOo 1 x sxm StarMath smf and MathML mml files When opening a Word document that contains an embedded equation editor object if the option for it MathType to OpenOffice org Math OpenOffice org to MathType is checked in Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt Microsoft Office the object will be automatically converted to an OpenOffice org Math object 368 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 File formats OOo can save to Saving in an OpenDocument format guarantees the correct rendering of the file when it is transferred to another person or when the file is re opened with a later version of OpenOffice org It is strongly recommended that you use ODF as default file format However you can save files in other formats if you wish When sharing a document that you do not expect or want the recipient to modify the safest option is to convert the document to PDF OpenOffice org provides a very straightforward way to convert documents to PDF See Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E Mailing in this book Tip Saving text documents In addition to OpenDocument formats odt and ott Writer 3 can save in these formats OpenOffice org 1 x Text Document sxw OpenOffice org
319. ment into chapters In a similar way you can divide a document into chapters Each chapter might start with the First Page style with the following pages using the Default page style as above At the end of the chapter insert a manual page break and specify the next page to have the First Page style to start the next chapter as shown in Figure 59 Default Figure 59 Dividing a document into chapters using page styles Changing page orientation within a document A Writer document can contain pages in more than one orientation A common scenario is to have a landscape page in the middle of a document whereas the other pages are in a portrait orientation This can also be done with page breaks and page styles Different headers on right and left pages Page styles can be set up to have the facing left and right pages mirrored or only right first pages of chapters are often defined to be right page only or only left When you insert a header on a page style set up for mirrored pages or right and left pages you can have the contents of the header be the same on all pages or be different on the right and left pages For example you can put the page number on the left hand edge of the left pages and on the right hand edge of the right pages put the document title on the right hand page only or make other changes 74 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Controlling page breaks automatically Writer automatically flows text f
320. more about the support options for OOo at http support openoffice org index html Paid support and training Alternatively you can pay for support services Service contracts can be purchased from a vendor or consulting firm specializing in OpenOffice org A list of independent consultants and the services they offer listed alphabetically by region and then by country is provided on the OpenOffice org website http bizdev openoffice org consultants html Starting OpenOffice org The most common way to launch any component of OOo is by using the system menu the standard menu from which most applications are started On Windows it is called the Start menu On GNOME it is called the Applications menu On KDE it is identified by the KDE logo On Mac OS X it is the Applications menu When OOo was installed on your computer in most cases a menu entry for each component was added to your system menu If you are using a Mac see note below The exact name and location of these menu entries depend on the operating system and graphical user interface Note for Mac users You should see the OpenOffice org icon in the Applications folder When you double click this icon OpenOffice org opens at the Start Center Figure 10 Starting from an existing document You can start OOo by double clicking the filename of an OOo document in a file manager such as Windows Explorer The appropriate component of OOo will start and the document will b
321. n Save the document Going the other way from embedded to linked is not so easy you Note must delete and reinsert each image one at a time selecting the Link option when you do so Edit Links Xx Source file Element calc autoformat bmp lt All formats gt Graphic calc delete bmp lt All formats gt Graphic sort lists 1 bmp lt All formats gt Graphic Source file file D aaaa calc autoformat bmp Element lt All formats gt Type Graphic Update Figure 283 The Edit Links dialog Inserting an image from the clipboard Using the clipboard you can copy images into an OOo document from another OOo document and from other programs To do this 1 2 3 4 5 6 Open both the source document and the target document In the source document select the image to be copied Move the mouse pointer over the selected image and press Control C to copy the image to the clipboard Switch to the target document Click to place the cursor where the graphic is to be inserted Press Control V to insert the image Caution Ifthe application from which the graphic was copied is closed before the A be lost graphic is pasted into the target the image stored on the clipboard could 292 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Inserting an image using a scanner If a scanner is connected to your computer OOo can call the scanning application and inserted the scanned item into the OOo document as a
322. n STD until it changes to BLK Pagel 1 Default English USA INSRT Now highlight the selection using mouse or keyboard as shown below January March April June July September October December Figure 69 Selecting a vertical block of text Cutting copying and pasting text Cutting and copying text in Writer is similar to cutting and copying text in other applications You can use the mouse or the keyboard for these operations You can copy or move text within a document or between documents by dragging or by using menu selections icons or keyboard shortcuts You can also copy text from other sources such as Web pages and paste it into a Writer document To move cut and paste selected text using the mouse drag it to the new location and release it To copy selected text hold down the Control key while dragging The text retains the formatting it had before dragging When you paste text the result depends on the source of the text and how you paste it If you click on the Paste icon any formatting the text has such as bold or italics is retained Text pasted from Web sites and other sources may also be placed into frames or tables If you do not like the results click the Undo icon or press Control Z To make the pasted text take on the formatting of the surrounding text where it is being pasted choose either e Edit gt Paste Special or e Click the triangle to the right of the Paste icon
323. n be split either horizontally or vertically or both You can therefore have up to four portions of the spreadsheet in view at any one time Why would you want to do this Imagine you have a large spreadsheet and one of the cells has a number in it which is used by three formulas in other cells Using the split screen technique you can position the cell containing the number in one section and each of the cells with formulas in the other sections Then you can change the number in the cell and watch how it affects each of the formulas Heta 3 2000 AQ 0 1000 Beta A0 1 AD 0 2880 Beta A1 1 A1 0 6562 Beta tA2 1 A2 0 7219 Heta As t1 As 0 6424 Beta Aa Ad 0 7351 Beta AS 1 A5 0 6231 Beta Ab i AB 0 7515 BetatAr i A7 0 5975 Beta tAg di AS 0 7696 Beta tAg 1 A9 0 5675 Figure 103 Split screen example Splitting the screen horizontally To split the screen horizontally 1 Move the mouse pointer into the vertical scroll bar on the right hand side of the screen and place it over the small button at the top with the black triangle Immediately above this button you will see a thick black line n Figure 104 Split screen bar on vertical scroll bar Split screen bar 2 Move the mouse pointer over this line and it turns into a line with two arrows Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 121 i Figure 105 Split screen bar on vertical scroll bar with cursor 3 Hold down the left mouse
324. n existing menu select it in the Menu list and click the Menu button to drop down a list of modifications Move Rename Delete Not all of these modifications can be applied to all the entries in the Menu list For example Rename and Delete are not available for the menus supplied by OOo To move a menu such as File choose Menu gt Move A dialog similar to the one Shown in Figure 315 but without the Menu name box opens Use the up and down arrow buttons to move the menu into the required position To move submenus such as File Send select the main menu File in the Menu list and then in the Menu Content section of the dialog select the submenu Send in the Entries list and use the arrow keys to move it up or down in the sequence In addition to renaming you can specify a keyboard shortcut that allows you to select a menu command when you press A t an underlined letter in a menu command 1 Select a menu entry 2 Click the Modify button and select Rename 3 Add a tilde in front of the letter that you want to use as an accelerator For example to select the Save All command by pressing Alt V after opening the File menu using A t F enter Sa ve ALL Caution Be careful when using these shortcuts In the example above if the File menu is not already open then pressing Alt V opens the View menu if some other menu is open Alt V might activate some other command Adding a command to a menu You can add commands
325. n exporting to Text CSV Navigating within spreadsheets Calc provides many ways to navigate within a spreadsheet from cell to cell and sheet to sheet You can generally use whatever method you prefer Going to a particular cell Using the mouse Place the mouse pointer over the cell and click Using a cell reference Click on the little inverted black triangle just to the right of the Name Box Figure 90 The existing cell reference will be highlighted Type the cell reference of the Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 111 cell you want to go to and press Enter Or just click into the Name box backspace over the existing cell reference and type in the cell reference you want and press Enter Using the Navigator To open the Navigator click its icon on the Standard toolbar or press F5 or choose View gt Navigator on the Menu bar or double click on the Sheet Sequence Number Sheet1 3 in the Status Bar Type the cell reference into the top two fields labeled Column and Row and press Enter In Figure 95 the Navigator would select cell A7 You can dock the Navigator to either side of the main Calc window or leave it floating To dock or float the Navigator hold down the Control key and double click in an empty area near the icons in the Navigator dialog g Navigator Column Row 7 7 E Sheets Sheet1 Sheet Sheet3 g Range names gt amp Database Ranges P Linked areas ay Graphics Graphics 1 ib OLE object
326. n image To start this procedure place the cursor where you want the graphic to be inserted and chooe Insert gt Picture gt Scan gt Select Source Although this practice is quick and easy it is unlikely to result in a high quality image of the correct size You may get better results by scanned material into a graphics program and cleaning it up there before inserting the resulting image into OOo Inserting an image from the Gallery The Gallery provides a convenient way to group reusable objects such as graphics and sounds that you can insert into your documents The Gallery is available in all components of OOo See Managing the OpenOffice org Gallery on page 294 You can copy or link an object from the Gallery into a document To insert an object 1 Choose Tools gt Gallery or click the Gallery icon EJ on the Standard toolbar in Writer and Calc or the Drawing toolbar in Impress and Draw 2 Select a theme 3 Select an object with a single click 4 Drag and drop the image into the document See Figure 284 You can also right click on the object and choose Insert gt Copy File Edit View Insert Format Tools Slide Show Window Help D x Zeuc i Ten Color C Blue 8 Bullets e Homepage a My Theme W Rulers ol pi a Sounds PNT gt a eS E 3 Normal Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorter p m D gt T 1
327. n the presentation it is best to modify the slide master or choose a different slide master as explained in the section Working with slide masters and styles on page 166 If all you need to do is to change the background you can take a shortcut 1 Select Format gt Page and go to the Background tab 2 Select the desired background between solid color gradient hatching and bitmap 3 Click OK to apply it A dialog box will open asking if the background should be applied to all the slides If you click yes Impress will automatically modify the slide master for you Inserting and correctly formatting a background is beyond the scope of Note this chapter but you can find all the information you need in Chapter 4 of the Draw Guide or in Chapter 6 of the Impress Guide 158 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Modifying the slide show By default the slide show will display all the slides in the same order as they appear in the slide sorter without any transition between slides and you need some keyboard or mouse interaction to move from one slide to the next You can use the Slide Show menu to change the order of the slides choose which ones are shown automate moving from one slide to the next and other settings To change the slide transition animate slides add a soundtrack to the presentation and make other enhancements you need to use functions in the Task pane See the Impress Guide for details on how to use all of thes
328. nd cell protection Graphics styles in drawings and presentations include line area shadowing transparency font connectors dimensioning and other attributes Presentation styles include attributes for font indents spacing alignment and tabs Different styles are available in the various components of OOo as listed in Table 1 OpenOffice org comes with many predefined styles You can use the styles as provided modify them or create new styles as described in this chapter Table 1 Styles available in OOo components Page Cell Paragraph Character Frame Numbering Presentation X X Graphics included in X X X xs x NM KM MK Frame styles App lying styles OpenOffice org provides several ways for you to select styles to apply Using the Styles and Formatting window 1 2 3 Click the Styles and Formatting icon E located at the left hand end of the object bar or click Format gt Styles and Formatting or press F11 The Styles and Formatting window shows the types of styles available for the OOo component you are using Figure 46 shows the window for Writer with Page Styles visible You can move this window to a convenient position on the screen or dock it to an edge hold down the Ctrl key and drag it by the title bar to where you want it docked Click on one of the icons at the top left of the Styles and Formatting window to display a list of styles in a particu
329. nd edit the macro that was just created Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic to open the OpenOffice org Basic Macros dialog see Figure 302 Select the new macro and click Edit to open the macro in the Basic IDE Integrated Development Environment Listing 4 Generated EnterMyname macro Sub Main End Sub sub EnterMyName rem rem define variables dim document as object dim dispatcher as object rem rem get access to the document document ThisComponent CurrentController Frame dispatcher createUnoService com sun star frame DispatchHelper rem dim args1 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyVaLlue args1 0 Name Text args1 0 Value Andrew Pitonyak 326 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 argsl end sub The macro in Listing 4 is not as complicated as it first appears Learning a few things helps significantly in understanding the generated macros The discussion starts with features near the top of the macro listing and describes them If you like to avoid details then simply change the text Andrew Pitonyak in the macro above to what you want to insert at the current cursor position Comments start with REM The key
330. nd the third column the description The desired work is easily accomplished for every row except for DONTKNOW and NORMAL which do not contain a numeric value but I know that the values are 0 and 100 so I will enter those manually The data can be cleaned in multiple ways all of them easy The first example uses keystrokes that assume the cursor is at the start of the line with the text THIN 1 Use Tools gt Macros gt Record Macro to start recording 2 Press Ctril Right Arrow to move the cursor to the start of specifies 3 Press Backspace twice to remove the tab and the space 4 Press Tab to add the tab without the space after the constant name 5 Press Delete to delete the lower case s and then press S to add an upper case S 6 Press Ctrl Right Arrow twice to move the cursor to the start of the number 7 Press Ctrl Shift Right Arrow to select and move the cursor before the sign 8 Press Ctrl C to copy the selected text to the clipboard 9 Press End to move the cursor to the end of the line 10 Press Backspace twice to remove the two trailing spaces 11 Press Home to move the cursor to the start of the line 12 Press Ctrl V to paste the selected number to the start of the line 13 Pasting the value also pasted an extra space so press Backspace to remove the extra space Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 329 14 Press Tab to insert a tab between the number and the name 15 Press Home to move to the s
331. new functions that act like normal built in functions e New components and functionality which normally include some level of UI integration such as new menus or toolbars e Data pilots that are used directly in Calc e Chart Add Ins with new chart types e Linguistic components such as spell checkers e Document templates and images Although individual extensions can be found in different places there is an extension repository at http extensions services openoffice org For more about obtaining and installing extensions see Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org Writing macros without the recorder The examples covered in this chapter are created using the macro recorder and the dispatcher You can also write macros that directly access the objects that comprise OpenOffice org In other words you can directly manipulate a document Directly manipulating OOo s internal objects is an advanced topic that is beyond the scope of this chapter A simple example however demonstrates how this works Listing 7 Append the text Hello to the current document Sub AppendHello Dim oDoc Dim sTextService Dim oCurs REM ThisComponent refers to the currently active document oDoc ThisComponent REM Verify that this is a text document STextService com sun star text TextDocument If NOT oDoc supportsService sTextService Then 342 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 MsgBox This macro only works with a text docum
332. ng Cross fading transforms a shape from one form to another The result is a new group of objects including the start and end points and the intermediate steps To carry out a cross fade first select two objects hold the Shift key while selecting each object in turn and then choose Edit gt Cross fading On the Cross fading dialog choose the number of increments transition steps You probably want to have Cross fade attributes and Same orientation both checked The end result is shown in Figure 174 Settings Increments 16 E kai Cross fade attributes same orientation Figure 174 Cross fading example Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 197 Combining multiple objects Using Draw you can combine drawing objects together in two distinct ways grouping and combining These two methods allow you to treat multiple objects as one unit or to merge objects to form a new shape Grouping is like putting objects in a container You can move them as a group and apply global changes to them A group can always be undone and the objects that make up the group can always be manipulated separately A combination is a permanent fusion of objects leading to a new object The original objects are no longer available as individual entities and the operation is not reversible Grouping by common selection When several objects are selected any operations you carry out are applied to all of the objects For example
333. nge After defining a print range you can add more cells to it This allows multiple separate areas of the same sheet to be printed while not printing the whole sheet After you have defined a print range 1 Highlight the range of cells to be added to the print range 2 Choose Format gt Print Ranges gt Add This adds the extra cells to the print range The page break lines no longer display on the screen The additional print range will print as a separate page even if both Note ranges are on the same sheet Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 137 Removing a print range It may become necessary to remove a defined print range for example if the whole sheet needs to be printed later Choose Format gt Print Ranges gt Remove This removes all defined print ranges on the sheet After the print range is removed the default page break lines will appear on the screen Editing a print range At any time you can directly edit the print range for example to remove or resize part of the print range Choose Format gt Print Ranges gt Edit Selecting the page order details and scale To select the page order details and scale to be printed 1 Choose Format gt Page from the main menu 2 Select the Sheet tab 3 Make your selections and then click OK Page Style Default x Organizer Page Borders Background Header Footer Sheet E Left to right then down First page number 1 Print _
334. nt 66 create using wizard 67 deleting 73 description 56 editing 68 exporting 73 Extension Manager 69 folders 72 update document styles from 68 Template Changer extension 356 Template Management dialog 62 templates importing 73 text bulleted or numbered list 161 default formatting 161 formatting pasted text 161 outline level 162 pasting 160 text boundaries show hide 44 text box AutoLayout 159 162 creating 159 moving 173 vertical alignment of text 160 text box tool 159 text documents opening 366 Text Formatting toolbar 161 text in Draw 185 theme deleting 295 themes 293 themes Gallery 295 toolbar icons macros 338 378 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 toolbars 148 adding commands 349 choosing icons for commands 350 Color Bar 178 creating 349 customizing 20 displaying or hiding 18 Draw 177 Drawing 178 Fontwork 300 Line and Filling toolbar 177 moving 19 Options Bar Draw 178 overview 18 Show or hide icons 20 tooltips 33 157 track changes 100 transparency 195 196 two digit years 34 typing errors autocorrect 124 U undo change 28 undoing groups 198 unformatted text pasting 161 ungrouping 198 unit of measurement 176 unsaved changes flag 78 URL Recognition 308 user data options 32 user guides 14 user interface options 35 user interface parts of 22 user specific settings 46 V validating cell contents Calc 127 variables in macros 326 VBA properties load save options 48 vecto
335. nt the document from this view click the Print document icon 4 to open the Print dialog 3 Choose the print options and click the Print button Exporting to PDF OpenOffice org can export documents to PDF Portable Document Format This industry standard file format is ideal for sending the file to someone else to view using Adobe Reader or other PDF viewers The process and dialogs are the same for Writer Calc Impress and Draw with a few minor differences mentioned in this section Quick export to PDF mg Click the Export Directly as PDF icon to export the entire document using your default PDF settings You are asked to enter the file name and location for the PDF file but you do not get a chance to choose a page range the image compression or other options Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 277 Controlling PDF content and quality For more control over the content and quality of the resulting PDF use File gt Export as PDF The PDF Options dialog opens This dialog has five pages General Initial View User Interface Links and Security Select the appropriate settings and then click Export Then you are asked to enter the location and file name of the PDF to be created and click Save to export the file General page of PDF Options dialog On the General page you can choose which pages to include in the PDF the type of compression to use for images which affects the quality of images in the
336. ntaining the data to be edited Removing data from a cell Data can be removed deleted from a cell in several ways Removing data only The data alone can be removed from a cell without removing any of the formatting of the cell Click in the cell to select it and then press the Backspace key Removing data and formatting The data and the formatting can be removed from a cell at the same time Press the Delete key or right click and choose Delete Contents or use Edit gt Delete Contents to open the Delete Contents dialog From this dialog the different aspects of the cell can be deleted To delete everything in a cell contents and format check Delete all j Delete Contents selection O A Text Cancel Numbers Help DO ox Date amp time Formulas Notes E Formats E Objects Figure 113 Delete Contents dialog Replacing all the data in a cell To remove data and insert new data simply type over the old data The new data will retain the original formatting 128 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Changing part of the data in a cell Sometimes it is necessary to change the contents of cell without removing all of the contents for example if the phrase See Dick run is in a cell and it needs to be changed to See Dick run fast It is often useful to do this without deleting the old cell contents first The process is the similar to the one described above but you need to place the cur
337. ntil this black vertical line is located where you want the slide to be moved Selecting and moving groups of slides To select a group of slides use one of these methods e Use the Control Ctrl key Click on the first slide and while keeping the Control key pressed select the other desired slides e Use the Shift key Click on the first slide and while pressing the Shift key click on the final slide in the group This selects all of the other slides in between the first and the last e Use the mouse Click slightly to the left of the first slide to be selected Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse pointer to a spot slightly to the right of the last slide to be included You can also do this right to left A dashed outline of a rectangle forms as you drag the cursor through the slide thumbnails and a thick border is drawn around each of the selected slides Make sure the rectangle includes all the slides you want to select To move a group of slides 1 Select the group 2 Drag and drop the group to their new location A vertical black line appears to Show you where the group of slides will go Working in Slide Sorter view You can work with slides in the Slide Sorter view just as you can in the Slide pane To make changes right click a slide and choose any of the following from the pop up menu e Add anew slide after the selected slide e Rename or delete the selected slide e Change the slide layout e Change
338. nts anori AASA ERENER EENE EAEEREN NATEN 174 Ya E DN a E E E EERE 175 Tbe Draw workspa aC s s risciriiererisnrsinerisipaiadar oniar oradan ianen en ANIR E Rrr iari sina 175 Choosing and denma COO carra E 178 Positioning objects with snap functionS esessesseeessesressecssresseesseesreeseeeseeresereeeee 179 Positioning objects with guiding lines seesssesseesseesseesreessssrereessesereeeseseeressseree 181 Pe paoe Tawm DEE eE EEA 182 Drawing geometric ShapOSerenrisrisriressisrints orisii tand toNS iNNi ea eacecence re tewweeieuadecsimareiens 187 Be aarti rasa EE ENEE AEE en EEE NR EE 189 Be TC ODOC iS ersa EAT 190 Moving and dynamically adjusting an object s SIZE eee cc cece ec eeececeeceeeeneeneens 191 PCS EEA E EE E EEE 193 OCS ale G0 dl ETET E EE S ET TE eee ETE IA A E A TE E T 195 e UE ol E 1 EEEE E A AE E E ee A ee E E E E E E ATT 195 Combining multiple objects ssssesseeseressressesseessseesseesersseeseersseseeeesssserereseeereeees 198 Aids for positioning objects eessssseessesseesreeseresersseresersserssersecrsserseeesereserseseeserees 199 JFelcs oi mahal seen Cele cdiling PICT OS Senne ean nerika E ETE EETA 199 Lely are r Baly E EINT AT ST A T PEATE ENSE EIEEE T EEEE E ON 199 5 487 8 N O OR ar AT 199 Adding comments to a drawing ssessssssesesseesereseressersereserssecrersssecreesserereessseeeee 200 Chapter 8 Getting Started with BDaSG esesssssscrrenisrekirirorkttekektktis ierit ER E EREN
339. ntwork options as shown in Figure 294 The contents of this toolbar vary depending on the OOo component with which it is being used Creating a Fontwork object 1 On the Drawing or Fontwork toolbar click the Fontwork Gallery icon Al If the Drawing toolbar is not visible go to View gt Toolbars gt Drawing to display it 2 In the Fontwork Gallery Figure 290 select a Fontwork style then click OK The Fontwork object will appear in your document Notice the blue squares around the edge indicating that the object is selected and the yellow dot these are discussed in Moving and resizing Fontwork objects on page 306 Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 301 Fontwork Gallery Select a Fontwork style ao FOntwo Fonok Fontal gonw panik pontuar ui Fonok Figure 290 The Fontwork Gallery 3 Double click the object to edit the Fontwork text Type your own text in place of the black Fontwork text that appears over the object Figure 291 D Figure 291 Editing Fontwork text 4 Click anywhere in a free space or press Esc to apply your changes Editing a Fontwork object Now that the Fontwork object is created you can edit some of its attributes To do this you can use the Fontwork toolbar the Formatting toolbar or menu options as described in this section If the selected Fontwork object is a 3D object you can also use the 3D Settings toolbar 302 Getting Started with O
340. nu customization All documents in OpenOffice org OOo are based on templates You can create a specific template for any document type text spreadsheet drawing presentation If you do not specify a template when you start a new document then the document is based on the default template for that type of document If you have not specified a default template OOo uses the blank template for that type of document that is installed with OOo See Setting a default template on page 70 for more information What are styles A style is a set of formats that you can apply to selected pages text frames and other elements in your document to quickly change their appearance When you apply a style you apply a whole group of formats at the same time Many people manually format paragraphs words tables page layouts and other parts of their documents without paying any attention to styles They are used to writing documents according to physical attributes For example you might specify the font family font size and any formatting such as bold or italic Styles are logical attributes Using styles means that you stop saying font size 14pt Times New Roman bold centered and you start saying Title because you have defined the Title style to have those characteristics In other words styles means that you shift the emphasis from what the text or page or other element looks like to what the text is Styles help
341. nu you want to open For example Alt T opens the menu Tools Alt lt gt Alt lt gt lt gt Opens a menu item where lt gt is the underlined character of the menu you want to open and lt gt is the item within that menu For example Alt T G opens the Gallery menu item in the menu Tools Closes an open menu Controlling dialogs When you open any dialog one element such as a button an option field an entry in a list box or a checkbox is highlighted or indicated by a dotted box around the field or button name This element is said to have the focus on it Enter ESC Spacebar Up down arrow keys Right left arrow keys Tab Shift Tab Alt Down Arrow Activates selected button In most cases where no button is selected Enter is equivalent to clicking OK Closes dialog without saving any changes made while it was open In most cases Esc is equivalent to clicking Cancel When an open drop down list is selected Esc closes the list Checks an empty checkbox Clears a checked checkbox Moves focus up and down a list Increases or decreases value of a variable Moves focus vertically within a section of dialog Moves focus horizontally within a section of a dialog Advances focus to the next section or element of a dialog Returns focus to the previous section or element in a dialog Shows items in a drop down list Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Get
342. nually remove personal information from specific documents deselect this option and then use the Delete button under File gt Properties gt General Ctri click required to follow hyperlinks In older versions of OOo clicking on a hyperlink in a document opened the linked document Now you can choose whether to keep this behavior by unchecking this box Many people find creation and editing of documents easier when accidental clicks on links do not activate the links The other options on this dialog should be self explanatory 42 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Security options and wamings Security warnings Warn if document contains recorded changes versions hidden information or notes L When saving or sending When signing L When printing L When creating PDF files Security options Remove personal information on saving Recommend password protection on saving Ctri click required to follow hyperlinks Figure 30 Security options and warnings dialog Appearance options Writing editing and especially page layout are often easier when you can see the page margins text boundaries the boundaries of tables and sections in Writer documents page breaks in Calc grid lines in Draw or Writer and other features In addition you might prefer to use colors that are different from OOo s defaults for such items as note indicators or field shadings On the OpenOffice org Appearance page you can sp
343. o delete multiple sheets select them as described earlier then either right click over one of the tabs and select Delete Sheet from the pop up menu or choose Edit gt Sheet gt Delete from the menu bar Renaming sheets The default name for the a new sheet is SheetX where X is a number While this works for a small spreadsheet with only a few sheets it becomes awkward when there are many sheets To give a sheet a more meaningful name you can e Enter the name in the Name box when you create the sheet or e Right click on a sheet tab and choose Rename Sheet from the pop up menu replace the existing name with a better one e Double click on a sheet tab to pop up the Rename Sheet dialog Sheet names must start with either a letter or a number Apart from the first character of the sheet name allowed characters are letters Note numbers spaces and the underline character Attempting to rename a sheet with an invalid name will produce an error message Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 119 Viewing Calc Using zoom Use the zoom function to change the view to show more or fewer cells in the window For more about zoom see Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org in this book Freezing rows and columns Freezing locks a number of rows at the top of a spreadsheet or a number of columns on the left of a spreadsheet or both Then when scrolling around within the sheet any frozen columns and rows remain in view Figure 102
344. o open the Form Design toolbar Figure 208 or choose View gt Toolbars gt Form Design to open this toolbar 3 Click the Activation Order icon circled 228 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Ee MER Bm ee Figure 208 Form Design toolbar with Activation Order icon circled 4 Rearrange the order of the fields in the Tab Order window a Find the txtMPayment listing near the bottom of the list and click it b Click the Move Up button until txtPayment is just below fmtMotel c Use the same two steps to put the fields in the same order as in Figure 209 Click OK Controls Move Up imtOdometer imtMotel txtMPayment imtT alls imiMiscellaneous MiscPayment imtBreaktfast Move Down Automatic Sort Cancel Hi W ttMiscNotes Help Figure 209 Tab order for the main form 5 Save and close the form 6 Save the database Creating forms and subforms in Design View This method requires using the Form Controls and Form Design toolbars extensively These techniques are beyond the scope of this document Instructions for creating forms using Design view will be described in the Database Guide Accessing other data sources OpenOffice org allows data sources to be accessed and then linked into OOo documents For example a mail merge links an external document containing a list of names and addresses into a letter with one copy of the letter being generated for each entry To access a data source that
345. o the start of the Line dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToStartOfLine 0 Array rem 12 Press Ctrl V to paste the selected number to the start of the Line dispatcher executeDispatch document uno Paste 0 Array rem 13 Press Backspace to remove the extra space dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array rem 14 Press Tab to insert a tab between the number and the name dim args17 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyVaLue args17 0 Name Text args17 0 Value CHR 9 dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 args17 rem 15 Press Home to move to the start of the Line dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToStartOfLine 0 Array rem 16 Press down arrow to move to the next Line dim args19 1 aS new com sun star beans PropertyVaLue args19 0 Name Count args19 0 Value 1 args19 1 Name Select args19 1 Value false dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoDown 0 args19 end sub Cursor movements are used for all operations as opposed to searching If run on the DONTKNOW line the word weight is moved to the front of the line and the first The is changed to She This is not perfect but I should not have run the macro on the lines that did not have the proper format I need to do these manually Running the macro quickly It is tedious to repeatedly run the macro using Tools gt
346. of cells then use this option 136 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Copy sort results to Sets a spreadsheet address to which to copy the sort results If a range is specified that does not have the necessary number of cells then cells are added If a range contains cells that already have content then the sort fails Custom sort order Select the box then choose one of the sort orders defined in Tools gt Options gt Spreadsheet gt Sort Lists from the drop down list Direction Sets whether rows or columns are sorted The default is to sort by columns unless the selected cells are in a single column Printing Printing from Calc is much the same as printing from other OOo components see Chapter 10 but some details are different especially regarding preparation for printing Using print ranges Print ranges have several uses including printing only a specific part of the data or printing selected rows or columns on every page For more about using print ranges see Chapter 6 Printing Exporting and E mailing in the Calc Guide Defining a print range To define a new print range or modify an existing print range 1 Highlight the range of cells that comprise the print range 2 Choose Format gt Print Ranges gt Define The page break lines display on the screen You can check the print range by using File gt Page Preview OOo will only display the cells in the print range Tip Adding to the print ra
347. of paper To do this 1 In the Print dialog select the Page Layout tab Figure 266 amp Print Pa x General OpenOffice org Writer Page Layout Options Layout ee a Order left to right then down 1 2 ac eee Draw a border around each page at 5D O Brochure Page sides Include All pages All pages Back sides left pages Front sides right pages Figure 266 Printing multiple page per sheet of paper 2 In the Layout section select from the drop down list the number of pages to print per sheet The preview panel on the left of the Print dialog shows how the printed document will look When printing more than 2 pages per sheet you can choose the order in which they are printing across and down the paper The two pictures below show the difference General OpenOffice org Writer Page Layout Options Layout G eane nachas 1 2 Order left to right then down v 34 F Draw a border left to right then down g top to bottom then right 270 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Layout E E Order top to bottom then right 2 A O Draw a border left to right then down top to bottom then right 3 In the Page sides section select whether to print all pages or only some pages 4 Click the Print button In Writer to print two pages per sheet in facing pages book layout style print from Print Preview instead See page 276 Tip Selecting pages sheets slides to
348. om Tools gt Spelling and Grammar See Chapter 14 for more about installing extensions Language Tool adds a new menu item and submenu to the Tools menu from which you can configure the tool and check or recheck the document Using built in language tools Writer provides some tools that make your work easier if you mix multiple languages within the same document or if you write documents in various languages The main advantage of changing the language is that you can then use the correct dictionaries to check spelling and apply the localized versions of Autocorrect replacement tables thesaurus and hyphenation rules You can also set the language for a paragraph or a group of characters as None This option is especially useful when you insert text such as web addresses or programming language snippets that you do not want to check for spelling Specifying the language in character and paragraph styles is the preferred method because styles allow a greater level of control and make changing the language much faster On the Font tab of the Paragraph Styles dialog you can specify that certain paragraphs be checked in a language that is different from the language of the rest of the document See Chapter 7 Working with Styles in the Writer Guide for information on how to manage the language settings of a style You can set the language for the whole document for individual paragraphs or even for individual words and characters all f
349. om lines but with angles of 45 or 90 degrees between them Freeform line With this tool you can draw just like with a pencil Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse It is not necessary to end the drawing with a double click Just release the mouse button and the drawing is completed If you have selected Freeform Line Filled the end point is joined automatically to the start point and the object is filled with the appropriate color Curves and filled curves For a description of the handling of curves and filled curves see Chapter 10 Advanced Draw Techniques in the Draw Guide Writing text Use the Text tool T to write text and select the font color size and other attributes Click at the location where you want to position the text or click and drag to create a larger text frame Press Enter to move the cursor to the next line When you have finished typing text click outside the text frame Double click on the text at any time to edit it When you use the Text tool the Text formatting toolbar is visible it includes the usual paragraph attributes indents first line and tab stops You can create Graphics styles that you can reuse for other text frames Select Format gt Styles and Formatting or press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window Graphics styles affect all of the text within a text frame To style parts of the text use direct formatting with the toolbar Chapter 7 Getting Started with D
350. omatic correction of typing errors replacement of straight quotation marks by curly custom quotes and starting cell content with an uppercase capital letter are controlled by Tools gt AutoCorrect Options Go to the Custom Quotes Options or Replace tabs to deactivate any of the features that you do not want On the Replace tab you can also delete unwanted word pairs and add new ones as required AutoInput When you are typing in a cell Calc automatically suggests matching input found in the same column To turn the AutoInput on and off set or remove the check mark in front of Tools gt Cell Contents gt AutolInput SAutomatic date conversion Calc automatically converts certain entries to dates To ensure that an entry that looks like a date is interpreted as text type an apostrophe at the beginning of the entry The apostrophe is not displayed in the cell Speeding up data entry Entering data into a spreadsheet can be very labor intensive but Calc provides several tools for removing some of the drudgery from input The most basic ability is to drop and drag the contents of one cell to another with a mouse Calc also includes several other tools for automating input especially of repetitive material They include the Fill tool selection lists and the ability to input information into multiple sheets of the same document 124 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Using the Fill tool on cells At its simplest the Fill
351. omization options use the down arrow at the end of the toolbar or on its title bar Toolbar customization icons 120 E fe YB Figure 5 Customizing toolbars To show or hide icons defined for the selected toolbar choose Visible Buttons from the drop down menu Visible icons are indicated by an outline around the icon Click on icons to select or deselect them Visible Buttons Customize Toolbar Dock Toolbar Dock All Toolbars amp Load URL New i New Degene From Template Open w Lock Toolbar Position Save Visible icons Close Toolbar Save As Documents E mail E Edit File Figure 6 Selection of visible toolbar icons Right click context menus You can quickly access many menu functions by right clicking on a paragraph graphics or other object A context menu will pop up Often the context menu is the fastest and an easier way to reach a function If you are not sure where a function is located in the menus or toolbars you can often find it by right clicking 20 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Status bar The status bar is located at the bottom of the workspace It provides information about the document and convenient ways to quickly change some features It is Similar in Writer Calc Impress and Draw although each component includes some component specific items Page 3 14 Default English U54 INSRT Page style Language Insert Selection Unsaved P
352. oolbar To use a drawing tool 1 2 3 4 5 Click in the document where you want the drawing to be anchored You can change the anchor later if necessary Choose the tool from the Drawing toolbar Figure 287 The mouse pointer changes to a drawing functions pointer 2 Move the cross hair pointer to the place in the document where you want the graphic to appear and then click and drag to create the drawing object Release the mouse button The selected drawing function remains active so you can draw another object of the same type To cancel the selected drawing function press the Esc key or click on the Select icon the arrow on the Drawing toolbar You can now change the properties fill color line type and weight anchoring and others of the drawing object using either the Drawing Object Properties toolbar Figure 288 or the choices and dialogs reached by right clicking on the drawing object Set or change properties for drawing objects To set the properties for a drawing object before you draw it 1 2 3 On the Drawing toolbar Figure 287 click the Select tool On the Drawing Object Properties toolbar Figure 288 click on the icon for each property and select the value you want for that property For more control or to define new attributes you can click on the Area or Line icons on the toolbar to display detailed dialogs Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 299 C l B
353. oose different styles and color combinations You can browse to a background image and icon set from the Gallery Click Next Web Wizard Steps Select a style for the table of contents page Introduction Documents o Main layout Layout details Web site information Preview Style Background image Icon set water lt no background image gt lt no icon seb gt Choose The icon set is used For presentations in HTML Format Document Creation Date Last Change Date Filename 6 Enter general information such as Title and HTML Metadata information Click Next Web Wizard Steps 0s Enter general information for your web site Introduction Documents Main layout Layout details Style Web site information Preview 7 Chose where to Title HTML Metadata Description E mail Copyright notice Created Modified Test Website Test Data 26 05 05 26 05 05 Cancel save the file and preview the page if you wish Click Finish 316 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 i A Web Wizard Steps Where do you want to publish your web site Introduction Click Preview to see a preview in your browser Documents Preview Main layout Publish the new web site To a local Folder Layout details C Documents and Settings Jean Hollis weberi DocumentsiMy Websites Style To a ZIP archive Web site information E Previe
354. operties dialog or you will apply the exact same values to both the label and field For example if you enter the values for a new position both the field and the label moves to the same position and the field is positioned on top of the label Then you have to move each of them to where you want them To open the Properties window right click a control and select Control from the pop up menu Or you can click the Control icon in the Form Note Controls toolbar Just be careful and use Control Z to undo any mistakes you may make Detailed instructions on how to use the Properties window will be in the Base Guide 222 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Step 6 Replace fields with other fields We want to replace the PaymentType field with a List Box Then we can choose the type of payment from the Payment Type table rather than having to manually enter the type In my case each of my payment types begins with a different letter If I enter the first letter of the payment type the rest of the word automatically appears I can then go to the next field 1 Control click the Payment field for Breakfast The green handles appear around the field but not around the Label Breakfast Payment er o o Figure 197 Selecting a field of a control 2 Right click within the green handles and select Replace with gt List Box 3 Click the Control icon in the Form Controls toolbar to open the Properties List Box dialog 4 On
355. or working with these files Appendix B Open Source Open Standards OpenDocument 367 Opening spreadsheets In addition to OpenDocument formats ods and ots Calc 3 can open the formats used by OOo 1 x sxc and stc and the following spreadsheet formats Microsoft Excel 97 2000 XP xls xlw and xlt Microsoft Excel 4 x 5 0 95 xls xlw and xlt Microsoft Excel 2003 XML xml Microsoft Excel 2007 XML xlsx xlsm xlts xltm Microsoft Excel 2007 binary xlsb Lotus 1 2 3 wk1 wks and 123 Data Interchange Format dif Rich Text Format rtf Text CSV csv and txt StarCalc formats sdc and vor dBASE dbf SYLK slk Unified Office Format spreadsheet uos uof HTML Document htm and html files including Web page queries Pocket Excel px Quattro Pro 6 0 wb2 Opening presentations In addition to OpenDocument formats odp odg and otp Impress 3 can open the formats used by OOo 1 x sxi and sti and the following presentation formats Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP ppt and pot Microsoft PowerPoint 2007 pptx pptm potx potm StarDraw and Starlmpress sda sdd sdp and vor Unified Office Format presentation uop uof CGM Computer Graphics Metafile cgm Portable Document Format pdf Opening graphic files In addition to OpenDocument formats odg and otg Draw 3 can open the formats used by OOo 1 x sxd and std and the following graphic for
356. or fuel data pressing the Tab key in the last field would save all of the fields clear them and make the form ready to accept data on the second record Since we have a subform form using the Tab key places the cursor in the first Date field of the subform with the date automatically entered to match the Date field of the main form The FuelCost FuelQuantity and Odometer fields are numerical fields The Payment field is a dropdown list Enter the data just as you did in the main form and use the Tab key to go to the next field When you use the Tab key to leave the Payment field it goes to the Date field of the next line and automatically enters the date Now you can enter your second set of fuel data for this day To move to another record when the form has a subform click any of the fields of the main form In this case click the Date field of the main form Then use the directional arrows at the bottom There are four of them from left to right First Record Previous Record Next Record and Last Record Figure 215 To the right of these arrows is the New Record icon To create a new record while in another record in the main form click either the Next Record icon or the New Record icon The number in the Record box is the number of the record whose data is Ti shown in the form nR If you know the number of the record you want you can enter it into the record box and then press Enter to take you to that record 236 Gett
357. or to the left of which the new column or row is inserted Single column or row Using the Insert menu 1 Select the cell column or row where you want the new column or row inserted 2 Choose either Insert gt Columns or Insert gt Rows Using the mouse 1 Select the cell column or row where you want the new column or row inserted 2 Right click the header of the column or row 3 Choose Insert Rows or Insert Columns Multiple columns or rows Multiple columns or rows can be inserted at once rather than inserting them one ata time 1 Highlight the required number of columns or rows by holding down the left mouse button on the first one and then dragging across the required number of identifiers 2 Proceed as for inserting a single column or row above Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 117 Deleting columns and rows Columns and rows can be deleted individually or in groups Single column or row A single column or row can only be deleted by using the mouse 1 Select the column or row to be deleted 2 Right click on the column or row header 3 Select Delete Columns or Delete Rows from the pop up menu Multiple columns or rows Multiple columns or rows can be deleted at once rather than deleting them one ata time 1 Highlight the required number of columns or rows by holding down the left mouse button on the first one and then dragging across the required number of identifiers 2 Proceed as for de
358. ores 104 Chapter 5 AT ea a a AEE EENE EE E E E EEE OS 105 E E E A E bude E EAE E EEEE EEE EE E ES 106 Spreadsheets sheets and CeIIS cece cece ececcececeeeeecnseceseeceseeseneeseeseenteeseeseessenes 106 Pario ortho main atic vein KEKENAN ARE KEENE ETE EAE 107 Opening and saving Gere ke a lt 1 ae nee ee eee a iE a AREE a ene eee 109 Navigating Within SpreadsSheets cccccceccccecncececencecececensensensensensessesseseeceeseeses 111 Selecting items in a Sheet or Spreadsheet ccccececececcececececencececcecseceeceeceesensens 115 Working with columns and PWS occa ve siccacananepsacaaieiueuvedenivereavepsackeoraxeemeriavendisnciei 117 Working with scsi preeeaaeneceetemnynnasanseeevarimeessanyenseresreouinieesctmesvoncigeeeerseaweeaes 118 BAe hie 1012 1g Gi cae tee nme E ee ee ee Renn ee ae eee eee eee 120 Entering data using the Rey DOA cc seks dencbatesscasscreducrsanodcainsedoccecstovescervescsecadmeeniants 123 opooding up data asc cetreent gcse ners eset sue Ea 124 Sharing content between SHEEAUGS ccccececececcncecececeneececesensetecesenseceeneeseceeeesees 127 Oe sacra cater EE sone pease ES A E A A E E 127 PVCS Cee ice tenn E E EE abieatenceeaueensnenseetan EE EA 128 Ba E E easy sn geese saan EE ET A 129 A toformatting ETO oll soweh ks incl 4 alc hs tooth eee en oie eeepc een een rE aN EE 133 Formatting spreadsheets using theMes ccccccecececececesencececensececeseseseeceeseess 134 4
359. ors to an object Connectors are lines or arrows whose ends automatically dock to gluepoints on an object When you move the other object the connector moves with it Connectors are particularly useful for making organizational charts You can reorganize the blocks of your chart and all the connected objects stay connected 186 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Figure 167 shows two Draw objects and a connector Figure 167 A connector between two objects Draw offers a range of different connectors and connector functions Open the floating Connector toolbar by clicking on the arrow next to the Connector icon e For more about connectors and gluepoints see Chapter 9 Organization Charts Flow Diagrams and More in the Draw Guide Drawing geometric shapes Geometric shapes include basic shapes symbol shapes block arrows flowcharts callouts and stars Figure 168 shows part of the Drawing toolbar with the icons referred to in the following sections Clicking on the arrow next to the icon opens a floating toolbar with the relevant work tools Ti The use of all these tools is similar to that of the Rectangle tool even Ip though they produce different geometric shapes G B P Figure 168 Part of the main Drawing toolbar Basic shapes The Basic Shapes icon makes available the range of Basic Shapes T x tools for drawing basic shapes including a rectangular tool g c identical to the one on the m
360. orts Using data sources in Writer and Calc Data can be placed into Writer and Calc documents from the tables in the data source window In Writer values from individual fields can be inserted Or a complete table can be created in the Writer document One common way to use a data source is to perform a mail merge Choosing Tools gt Mail Merge Wizard or clicking on the Mail Merge icon on the View Data Source pane launches the Mail Merge wizard which steps you through creating a mail merge document See Chapter 11 in the Writer Guide Tip Writer documents To insert a field from a table opened in the data source window into a Writer document click on the field name the gray square at the top of the field list and with the left mouse button held down drag the field onto the document In a Writer document it will appear as lt FIELD gt where FIELD is the name of the field you dragged For example to enter the cost of meals and who paid for them on a certain date of a vacation 1 Open the list of data sources F4 and select the Vacations table in the Automobile database 2 Use this sentence On date our breakfast cost amount paid by name our lunch cost amount paid by name and our supper cost amount paid by name But only type On our breakfast cost paid by our lunch cost paid by and our supper cost paid by 3 To replace date click the field name Date in the data source window and d
361. osing options for al of O10 Mae nee re een meer ee ert ero een enn OE tees ones ne enero re 32 Choosing options for loading and Saving COCUMENLMG ccccececeeeeeececeeneeceneeens 46 Choosing language settings oceans ree eniec vi kintuni rar NE EEANN NA EEEa 51 Choosing Internet OP ONS i icccacecaseesnnscsesuvcssenensseeraw cosseuereenaanegnnseuereneeewieciiieec peers 53 Controlling UO Ss AutoC OIC Or UnC ONS sessir E 54 Chapter 3 Using Siyles and ag cects tre tcdareaieeasen al vsti ue iniii ii oiiaii Eri inai ni 95 bi earch sgilog cm foi 10 6 1310 ot eee ee tee eee NCE eee Teme Mere EEEE E werren 56 a Suc EE E ant Tn nents ern nee 56 PTY a E E E EAA A santas o7 Mading Cy ch serer nn nee ee Sere ene e eee er ne ere 59 eA new CUSTOM Siye senar EAEAN EAE 61 Braye aaa aa mO E erarnan ir ne ere ee nee ete EE AAEE EAEN 62 E E eE nA AEREE EE EE ge re reno E I E E TE E T 64 Using a template to create a document eessssseesssessecsreesseeseeesereseessersreeresseeeeeesse 65 Da E EE E E EE S A E E E T N E N E IE T N E TT 66 aMn eR he cece NTETE T E EEN PEE N I E E AT IE E T 68 Adding templates using the Extension M anagEf cccceccscecececteccecsecseceeceeseues 69 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 3 Setting a default BOTA CO icc csiateenctcasanaaetvensacteaceden ened stesieeaeed coeceaswesendenctacasedhiorenenees 70 Associating a document with a different template cece ccc eceececceceeceeceeeeees 71
362. ou might save Impress templates under the Presentations Category To learn more about template folders see Organizing templates on page 72 6 Click OK to save the new template Templates a Mew template Templates Cancel abteqories Templates Help My Templates Presentation Backgrounds Edit Presentations Organizer Figure 54 Saving a new template Any settings that can be added to or modified in a document can be saved ina template For example below are some of the settings although not a full list that can be included in a Writer document and then saved as a template for later use e Printer settings which printer single sided double sided and paper size and so on e Styles to be used including character page frame numbering and paragraph styles e Format and settings regarding indexes tables bibliographies table of contents Templates can also contain predefined text saving you from having to type it every time you create a new document For example a letter template may contain your name address and salutation 66 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 You can also save menu and toolbar customizations in templates see Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org for more information Creating a template using a wizard You can use wizards to create templates for letters faxes agendas presentations and Web pages For example the Fax Wizard guides you through the follo
363. ou want to duplicate a slide you have already inserted To do so select the slide you want to duplicate from the Slides pane and then choose Insert gt Duplicate Slide Selecting a layout In the Tasks pane select the Layout drawer to display the available layouts The Layouts differ in the number of elements a slide will contain spanning from the empty slide Blank Slide to a slide with 6 contents boxes and a title Title 6 contents Layouts Figure 142 Available slide layouts Text and graphic elements can be readjusted at any time during the preparation of the presentation but changing the layout of a slide that already contains some contents can have a dramatic effect It is therefore recommended that you pay particular attention to the layout you select If you do need to change the layout after contents have been added the contents are not lost though they may need to be reformatted Note 156 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 The Title Slide which also contains a section for a subtitle or Title Only are suitable layouts for the first slide while for most of the slides you will probably use the Title Contents layout If you do not know the names for the prepackaged layouts position the cursor on an icon in the Layout section and its name will be displayed in a small rectangle The small rectangle is called tooltip If the tooltips are not enabled select Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Genera
364. ove the selected object behind the others Change Anchor icon Choose between anchoring options e To Page The object keeps the same position in relation to the page margins It does not move as you add or delete text e To Paragraph The object is associated with a paragraph and moves with the paragraph It may be placed in the margin or another location e To Character The object is associated with a character but is not in the text sequence It moves with the paragraph but may be placed in the margin or another location This method is similar to anchoring to a paragraph Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 305 e As Character The object is placed in the document like any character and moves with the paragraph as you add or delete text before the object Ungroup icon Ungroup the selected objects so you can manage them individually Group icon Group the selected objects so you can manage them as a single object Using menu options You can use some the choices on the Format menu to anchor align arrange and group selected Fontwork objects wrap text around them and flip them horizontally and vertically You can also right click on a Fontwork object and choose many of the same options from the pop up menu The pop up menu also provides quick access to the Line Area Text and Position and Size dialogs The Text dialog offers only a few options for Fontwork objects and is not discussed here On the Posi
365. ox placed in PaymentType and a graphic background Using the Wizard to create a form We will use the Form Wizard to create a Vacations form which will contain a form and a subform In the main database window Figure 175 click the Forms icon in the left column In the Tasks list double click Use Wizard to Create Form to open the Form Wizard Figure 188 Simple forms require only some of these steps while more complex forms may use all of them Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 215 Step 1 Select fields 1 Under Tables or queries select Table Vacations Available fields lists the fields for the Vacations table 2 Click the right double arrow to move all of these fields to the Fields in the form list Click Next Select the fields of your form Tables or queries Table Vacations F Available fields Fields in the form Date Odometer Breakfast Lunch Supper Motel Tolls BPayment LPayment H Figure 188 Form Wizard steps Step 2 Set up a subform Since we have already created a relationship between the Fuel and Vacations tables we will use that relationship If no relationship had been defined this would be done in step 4 1 Click the box labeled Add Subform 2 Click Subform based upon existing relation 3 Fuelis listed as a relation we want to add So click Fuel to highlight it as in Figure 189 Click Next Decide if you want to set up a subform w Add Subform Subform
366. peat type the columns in the text entry box under Columns to repeat For example to repeat column A type A In the Columns to repeat list none changes to user defined 3 Click OK You do not need to select the entire range of the rows to be repeated Note selecting one cell in each row works Page breaks While defining a print range can be a powerful tool it may sometimes be necessary to manually adjust Calc s printout To do this you can use a manual break A manual break helps to ensure that your data prints properly You can insert a horizontal page break above or a vertical page break to the left of the active cell Inserting a page break To insert a page break 1 Navigate to the cell where the page break will begin 2 Select Insert gt Manual Break 3 Select Row Break or Column Break depending on your need The break is now set Row break Selecting Row Break creates a page break above the selected cell For example if the active cell is H15 then the break is created between rows 14 and 15 Column break Selecting Column Break creates a page break to the left of the selected cell For example if the active cell is H15 then the break is created between columns G and H 140 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 To see page break lines more easily on screen you can change their Tip color Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Appearance and scroll down to the Spreadsheet section
367. penOffice org 3 3 Using the Fontwork toolbar Make sure that the Fontwork toolbar shown in Figure 289 is visible If you do not see it go to View gt Toolbars gt Fontwork Click on the different icons to edit Fontwork objects i Fontwork Shape Edits the shape of the Fontwork x a selected object You can choose from a eS aa A palette of shapes i ek O A o 0 ur AVP dav Ld tela AvOCIOS Awl OS Figure 292 Fontwork toolbar showing palette of shapes Fontwork Same Letter Heights Changes the height of characters in the Ad object Toggles between normal height some characters taller than others for example capital letters d h and others and all letters the same height Pome FOOI Figure 293 Left normal letters right same letter heights Fontwork Alignment Changes the alignment of sa I characters Choices are left align center right align word justify and stretch justify The effects of the text Left Align alignment can only be seen if the text spans over two or more lines In the stretch justify mode all the lines are center filled completely hh 4 Right Align Word Justify Stretch Justify Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 303 AV v Fontwork Character Spacing Changes the character E spacing and kerning in the object For custom spacing input a percentage value 100 is normal spacing less than 100 is tight spacin
368. penOitice org OOo is both a software product and a communtiy of volunteers who produce and support the software T Because someone else owns the trademark OpenOifce the corect Note name for both the open source project and its software is OpenOffice ang 4 The OpenOffice org software is a freely available full featured office productivity suite E you have used previous versions of OpenOfice org you might want to look ower the new features lists at http Aww openoiiice orgidey docs features S 0 http Awww openotice orgidey docs features 3 1 http iw ww openoiiice org dey docsfeatures 3 2 amd http w vw openoiice orgidew docs features 3 4 0000 s native file format is OpenDocument an open standard format that is being adopted by governments worldwide as a required file format for publishing and accepting documents OOo can also open and save documents in many other formats including those used by several versions of Microsoft Office T Oo includes the following components 7 Writer word amp Print General OpenOffice org Writer _ Page Layout Options Printer Lexmark E232 b Details Properties Range and copies All pages Number of copies i 3 1 2 Pages Collate AA Sax Selection Print Cancel other co a B a M M E i Figure 267 Printing a selection of text Calc You can choose single sheets multiple sheets and selections of cells for pr
369. place automatic generation of tables of contents and indexes mail merge and others Writer provides these important features e Templates and styles see Chapter 3 e Page layout methods including frames columns and tables e Embedding or linking of graphics spreadsheets and other objects e Built in drawing tools e Master documents to group a collection of documents into a single document e Change tracking during revisions e Database integration including a bibliography database e Export to PDF including bookmarks see Chapter 10 e And many more These features are covered in detail in the Writer Guide The Writer interface The main Writer workspace is shown in Figure 60 The menus and toolbars are described in Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org Some other features of the Writer interface are covered in this chapter File Edit Viewginsert Format Table Tools Window Help Standard tool bar Formatting tool bar F Pi 3 gt Pagel 1 Default English USA INSRT SID E ami A Figure 60 The main Writer workspace in Print Layout view Status bar The Writer status bar provides information about the document and convenient ways to quickly change some document features Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 77 Page 3 14 Default English U55 INSRT STD Pagenumber Pagestyle Language Insert Selection Unsaved mode mode changes Figure 61 Left end of status bar
370. ppear faded as in Figure 88 Selecting items in a sheet or spreadsheet Selecting cells Cells can be selected in a variety of combinations and quantities Single cell Left click in the cell The result will look like the left side of Figure 96 You can verify your selection by looking in the Name box Range of contiguous cells A range of cells can be selected using the keyboard or the mouse To select a range of cells by dragging the mouse 1 Click in a cell 2 Press and hold down the left mouse button 3 Move the mouse around the screen 4 Once the desired block of cells is highlighted release the left mouse button To select a range of cells without dragging the mouse 1 Click in the cell which is to be one corner of the range of cells 2 Move the mouse to the opposite corner of the range of cells 3 Hold down the Shift key and click To select a range of cells without using the mouse 1 Select the cell that will be one of the corners in the range of cells 2 While holding down the Shift key use the cursor arrows to select the rest of the range The result of any of these methods looks like the right side of Figure 96 You can also directly select a range of cells using the Name box Click into the Name Box as described in Using a cell reference on page 111 To select a range of cells enter the cell reference for the upper Tip left hand cell followed by a colon and then the lower right hand cell referenc
371. print In addition to printing a full document you can choose to print individual pages Sheets slides ranges of pages sheets slides or a selection of a document The details vary slightly in Writer Calc Draw and Impress as described in this section Writer Printing an individual page 1 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 2 On the Print dialog select the page to print a In the Ranges and copies section of the General page select the Pages option b Enter the sequence number of the page you want to print The preview box changes to show the selected page If you have restarted page numbering within the document the sequence number is not the same as the page number 3 Click the Print button Printing a range of pages 1 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 2 On the Print dialog select the range of pages to print a In the Ranges and copies section of the General page select the Pages option b Enter the sequence numbers of the pages to print for example 1 4 or 1 3 7 11 3 Click the Print button Printing a selection of text 1 In the document select the material text and graphics to print 2 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 3 The Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog now includes a Selection option and the preview box shows the selected material See Figure 267 4 Click the Print button Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 271 What is OpenOffice org q O
372. ps 1 Download an extension package and save it anywhere on your computer 2 In OOo select Tools gt Extension Manager from the menu bar In the Extension Manager dialog click Add 3 A file browser window opens Find and select the package of templates you want to install and click Open The package begins installing You may be asked to accept a license agreement 4 When the package installation is complete the templates are available for use through File gt New gt Templates and Documents and the extension is listed in the Extension Manager Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 69 Extension Manager English spelling and hyphenation dictionaries and thesaurus 2009 05 08 ise ES French Classic and Reform 1990 spelling thesaurus and hyphen 3 4 1 Dicollecte os Professional Template Pack II English 1 0 Sun Microsystems The second template pack by Sun Microsystems provides more than 120 professionally designed document spreadsheet presentation and database templates For professional and stunning looking documents and presentations Spanish spelling dictionary 2008 07 01 Temnlate Channer 175 Get more extensions online Check For Updates Figure 57 Newly added package of templates Setting a default template If you create a document by choosing File gt New gt Text Document or Spreadsheet Presentation or Drawing from the main menu OOo creates the document from the Default template fo
373. ptions gt Options and selecting the URL Recognition option If you do not want OOo to convert a specific URL to a hyperlink choose Edit gt Undo Insert from the menu bar or press Control Z immediately after the formatting has been applied To change the color of hyperlinks go to Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Appearance scroll to Unvisited links and or Visited links pick the new colors and click OK Caution this will change the color for all hyperlinks in all components of OpenOffice org this may not Tip be what you want In Writer and Calc but not Draw or Impress you can also change the Internet link character style or define and apply new styles to selected links You can also insert hyperlinks using the Navigator and the Hyperlink dialog and you can modify all hyperlinks using the Hyperlink dialog as described in this section Using the Navigator The easiest way to insert a hyperlink to another part of the same document is by using the Navigator 1 Open the documents containing the items you want to cross reference 1 pit Fy 2 Open the Navigator by clicking its icon by choosing View gt Navigator or by pressing F5 3 Click the arrow next to the Drag Mode icon and choose Insert as Hyperlink See Figure 296 4 In the list at the bottom of the Navigator select the document containing the item that you want to cross reference 5 In the Navigator list select the item that you want to
374. r 0 18cm MB Gray Figure 126 Header Footer Border Background 142 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Setting the contents of the header or footer The header or footer of a Calc spreadsheet has three columns for text Each column can have different contents To set the contents of the header or footer click the Edit button in the header or footer dialog shown in Figure 125 to display the dialog shown in Figure 127 Header Page Style Default Left area Center area Right area Test Left sheet 24 10 2008 08 59 55 Header Figure 127 Edit contents of header or footer Areas Each area in the header or footer is independent and can have different information in it Header You can select from several preset choices in the Header drop down list or specify a custom header using the buttons below the area boxes To format a footer the choices are the same Custom header Click in the area Left Center Right that you want to customize then use the buttons to add elements or change text attributes Opens the Text Attributes dialog Inserts the total number of pages Inserts the File Name field Inserts the Date field Inserts the Sheet Name field Inserts the Time field Inserts the current page number Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 143 m OpenOffice org 3 Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress Presentations in OpenOffice org 144 What ts Impress
375. r 600 dpi depending on the capability of the printer Higher dpi settings greatly increase the size of the exported file EPS Encapsulated PostScript images with embedded previews are Note exported only as previews EPS images without embedded previews are exported as empty placeholders General section PDF A 1a PDF A is an ISO standard for long term preservation of documents by embedding all the information necessary for faithful reproduction such as fonts while forbidding other elements including forms security and encryption PDF tags are written If you select PDF A 1a the forbidden elements are greyed out not available Tagged PDF Tagged PDF contains information about the structure of the document s contents This can help to display the document on devices with different screens and when using screen reader software Some tags that are exported are table of contents hyperlinks and controls This option can increase file sizes significantly Create PDF form Submit format Choose the format of submitting forms from within the PDF file This setting overrides the control s URL property that you set in the document There is only one common setting valid for the whole PDF document PDF sends the whole document FDF sends the control contents HTML and XML Most often you will choose the PDF format Export bookmarks Exports headings in Writer documents and page names in Impress and Draw documents as boo
376. r Table at Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Colors If you know how to create custom colors you can use them You can also use a picture graphic file as the background If you choose a dark background you many need to change many of the labels and headings so they can be seen 1 Select the labels of the top row of controls a b C d Control click the Date label Control shift click the rest of the labels of the top row The border will gradually grow to the right as you do this until all the labels are enclosed in it Date Odometer Tolls Motel Payment Misc Misc Payment N _ A ee A AN A _ AMVs Re Figure 205 Selecting multiple labels at one time Click the Control icon in the Design Form toolbar to open the Properties dialog Change the Background color selection from Default to Light cyan This is a dropdown list Close the Properties dialog 2 Select the other labels in the same way and then change their background color 3 To change the font color for the headings a b C d Open Styles and Formatting using the F11 key Make sure the Paragraph icon is selected at the left end of the icons in Figure 206 Right click the Heading 2 style to open a pop up window and select Modify from this menu In the Paragraph Style Heading 2 dialog click the Font Effects tab Change Font color from Automatic to Light Cyan SZDES at Complimentary close Default F
377. r graphics 175 vertical alignment of text 160 vertical block of text select 83 view options 35 W Web Layout 311 web page export Calc spreadsheets 316 Impress presentations 316 Web wizard Writer 312 Writer documents 312 wildcards 84 windows dockable floating 20 wizard form database 215 presentation 153 query database 237 report database 246 table database 205 web 312 workspace Draw 175 workspace views Impress 149 Writer document views 79 features 77 Navigation icons 80 Navigation toolbar 80 status bar 77 workspace 77 zoom 79 80 X XML 47 Y year two digits 34 Z zoom 79 80 Index 379
378. r that type of document You can however set a custom template to be the default You can reset the default later if you choose Setting a custom template as the default You can set any template to be the default as long as it is in one of the folders displayed in the Template Management dialog To set a custom template as the default 1 From the main menu choose File gt Templates gt Organize The Template Management dialog opens 2 In the box on the left select the folder containing the template that you want to set as the default then select the template 3 Click the Commands button and choose Set As Default Template from the drop down menu The next time that you create a document by choosing File gt New the document will be created from this template Although many important settings can be changed in the Options dialog see Chapter 2 for example default fonts and page size more advanced settings such as page margins can only be changed by replacing the default template with a new one 70 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Resetting the default template To re enable OOo s Default template for a document type as the default 1 In the Template Management dialog click any folder in the box on the left 2 Click the Commands button and choose Reset Default Template from the drop down menu The next time that you create a document by choosing File gt New the document will be created from OOo
379. r to keep any macros in Microsoft Office documents that are opened in OpenOffice org Microsoft Word 97 2000 XP Load Basic code a m a z Lo 5 E mm mt W i mi m EL m Microsoft Excel 97 2000 XP W Load Basic code Executable code Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP V Load Basic code Save original Basic code Figure 37 Choosing Load Save VBA Properties e If you choose Save original Basic code the macros will not work in OOo but are retained if you save the file into Microsoft Office format e If you choose Load Basic code to edit the changed code is saved in an OOo document but is not retained if you save into a Microsoft Office format e Ifyou are importing a Microsoft Excel file containing VBA code you can select the option Executable code Whereas normally the code is preserved but rendered inactive if you inspect it with the StarBasic IDE you will notice that it is all commented with this option the code is ready to be executed Microsoft Office Load Save options On the Load Save Microsoft Office page you can choose what to do when importing and exporting Microsoft Office OLE objects linked or embedded objects or documents such as spreadsheets or equations Select the L options to convert Microsoft OLE objects into the corresponding OpenOffice org OLE objects when a Microsoft document is loaded into OOo mnemonic L for load Select the S options to convert OpenOffice or
380. rag it to the right of the word On The result On lt Date gt If you have Field Shadings turned on View gt Field shading lt Date gt has a gray background Otherwise it does not 4 To replace first amount click the Breakfast field name and drag it to the right of our breakfast cost Make sure you have the proper spacing between the field names and the words before and after them Result breakfast cost lt Breakfast gt 5 To replace the first name click the Bpayment field name and drag it to the right of paid by Result paid by lt Bpayment gt 6 In the same way fill in the rest of the fields in the sentence Use lt Lunch gt and lt LPayment gt for the second set of amount and name in the sentence Use lt Supper gt and lt SPayment gt for the third set of amount and name in the sentence 232 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 7 Final result On lt Date gt our breakfast cost lt Breakfast gt paid by lt BPayment gt our lunch cost lt Lunch gt paid by lt LPayment gt and our supper cost lt Supper gt paid by lt SPayment gt 8 Add data to the fields of the sentence e Click the gray box to the left of the row of data you want to add That row should be highlighted like the second row of Figure 213 Click the Data to Fields icon circled This should fill the fields with the data from the row you chose e Click another row and then click this icon again The data in the sen
381. raw 185 Text frames can also have fill colors shadows and other attributes just like any other Draw object You can rotate the frame and write the text at any angle These options are available by right clicking on the object Use the Callout tool g located on the Drawing toolbar to create callouts also known as captions or figure labels If you double click on an object or press F2 or the Text icon in the Drawing toolbar when an object is selected text is written in the center of the object and remains within the object Nearly any kind of object contains such an additional text element These texts have slight differences to those in text frames concerning position and hyphenation For more about text see Chapter 2 Drawing Basic Shapes and Chapter 10 Advanced Draw Techniques in the Draw Guide Gluepoints and connectors All Draw objects have associated invisible gluepoints which become visible when you choose any of the connectors under the Connector icon s on the Drawing toolbar and then move the mouse pointer over the object Most objects have four gluepoints as shown in Figure 166 You can add more gluepoints and customize gluepoints using the toolbar under the Gluepoint icon amp on the Drawing toolbar Figure 166 Four gluepoints Gluepoints are different from handles the small blue or green squares around an object The handles are for moving or resizing an object The gluepoints attach connect
382. rawing tools e Charts created using OOo s Chart facility See Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork in this book and Chapter 8 Working with Graphics in the Writer Guide Printing See Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing in this book and Chapter 5 Printing Exporting Faxing and E mailing in the Writer Guide for details on previewing pages before printing selecting print options printing in black and white on a color printer printing brochures and other printing features Using mail merge Writer provides very useful features to create and print e Multiple copies of a document to send to a list of different recipients form letters e Mailing labels e Envelopes All these facilities use a registered data source a spreadsheet or database containing the name and address records and other information Chapter 11 Using Mail Merge in the Writer Guide describes the process 100 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Tracking changes to a document You can use several methods to keep track of changes made to a document 1 Make your changes to a copy of the document stored in a different folder or under a different name or both then use Writer to combine the two files and Show the differences Choose Edit gt Compare Document This technique is particularly useful if you are the only person working on the document as it avoids the increase in file size and complexity caused by the other me
383. rd to Create Table f Create View Reports Figure 175 Creating database tables Every time the Automobile database is opened the Automobile OpenOffice org Base window opens Changes can then be made to the database The title for this window is always lt database name gt OpenOffice org Base Tip 204 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 As you create a database you should save your work regularly This means more than just saving what you have just created You must save the whole Caution database as well A For example when you create your first table you must save it before you can close it When the table is first saved it is also made part of the database Creating database tables In a database a table stores information for a group of things we call fields For example a table might hold an address book a stock list a phone book or a price list A database can have from one to several tables To work with tables click the Tables icon in the Database list or press Alt a The three tasks that you can perform on a table are in the Tasks list see Figure 175 Using the Wizard to create a table Wizards are designed to do the basic work Sometimes this is not sufficient for what we want in those cases we can use a wizard as a starting point and then build upon What it produces The Table Wizard in Base contains two categories of suggested tables business and personal Each category
384. re and creating several different types of web pages using a wizard The easiest way to create HTML documents is to start with an existing Writer document You can get a good idea of how it will appear as a web page by using View gt Web Layout However web layout view will not show you which features will or won t save correctly to HTML Some considerations are described in the introduction to this chapter Saving a document as a single web page To save a document as a single web page HTML format choose File gt Save As and specify HTML Document as the file type Writer does not replace multiple spaces in the original document with the HTML code for non breaking spaces If you want to have extra Note spaces in your HTML file or web page you need to insert non breaking spaces in OOo To do this press Control Spacebar instead of just Spacebar 312 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Saving a document as a series of web pages Writer can save a large document as a series of web pages HTML files with a table of contents page To do this 1 Decide which headings in the document should start on a new page and make sure all those headings have the same style for example Heading 1 2 Choose File gt Send gt Create HTML Document 3 In the Name and Path dialog type the file name to save the pages under Also specify which style indicates a new page as decided in step 1 4 Click Save to create the multi pag
385. re typically used for producing long documents such as a book a thesis or a long report or when different people are writing different chapters or other parts of the full document so you don t need to share files A master document joins separate text documents into one larger document and unifies the formatting table of contents TOC bibliography index and other tables or lists Yes master documents do work in Writer However until you become familiar with them you may think that master documents are unreliable or difficult to use See Chapter 13 Working with Master Documents in the Writer Guide Creating fill in forms A standard text document displays information a letter report or brochure for example Typically the reader may edit everything or nothing in any way A form has sections that are not to be edited and other sections that are designed for the reader to make changes For example a questionnaire has an introduction and questions which do not change and spaces for the reader to enter answers Forms are used in three ways e To create a simple document for the recipient to complete such as a questionnaire sent out to a group of people who fill it in and return it e To link into a database or data source and allow the user to enter information Someone taking orders might enter the information for each order into a database using a form e To view information held in a database or data source A librari
386. rg Print page set the print options to suit your default printer and your most common printing method In the Printer warnings section near the bottom of the page you can choose whether to be warned if the paper size or orientation specified in your document does not match the paper size or orientation available for your printer Having these warnings turned on can be quite helpful particularly if you work with documents produced by people in other countries where the standard paper size is different from yours If your printouts are incorrectly placed on the page or chopped off at Tip the top bottom or sides or the printer is refusing to print the most likely cause is page size incompatibility Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 37 Reduce print data Settings for Printer Print to file Printer Reduce transparency Reduce gradients a Automatically 2 Gradient stripes 64 No transparency Intermediate color Reduce bitmaps Convert colors to grayscale High print quality 2 Normal print quality Resolution Include transparent objects Printer warnings f Paper size W Transparency W Paper orientation Figure 24 Choosing general printing options to apply to all OOo components Path options On the OpenOffice org Paths page you can change the location of files associated with or used by OpenOffice org to suit your working situation In a Windows system for example you might want to store documents by
387. riter document to HTML hyperlinks remain active but cross references do not Both remain active when the document is exported to PDF Using hyperlinks The easiest way to insert a hyperlink to another part of the same document is by using the Navigator 1 2 3 4 5 6 Open the document containing the items you want to cross reference Open the Navigator by clicking its icon choosing View gt Navigator or pressing F5 Click the arrow next to the Drag Mode icon and choose Insert as Hyperlink In the list at the bottom of the Navigator select the document containing the item that you want to cross reference In the Navigator list select the item that you want to insert as a hyperlink Drag the item to where you want to insert the hyperlink in the document The name of the item is inserted in the document as an active hyperlink lt 4 Navigator v Insert as Hyperlink Insert as Link Insert as Copy Headings Copyright What is Writer The Writer interface Changing document views Peeeeereer rier rr rerrrer errr reertre rir rerrrrrrrr rr etrrerr rrr rer terrier rrr rer rrr tr rertrrr rr terri rey Moving quickly through a do See n ee S aed oe ae ee ae w Figure 85 Inserting a hyperlink using the Navigator You can also use the Hyperlink dialog to insert and modify hyperlinks within and between documents See Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages Using cross references I
388. rk Click OK Options Decimal places p a Negative numbers red Leading zeroes Thousands separator Format code Figure 244 Option section of the Number Formating window 3 Change the Cost per mile field a Right click in the cell below Fuel Cost b Select Number Format c Inthe Category list select Currency Click OK 4 Change the Fuel Cost field a Right click in the cell below Cost per mile b Select Number Format c Inthe Category list select Currency d Inthe Option section e Set the number of decimal places to 3 e Click the green checkmark e Click OK Step 4 Save and close the report Double click the report It should now look like Figure 245 Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 251 Tit Author Dan Lewis Date STAA 8 Date Friday May 25 2007 Date saturday May 26 2007 Date sunday May 27 2007 Motel Tolls Misc i s Innch Supper Snachktost Figure 245 Final report More ways to create reports An extension is available to assist in report creation Sun Report Builder creates stylish complex database reports You can define group and page headers group and page footers and calculation fields It is available from http extensions services openoffice org To install this extension follow these steps 1 Choose Tools gt Extension Manager from the menu bar In the Extension Manager dialog click Get more extensions online 2 The O
389. rom Tools gt Language on the menu bar Another way to change the language of a whole document is to use Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Languages In the Default languages for documents section of the Options dialog you can choose a different language for all the text The spelling checker works only for those languages in the list that have the symbol AB next to them If you do not see the symbol next to your preferred language you can install the additional dictionary using Tools gt Languages gt More dictionaries online The language used for checking spelling is also shown in the status bar next to the page style in use Using AutoCorrect Writer s AutoCorrect function has a long list of common misspellings and typing errors which it corrects automatically For example hte will be changed to the Choose Tools gt AutoCorrect Options to open the AutoCorrect dialog There you can define which strings of text are corrected and how In most cases the defaults are fine AutoCorrect is turned on when Writer is installed To turn it off uncheck Format gt AutoCorrect gt While Typing To stop Writer replacing a specific spelling go to the Replace tab highlight the word pair and click Delete To add a new spelling to the list type it into the Replace and With boxes on the Replace tab and click New 88 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 See the different tabs of the dialog for t
390. rom one page to the next If you do not like the default settings you can change them For example you can require a paragraph to start on a new page or column and specify the style of the new page A typical use is for chapter titles to always start on a new right hand odd numbered page Compiling an automatic table of contents To compile an automatic table of contents first apply styles to the headings you want to appear in the contents list then use Tools gt Outline Numbering to tell Writer which styles go with which level in the table of contents See Chapter 4 for more information Defining a sequence of styles You can set up one paragraph style so that when you press Enter at the end of that paragraph the following paragraph automatically has the style you wish applied to it For example you could define a Heading 1 paragraph to be followed by a Text Body paragraph A more complex example would be Title followed by Author followed by Abstract followed by Heading 1 followed by Text Body By setting up these sequences you Can avoid manually applying styles in most cases Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 79 m OpenOffice org 3 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer Word Processing with OpenOffice org What ts Writer Writer is the word processor component of OpenOffice org OOo In addition to the usual features of a word processor spelling check thesaurus hyphenation autocorrect find and re
391. row next to the Table button displays a graphic that you can drag and select the number of rows and columns for your table Insert Table Number of columns Mumber of rows r eaconcel Figure 145 Creating a table with the Insert Table dialog Selecting from any of the styles in the Table Design section of the Tasks Note pane creates a table based on that style If you create a table by another method you can still apply a style of your choice later With the table selected the Table toolbar should appear If it does not you can access it by selecting View gt Toolbars gt Table The Table toolbar offers many of the same buttons as the table toolbar in Writer with the exception of functions like Sort and Sum for performing calculations For those functions you need to use a spreadsheet inserted from Calc discussed below After the table is created you can modify it in much the same ways as you would modify a table in Writer adding and deleting rows and columns adjusting width and spacing adding borders background colors and so on Detailed information on working with tables and the Table Properties dialog can be found in Chapter 9 of the Writer Guide By modifying the style of the table from the Table Design section of the Tasks pane you can quickly change the appearance of the table or any newly created tables based on the Style options you select You can choose to add emphasis to a header 164 Getting Started w
392. rs Sun Microsystems Inc 1 6 0_07 Sun Microsystems Inc 1 6 0 oem r iT I Location C Program Files Java jreo Figure 33 Choosing a Java runtime environment Online Update options On the OpenOffice org Online Update page you can choose whether and how often to have OOo check the OOo website for program updates If the Check for updates automatically option is selected an icon appears at the right hand end of the menu bar when an update is available Click this icon to open a dialog where you can choose to download the update Online Update Options V Check for updates automatically Every Day Every Week Every Month Last checked 08 25 10 05 27 00 PM L Download updates automatically Download destination C Users Jared Desktop Figure 34 Configuring Online Update If the Download updates automatically option is selected the download starts when you click the icon To change the download destination click the Change button and select the required folder in the file browser window Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 45 Improvement program On the OpenOffice org Improvement Program page you can choose whether or not to participate in the OpenOffice org Improvement Program which collects anonymous statistics about how you use OOo Choosing options for loading and saving documents You can set the Load Save options to suit the way you work If the Options dialog is not already open
393. rties window 4 Close the Properties window 5 Lengthen the Misc Notes field by moving the cursor over the middle green handle at the bottom of the field and dragging down until the length is 6 cm 2 4 inches Step 8 Change labels and fields in the subform The subform is located at the bottom of the form We want to widen the Date column change the field in the PaymentType column to a list box and change the label for the PaymentType column to two words To widen the Date column move the mouse pointer over the dividing line between the Date and FuelCost columns When the pointer changes shape click and drag to move the divider to the right To change the PaymentType column 1 Right click the label PaymentType and choose Replace with gt List box from the menu 2 Again right click the label PaymentType to open the menu Select Column to open the Properties dialog Figure 203 3 In the Label box change PaymentType to Payment Type 4 Click the Data tab 5 From the Type of list contents dropdown list select Sql 6 Type the following exactly as it is written SELECT Type Type FROM Payment Type 7 Close the Properties dialog Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 225 General Data Events NAING cccccccocceoccecceceee PaymentT ype Els ene oe PaymentType H Enabled cc cccccccc0c YES 7 List GNIS cccsscteccene ABQMIMGM viscssccccsscseevees Border CONT Line count
394. s All bookmark levels Visible bookmark levels Figure 273 User Interface page of PDF Options dialog Transitions In Impress displays slide transition effects as their respective PDF effects Bookmarks Select how many heading levels are displayed as bookmarks if Export bookmarks is selected on the General page Links page of PDF Options dialog On the Links page you can choose how links are exported to PDF Export bookmarks as named destinations If you have defined Writer bookmarks Impress or Draw slide names or Calc sheet names this option exports them as named destinations to which Web pages and PDF documents can link Convert document references to PDF targets If you have defined links to other documents with OpenDocument extensions such as ODT ODS and ODP this option converts the files names to PDF in the exported PDF document Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 281 General Initial View User Interface Links Security F Convert document references to PDF targets _ Export URLs relative to file system Cross document links Default mode Open with PDF reader application Open with Internet browser Figure 274 Links page of PDF Options dialog Export URLs relative to file system If you have defined relative links in a document this option exports those links to the PDF Cross document links Defines the behavior of links clicked in PDF files Security page of P
395. s E Comments sample gy Drawing objects Untitled1 active v Figure 95 The Navigator in Calc The Navigator displays lists of all the objects in a document grouped into categories If an indicator plus sign or arrow appears next to a category at least one object of this kind exists To open a category and see the list of items click on the indicator To hide the list of categories and show only the icons at the top click the Contents icon Click this icon again to show the list Moving from cell to cell In the spreadsheet one cell normally has a darker black border This black border indicates where the focus is see Figure 96 If a group of cells is selected they have a highlight color usually gray with the focus cell having a dark border Using the mouse To move the focus using the mouse simply move the mouse pointer to the cell where you want the focus to be and click the left mouse button This changes the 112 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 focus to the new cell This method is most useful when the two cells are a large distance apart Figure 96 Left One selected cell and right a group of selected cells Using the Tab and Enter keys e Pressing Enter or Shift Enter moves the focus down or up respectively e Pressing Tab or Shift Tab moves the focus to the right or to the left respectively Using the arrow keys Pressing the arrow keys on the keyboard moves the focus in the d
396. s Default template for that document type Associating a document with a different template At times you might want to associate a document with a different template or perhaps you are working with a document that did not start from a template One of the major advantages of using templates is the ease of updating styles in more than one document as described on page 68 If you update styles by loading a new set of styles from a different template as described on page 63 the document has no association with the template from which the styles were loaded so you cannot use this method What you need to do is associate the document with the different template You can do this in two ways In both cases for best results the names of styles should be the same in the existing document and the new template If they are not you will need to use Search and Replace to replace old styles with new ones See Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer for more about replacing styles using Search and Replace Method 1 This method includes any graphics and wording such as legal notices that exists in the new template as well as including styles If you do not want this material you need to delete it 1 Use File gt New gt Templates and Documents Choose the template you want If the template has unwanted text or graphics in it delete them 2 Open the document you want to change It opens in a new window Press Control A to select everyth
397. s Yes Yes Print a brochure Yes No Yes Yes Print envelopes Yes No No No Print labels or business cards Yes No No No Preview pages sheets before printing Yes Yes No No Selecting general printing options On the General tab of the Print dialog you can choose e The printer from the printers available e Which pages to print the number of copies to print and whether to collate multiple copies Range and copies section e Whether to print any comments that are in the document and where to print the comments Print Comments None document only None document only Comments only Place at end of document Place at end of page Cancel Figure 264 Choosing whether and where to print comments Select the Properties button to display a dialog where you can choose portrait or landscape orientation which paper tray to use and the paper size to print on On the Options tab of the Print dialog Figure 265 the last item Use only paper tray from printer preference is not available in Calc Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 269 General OpenOffice org Writer Page Layout Options Options EJ Print to file E Create single print jobs for collated output E Print in reverse page order Use only paper tray from printer preferences Figure 265 General print options Printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper You can print multiple pages of a document on one sheet
398. s and Numbering or click on the Bullets and a a Numbering icon aH 3 The Bullets and Numbering dialog contains five tabs Bullets Numbering type Graphics Position and Customize e Ifa bullet list is needed select the desired bullet style from the default styles available on the Bullets page e Ifa graphics style is needed select one from those available on the Graphics page e Ifa numbered list is needed select one of the default numbering styles on the Numbering type page For a single line in the list 1 Click anywhere in the line to place the cursor in it 2 Follow steps 2 4 of the previous instruction set If the list was created in an AutoLayout text box then an alternative way to change the entire list is to modify the Outline styles Changes made to the outline style will apply to all the slides using them Sometimes this is what you want sometimes it is not so some care must be taken Adding pictures tables charts and media As we have seen besides text a contents box can contain also pictures tables charts or media clips This section provides a quick overview of how to work with these objects however for a more detailed description you are invited to consult the Impress Guide Adding pictures ae To add a picture to a contents box e Use the file browser to select the picture file you want to include To see a preview of the picture check Preview at the bottom of the Insert picture dialog e Click Open
399. s are visible A filter is a list of conditions that each entry has to meet in order to be displayed You can set three types of filters from the Data gt Filter sub menu Automatic filters add a drop down list to the top row of a column that contains commonly used filters They are quick and convenient and are useful with text and with numbers because the list includes every unique entry in the selected cells In addition to these unique entries automatic filters include the option to display all entries the ten highest numerical values and all cells that are empty or not empty as well as a standard filter The automatic filters are somewhat limited In particular they do not allow regular expressions so you cannot use them to display cell contents that are similar but not identical Standard filters are more complex than automatic filters You can set as many as three conditions as a filter combining them with the operators AND and OR Standard filters are mostly useful for numbers although a few of the conditional operators such as and lt gt can also be useful for text Other conditional operators for standard filters include options to display the largest or smallest values or a percentage of them Useful in themselves standard filters take on added value when used to further refine automatic filters Advanced filters are structured similarly to standard filters The differences are that advanced filters are not limited to
400. s before printing You can use the previewing options in Writer and Calc to view the document as it will be printed Different viewing options are available Writer The normal page view in Writer shows you what each page will look like when printed and you can edit the pages in that view If you are designing a document to be printed double sided you may want to see what facing pages look like Writer provides two ways to do this e View Layout editable view use the Facing Pages Book Preview button on the status bar e Page Preview read only view 276 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 To use Page Preview 1 Choose File gt Page Preview or click the Page Preview button S on the Standard toolbar Writer now displays the Page Preview toolbar instead of the Formatting toolbar OS wb amp AB co e s Ql Close Preview Figure 269 Page Preview toolbar Writer 2 Select the required preview icon Two Pages 85 Multiple Pages 5 or Book Preview 5 3 To print the document from this view click the Print document icon 4 to open the Print dialog 4 Choose the print options and click the Print button to print Calc To preview the sheets in Calc before printing 1 Choose File gt Page Preview The Calc window now displays the Page Preview toolbar instead of the Formatting toolbar aA Laj C c FormatPage Margis Close Preview Figure 270 Page Preview toolbar Calc 2 To pri
401. s extra cost add ins in other office suites like PDF export are free with OOo There are no hidden charges now or in the future e Open source You can distribute copy and modify the software as much as you wish in accordance with either of OOo s Open Source licenses e Cross platform OO03 runs on several hardware architectures and under multiple operating systems such as Microsoft Windows Mac OS X Linux and Solaris e Extensive language support OOo s user interface is available in over 40 languages and the OOo project provides spelling hyphenation and thesaurus dictionaries in over 70 languages and dialects OOo also provides support for both Complex Text Layout CTL and Right to Left RTL layout languages such as Urdu Hebrew and Arabic e Consistent user interface All the components have a similar look and feel making them easy to use and master e Integration The components of OpenOffice org are well integrated with one another All the components share a common spelling checker and other tools which are used consistently across the suite For example the drawing tools available in Writer are also found in Calc with similar but enhanced versions in Impress and Draw Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 11 You do not need to know which application was used to create a particular file For example you can open a Draw file from Writer e Granularity Usually if you change an option it affe
402. s not important to understand where macros are stored for casual use If you know where they are stored however you can create a backup share your macros or inspect them if there is an error Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Dialogs to open the OpenOffice org Macro Organizer dialog Another common way to open this dialog is to use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic to open the OpenOffice org Macros dialog and then click the Organizer button Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 335 Modules Dialogs Libraries Location 4k My Macros amp Dialogs Library ChangeStyles DBUti MacroFormatterA OOoAuthorForma New Pitonyak PitonyakDatabas Import PitonyakDialogs PitonyakUtil RemoveFormatti Standard Figure 306 The macro organizer dialog Importing macros The OpenOffice org Macro Organizer dialog provides functionality to create delete and rename libraries modules and dialogs Select the library container to use and then click the Import button to import macro libraries see Figure 307 Tip You cannot import the library named Standard On Linux the OpenOffice org specific files are stored in a directory whose name begins with a period Directories and files with names beginning with a period are not shown in a normal selection dialog To Tip open the directory I navigated to the parent directory entered the name openoffice org 3 and then clicke
403. s to Helvetica all the linked styles will change as well Sometimes this is exactly what you want other times you do not want the changes to apply to all the linked styles It pays to plan ahead The dialogs and choices are the same for defining new styles and for modifying existing styles See the chapters on styles in the user guides for details Creating a new style from a selection You can create a new style by copying an existing manual format This new style applies only to this document it will not be saved in the template 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window and choose the type of style you want to create 2 In the document select the item you want to save as a Style 3 In the Styles and Formatting window click on the New Style from Selection icon 4 In the Create Style dialog type a name for the new style The list shows the names of existing custom styles of the selected type Click OK to save the new style Create Style Style name NewStyle Figure 49 Naming a new style created from a selection Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 61 Dragging and dropping to create a style You can drag and drop a text selection into the Styles and Formatting window to create a new Style Writer Select some text and drag it to the Styles and Formatting window If Paragraph Styles are active the paragraph style will be added to the list If Character Styles are active the character style will b
404. select Do not mark errors To find the second item scroll down in the Options list e Ifyou use a custom dictionary that includes words in all upper case and words with numbers for example AS 400 select Check uppercase words and Check words with numbers e Check special regions includes headers footers frames and tables when checking spelling 52 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Writing ards Available language modules Hunspell SpellChecker Libhyphen Hyphenator OpenOffice org New Thesaurus User defined dictionaries soffice All IgqnoreAllList AII Edit Check uppercase words Check words with numbers Check capitalization re a a rie a ee a esi Figure 43 Choosing languages dictionaries and options for checking spelling Here you can also check which user defined custom dictionaries are active by default and add or remove dictionaries by clicking the New or Delete buttons OpenOffice org does not have a grammar checker but you can install a grammar checker extension such as Language Tool and access that tool Note from Tools gt Spelling and Grammar See Chapter 14 for more about installing extensions Choosing Internet options Use the Internet Options pages to define search engines and save proxy settings for use with OpenOffice org If you are using a Netscape or Mozilla browser such as Firefox you can enable the Browser Plug in so you can open OOo files in your brows
405. selection click i the Spelling and Grammar button This checks the document or selection and opens the Spelling and Grammar dialog if any misspelled words are found Here are some more features of the spelling checker e You can right click on a word with a wavy underline to open a context menu If you select from the suggested words on the menu the selection will replace the misspelled word in your text Other menu options are discussed below e You can change the dictionary language for example Spanish French or German on the Spelling and Grammar dialog e You can add a word to the dictionary Click Add in the Spelling and Grammar dialog and pick the dictionary to add it to e Click the Options button on the Spelling and Grammar dialog to open a dialog Similar to the one in Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Writing Aids described in Chapter 2 There you can choose whether to check uppercase words and words with numbers and you can manage custom dictionaries that is add or delete dictionaries and add or delete words in a dictionary e On the Font tab of the Paragraph Styles dialog you can set paragraphs to be checked in a specific language different from the rest of the document See Chapter 7 Working with Styles in the Writer Guide for more information Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 87 Writer does not include a grammar checker but you can install an extension such as Language Tool and access it fr
406. serting object as background 293 location 295 opening 292 themes 293 views icon detailed 293 general options 33 geometric shapes Draw 187 gluepoints 186 GNU Linux system requirements 12 gradients 196 grammar checker 88 graphic files opening 307 Saving 369 graphic styles description 166 formatting text 161 graphics adding from file 289 adding to slides 165 linking 290 grid options 180 grid points 179 guiding lines 181 H handouts Impress 150 header different on right and left pages 74 headers and footers Calc 141 Help Agent 33 Help system 13 Help Tips 33 hidden objects 190 hiding and showing data Calc 134 high contrast 34 history of OpenOffice org 363 HTML compatibility 49 HTML export 50 HTML Export Wizard 316 hyperlinks absolute 307 editing 311 inserting 308 relative 307 removing 311 hyphenation manual 93 I icon size and style user interface 36 icons in menus 36 IDE 325 ignore font settings when importing HTML 50 image map 296 images adding from file 289 linking 290 scanned 292 importing files 366 importing numbers from an HTML page 50 Impress content boxes 157 features 145 font resizing 160 layout selecting 156 main window 145 Slide elements modifying 158 Slide show modifying 159 starting 145 Improvement Program 46 inclination 192 indents 86 indexes and bibliographies 99 Insert Bookmark dialog 103 Insert Picture dialog 289 installing and setting up 13 Internet options 53
407. sor inside the cell You can do this in two ways Using the keyboard After selecting the appropriate cell press the F2 key and the cursor is placed at the end of the cell Then use the keyboard arrow keys to move the cursor through the text in the cell Using the mouse Using the mouse either double click on the appropriate cell to select it and place the cursor in it for editing or single click to select the cell and then move the mouse pointer up to the input line and click into it to place the cursor for editing Formatting data The data in Calc can be formatted in several ways It can either be edited as part of a cell style so that it is automatically applied or it can be applied manually to the cell Some manual formatting can be applied using toolbar icons For more control and extra options select the appropriate cell or cells right click on it and select Format Cells All of the format options are discussed below All the settings discussed in this section can also be set as a part of the Note cell style See Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in Calc in the Calc Guide for more information Formatting multiple lines of text Multiple lines of text can be entered into a single cell using automatic wrapping or manual line breaks Each method is useful for different situations Using automatic wrapping To set text to wrap at the end of the cell right click on the cell and select Format Cells or choose Format gt Cel
408. special characters If you do not find a SES particular special character try changing the Font selection Special Characters Font Times New Roman Subset Basic Greek v i i A E alilo ha i ee eE ui e on e lee e eae e alela i lole le r e e e a uy folziel slolrlivlolzlyviolils s ol a rle s 7 7 5 s s alee uals et fale x 3 a a x a u al o NIPIC T X U TIM W bIH b s on Figure 72 The Special Characters dialog where you can insert special characters Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 85 Inserting dashes and non breaking spaces and hyphens To prevent two words from being separated at the end of a line press Control Shift spacebar after the first word to insert a non breaking space In cases where you do not want the hyphen to appear at the end of a line for example in a number such as 123 4567 you can press Control Shift minus sign to insert a non breaking hyphen To enter en and em dashes you can use the Replace dashes option on the Options tab under Tools gt AutoCorrect Options This option replaces two hyphens under certain conditions with the corresponding dash is an en dash that is a dash the width of the letter n in the font you are using Type at least one character a space one or two hyphens another space and at least one more letter then a space The one or two hyphens will be replaced by an en dash is an em dash that is a
409. st includes all the main menus as well as submenus menus that are contained under another menu For example in addition to File Edit View and so on there is File Send and File Templates The commands available for the selected menu are shown in the central part of the dialog To customize the selected menu click on the Menu or Modify buttons You can also add commands to a menu by clicking on the Add button These actions are described in the following sections Use the up and down arrows next to the Entries list to move the selected menu item to a different position 6 When you have finished making all your changes click OK not shown in illustration to save them Creating a new menu In the Customize dialog click New to display the dialog shown in Figure 315 1 Type a name for your new menu in the Menu name box 2 3 Use the up and down arrow buttons to move the new menu into the required position on the menu bar Click OK to save The new menu now appears on the list of menus in the Customize dialog It will appear on the menu bar itself after you save your customizations After creating a new menu you need to add some commands to it as described in Adding a command to a menu on page 348 New Menu k Menu name New Menu 1 Cancel Menu position i SES New Menu 1 Figure 315 Adding a new menu Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org 347 Modifying existing menus To modify a
410. stem font for user interface Mouse positioning No automatic positioning M enu Middle mouse button Icons in menus Automatic scrolling Automatic It Font Lists Selection Show preview of fonts Transparency 75 a F Show font history Figure 22 Choosing View options for OOo applications User Interface Scaling If the text in the help files or on the menus of the OOo user interface is too small or too large you can change it by specifying a scaling factor Sometimes a change here can have unexpected results depending on the screen fonts available on your system However it does not affect the actual font size of the text in your documents Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 35 User Interface Icon size and style The first box specifies the display size of toolbar icons Automatic Small or Large The Automatic icon size option uses the setting for your operating system The second box specifies the icon style theme here the Automatic option uses an icon set compatible with your operating system and choice of desktop for example KDE or Gnome on Linux User Interface Use system font for user interface If you prefer to use the system font the default font for your computer and operating system instead of the font provided by OOo for the user interface select this option User interface Screen font anti aliasing Not available in Windows not shown in Figure 22 Select this option to smooth the scr
411. t allows you to resize and move the layout elements It is also possible to add slide elements without being limited to the size and position of the layout boxes To resize a contents box click on the outer frame so that the 8 resizing handles are displayed To move it place the mouse cursor on the frame so that the cursor changes Shape You can now click the left mouse button and drag the contents box to its new position on the slide Changes to any of the pre packaged layouts can only be made using Caution View gt Normal which is the default Attempting to do this by modifying a slide master although possible may result in unpredictable A results and requires extra care as well as a certain amount of trial and error At this step you may also want to remove unwanted frames To do this e Click the element to highlight it The green squares show it is highlighted e Press the Delete key to remove it Adding text to a slide If the slide contains text click on Click to add an outline in the text frame and then type your text The Outline styles from 1 to 10 are automatically applied to the text as you insert it You can change the outline level of each paragraph as well as its position within the text using the arrow buttons on the Text Formatting toolbar See Adding and formatting text on page 159 for more information Modifying the appearance of all slides To change the background and other characteristics of all slides i
412. t click and choose Update Index Table from the pop up menu If you cannot place your cursor in the table of contents choose Tools gt Note Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt Formatting Aids and then select Enable in the Cursor in protected areas section Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 99 You can customize an existing table of contents at any time Right click anywhere in it and choose Edit Index Table from the pop up menu Chapter 12 Creating Tables of Contents Indexes and Bibliographies of the Writer Guide describes in detail all the customizations you can choose Creating indexes and bibliographies Indexes and bibliographies work in a similar way to tables of contents Chapter 12 Creating Tables of Contents Indexes and Bibliographies in the Writer Guide describes the process in detail In addition to alphabetical indexes other types of indexes supplied with Writer include those for illustrations tables and objects and you can even create a user defined index For example you might want an index containing only the scientific names of species mentioned in the text and a separate index containing only the common names of species Before creating some types of indexes you first need to create index entries embedded in your Writer document Working with graphics Graphics in Writer are of three basic types e Image files including photos drawings scanned images and others e Diagrams created using OOo s d
413. t following the instructions on the site It should be Java 5 0 or higher In OOo use Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Java to A register Java Windows version of JRE can not be used while there are other versions that can Base creates relational databases This makes it fairly easy to create a database in which the fields of the database have relationships with each other For example Consider a database for a library It will contain a field for the names of the authors and another field for the names of the books There is an obvious relationship between the authors and the books they have written The library may contain more than one book by the same author This is what is known as a one to many relationship one author and more than one book Most if not all the relationships in such a database are one to many relationships Consider an employment database for the same library One of the fields contains the names of the employees while others contain the social security numbers and other personal data The relationship between the names and social security numbers is one to one only one social security number for each name If you are acquainted with mathematical sets a relational database can easily be explained in terms of sets elements subsets unions and intersections The fields of 202 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 a database are the elements The tables are subsets Relationships are defin
414. t look right it will in a minute 2 Select the text you have just pasted 3 Select Format gt Default formatting from the menu bar 4 Use the four arrow buttons in the Text Formatting toolbar eo tT to move the text to the appropriate position and give it the appropriate outline level The button with the arrow pointing left promotes the list entry by one level for example from Outline 3 to Outline 2 the right arrow button demotes the list entry by one level the up and down arrow buttons move the list entry 5 Apply manual formatting as required to sections of the text to change font attributes tabs and so on If you are pasting text in a text box you can still use styles to quickly format the text Note that one and only one graphic style can be applied to the copied text To do that 1 Paste the text in the desired position 2 Select the text you have just pasted 3 Select the desired graphic style 4 Apply manual formatting as required to sections of the text Presentation styles are very different from Writer styles and are applied in quite a different way Tip Creating bulleted and numbered lists The procedure to create a bulleted or numbered list is quite different depending on the type of text box used although the tools to manage the list and customize the appearance are the same In text boxes created automatically by Impress called AutoLayout the outline styles available are by default bulleted
415. t refers to a document s frame which receives dispatched commands document ThisComponent CurrentController Frame Most tasks in OpenOffice org are accomplished by dispatching a command OOo includes a dispatch helper service which does most of the work to use dispatches in macros The method CreateUnoService accepts the name of a service and it tries to create an instance of that service On completion the dispatcher variable contains a reference to a DispatchHelper dispatcher createUnoService com sun star frame DispatchHelper Declare an array of properties Each property has a name and a value In other words it is a name value pair The created array has one property at index zero dim args1 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyVaLlue Give the property the name Text and the value Andrew Pitonyak which is the text that is inserted when the macro is run args1 0 Name Text args1 0 Value Andrew Pitonyak This is where the magic happens The dispatch helper sends a dispatch to the document s frame stored in the variable named document with the command uno InsertText The next two arguments frame name and search flags are beyond the scope of this document The last argument is the array of property values to be used while executing the command InsertText dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 argsl Finally the end of the subroutine end sub Creating a macro When crea
416. t size changes depends on the standard sizes available for the font in use Pasting text You can insert text into a text box by copying it from another document and pasting it into Impress However the pasted text will probably not match the formatting of the Surrounding text or that of the other slides in the presentation This may be what you want on some occasions however in most cases you want to make sure that the presentation does not become a patchwork of different paragraph styles font types bullet points and so on There are several ways to ensure consistency these methods are explained below 160 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Pasting unformatted text It is normally good practice to paste text without formatting and apply the formatting later To paste without formatting either press Control Shift V and then select Unformatted text from the dialog that appears or click on the small black triangle next to the paste symbol in the standard toolbar GS and select Unformatted text The unformatted text will be formatted with the outline style at the cursor position in an AutoLayout text box or with the default graphic style in a normal text box Formatting pasted text If you are pasting the text into an AutoLayout area you need to apply the appropriate outline style to the text to give it the same look and feel as the rest of the presentation 1 Paste the text in the desired position Do not worry if it does no
417. t to create a directory structure on an Internet server Default file format and ODF settings ODF format version OpenOffice org by default saves documents in OpenDocument Format ODF version 1 2 Extended While this allows for improved functionality there may be backwards compatibility issues When a file saved in ODF 1 2 Extended is opened in an earlier version of OpenOffice org using ODF 1 0 1 1 some of the advanced features may be lost Two notable examples are cross references to headings and the formatting of numbered lists If you plan to share documents with people who are still using older versions of OpenOffice org save the document using ODF version 1 0 1 1 Size optimization for ODF format OpenOffice org documents are XML files When you select this option OOo writes the XML data without indents and line breaks If you want to be able to read the XML files in a text editor in a structured form deselect this option Document type If you routinely share documents with users of Microsoft Office you might want to change the Always save as attribute for documents to one of the Microsoft Office formats Although OOo can open files in the docx xlsx and pptx formats Note produced by Microsoft Office 2007 it cannot save in those formats This capability is planned for a future release Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 47 VBA Properties Load Save options On the Load Save VBA Properties page you can choose whethe
418. t word Repeat step 3 until you made all the changes for that style 4 To quit Fill Format mode click the Fill Format mode icon again or press the Esc key Caution When this mode is active a right click anywhere in the document undoes the last Fill Format action Be careful not to accidentally right click and thus undo actions you want to keep Using the Apply Style list After you have used a style at least once in a document the style name appears on the Apply Style list at the left hand end of the Formatting toolbar next to the Styles and Formatting icon 58 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 You can open this list and click once on the style you want or you can use the up and down arrow keys to move through the list and then press Enter to apply the highlighted style Select More at the bottom of the list to open the Styles and Formatting window Tip File Edit View Insert Format Figure 47 The Apply Style list on the Formatting toolbar Using keyboard shortcuts Some keyboard shortcuts for applying styles are predefined For example in Writer Control 0 applies the Text body style Control 1 applies the Heading 1 style and Control 2 applies the Heading 2 style You can modify these shortcuts and create your own see Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org for instructions Modifying styles OpenOffice org provides several ways to modify styles both the predefined styles and custom styles that you cre
419. ta source table e To remove a single field from the Table Column s list click the field and use the single arrow pointing to the left 5 To start over click the double arrow pointing to the left Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 233 Insert Database Columns x Insert data as Table Fields Text Table Database columns Table column s Miscellaneous 35 Date MiscNotes Breakfast MiscPayment BPayment Motel Lunch MPayment LPayment Odometer SnackCost snackNo z Format From database Insert table heading Properties General Apply column name AutoFormat Create row only Figure 214 Insert Database Columns dialog 6 Select the settings for your table Use the default settings as in Figure 214 7 Click OK Save the document Calc spreadsheets There are two ways to enter data in a Calc spreadsheet One enters the data into the spreadsheet cells The other creates records in the spreadsheet just like they are done in creating a form in a database While you can directly access the data in the spreadsheet cells you can only see the data in the records created in the spreadsheet Entering data directly to the spreadsheet cells uses the Data to Text icon as we did to make a table in a Writer document But differences exist in these two situations The steps are straightforward 1 Click the cell of the spreadsheet which you want to be the top left of your data including the column names
420. tart of the line 16 Press down arrow to move to the next line 17 Stop recording the macro and save the macro It takes much longer to read and write the steps than to record the macro Work Slowly and think about the steps as you do them With practice this becomes second nature The generated macro has been modified to contain the step number in the comments to match the code to the step above Listing 5 Copy the numeric value to the start of the column sub CopyNumToCoLll rem 7 rem define variables dim document as object dim dispatcher as object rem rem get access to the document document ThisComponent CurrentController Frame dispatcher createUnoService com sun star frame DispatchHelper rem 2 Press Ctrl Right Arrow to move the cursor to the start of specifies dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToNextWord 0 Array rem 3 Press Backspace twice to remove the tab and the space dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array POM 9 es err ate sic sl een seme lemme eee aioe pees re eee i oe ee eee Fe dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array rem 4 Press Tab to add the tab without the space after the constant name dim args4 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyValue args4 0 Name Text args4 0 Value C
421. te feature Tools gt Cell Contents gt AutoCalculate must be enabled See Chapter 2 Entering Editing and Formatting Data in the Calc Guide for details Hiding and showing data When elements are hidden they are neither visible nor printed but can still be selected for copying if you select the elements around them For example if column B is hidden it is copied when you select columns A and C When you need a hidden element again you can reverse the process and show the element To hide or show sheets rows and columns use the options on the Format menu or the right click context menu For example to hide a row first select the row and then choose Format gt Row gt Hide or right click and choose Hide To hide or show selected cells choose Format gt Cells from the menu bar or right click and choose Format Cells On the Format Cells dialog go to the Cell Protection tab 134 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Numbers Font Font Effects Alignment Borders Background Cell Protection Protection Hide all Cell protection is only effective after the current sheet has been protected Protecte Select Protect Document from the Tools menu _ Hide formula Se a Print L_ Hide when printing The cells selected will be omitted when printing Figure 121 Hiding or showing cells Outline group controls If you are continually hiding and showing the same cells you can simpl
422. tegory Commands Print Print File Directly ie Pring options page view ie Printer Settings iy Properties Application VIE Templates Edit Options BASIC Clase Help Insert Documents Format Controls Navigate Table Drawing Graphic 4 gt Figure 320 Adding a Send Fax command to a toolbar 352 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Assigning shortcut keys In addition to using the built in keyboard shortcuts listed in Appendix A you can define your own You can assign shortcuts to standard OOo functions or your own macros and save them for use with the entire OpenOffice org suite Be careful when reassigning your operating system s or OOo s predefined Shortcut keys Many key assignments are universally understood Caution shortcuts such as F1 for Help and are always expected to provide A certain results Although you can easily reset the shortcut key assignments to the OOo defaults changing some common shortcut keys can cause confusion frustration and possible data loss or corruption especially if other users share your computer To adapt shortcut keys to your needs use the Customize dialog as described below 1 2 3 4 5 Select Tools gt Customize gt Keyboard The Customize dialog opens To have the shortcut key assignment available in all components of OpenOffice org select the OpenOffice org button Next select the required function from the Category and Function
423. tence changes to this selected row of data e Save the document if you want to use it as an example later DAPA S t hb KY Yy SER an Date Odometer _ Motel Tols Friday June 26 530 50 00 11 00 Saturday June 2778 48 00 4 00 13 00 Dan Figure 213 Selected row in data source window Adding data in table format is a little easier and takes perhaps fewer steps Some of the steps will be quite similar 1 Navigate to the place you want to place the table and click the location 2 Control Click the gray box to the left of each row of the data source that you want to be a row in your table when the rows are not consecutive To select consecutive rows Click the gray box to the left of the top desired row and Shift click the bottom desired row 3 Click the Data to text icon to open the Insert Database Columns dialog Figure 214 The Data to text icon is to the left of the Data to Fields icon in Figure 213 4 Move the fields you want in your table from the Database Columns list to the Table column s list e To place the fields in the order you select click the field and use the single arrow to move the fields in the order you desire You can also limit the fields you use to less than all of the fields available e Ifyou want to use all of the fields use the double arrow pointing to the right to move all of them at one time The order of the fields in the table you create will be the same as in the da
424. text See Working with text on page 82 for more information about ADD and BLK Unsaved changes An asterisk appears here if changes to the document have not been saved Outline Numbering Level 2 B OO EG 8 120 Digital Object View Zoom Zoom signature Inform ation layout slider percent Figure 62 Right end of status bar 78 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Digital signature If the document has been digitally signed an icon Shows here You can double click the icon to view the certificate Section or object information When the cursor is on a section heading or list item or when an object such as a picture or table is selected information about that item appears in this field Double clicking in this area opens a relevant dialog For details consult the Help or the Writer Guide View layout Click an icon to change between single page side by side and book layout views You can edit the document in any view BOG co G0 BA Eo G GG Be l 2 l Figure 63 View layouts single side by side book Zoom To change the view magnification drag the Zoom slider or click on the and signs or right click on the zoom level percent to pop up a list of magnification values from which to choose Zoom interacts with the selected view layout to determine how many pages are visible in the document window e 100 Changing document views Writer has several ways to v
425. the Function Wizard button opens a dialog from which you can search through a list of available functions This can be very useful because it also shows how the functions are formatted In a spreadsheet the term function covers much more than just mathematical functions See Chapter 7 in the Calc Guide for more details Clicking the Sum button inserts a formula into the current cell that totals the numbers in the cells above the current cell If there are no numbers above the current cell then the cells to the left are placed in the Sum formula Clicking the Function button inserts an equals sign into the selected cell and the Input line thereby enabling the cell to accept a formula When you enter new data into a cell the Sum and Equals buttons change to Cancel and Accept buttons 3 The contents of the current cell data formula or function are displayed in the Input line which forms the remainder of the Formula Bar You can edit the contents of the current cell on the Input line or in the cell itself To edit on the Input line click in the line then type your changes To edit within the current cell just double click the cell 108 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Individual cells The main section of the screen displays the cells in the form of a grid with each cell being at the intersection of a column and a row At the top of the columns and at the left end of the rows are a series of gray boxes containing
426. the General tab scroll down to the Dropdown selection Change the No to Yes General Data Events Alignment 0 Left Background color a OxOODDDDDD Se a Beith scccten heteatentnerbeeee 3Dlook look DIrOpdlOw ccccssessennees Line count Figure 198 Dropdown list open to reveal choices 5 Click the Data tab e Type of list contents is a dropdown list Change it to Sql General Data Events Data field BPayment Type of list contents List content Sql Native Tablefields Figure 199 Type of list contents dropdown list Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 223 e Type the following exactly as it is in the List contents box SELECT Type Type FROM Payment Type General Data Events Data field BPayment 8 Type of ist contents Sal_ List content g E Bound field c cccccccce SELECT Type Type FROM Payment Type Figure 200 List content for payment type fields What you wrote is called an SQL command The words SELECT and FROM are written in capital letters because they are commands When the command SELECT is used it requires a field name within quotation marks Note and then the field s alias also within quotation marks In this case the field and its alias are the same The FROM command r
427. the Print File Directly icon to send the document to the printer defined for the document instead of the default Note printer for the computer Go to Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General and select the Load printer settings with the document option Controlling printing For more control over printing use the Print dialog File gt Print or Ctrl P Print i General OpenOffice org Writer Page Layout Options mi R OpenOfficaad 3 Printer cing dual HP Deskjet 1000 J110 series hp psc 1200 series Microsoft APS Document Writer Snagit 9 Details Chapler I Q Prinling Exporting and F nmiing Range and copies All pages Pages 1 26 Comments None document only Figure 263 The Print dialog 268 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 The Print dialog has four tabs from which you can choose a range of options as described in the following sections The options selected on the Print dialog apply to this printing of this document only Note To specify default printing settings for OOo go to Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Print and Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Component Print See Chapter 2 Setting Up OOo for more details The different components of OOo have different available print settings as summarized in Table 2 Table 2 Print options in OOo components Select pages sheets slides to print Yes Yes Yes Yes eas rai pages sheets slides on Yes Ye
428. the Writer Guide Formatting paragraphs You can apply many formats to paragraphs using the buttons on the Formatting toolbar Figure 75 shows the Formatting toolbar as a floating toolbar customized to Show only the icons for paragraph formatting The appearance of the icons may vary with your operating system and the selection of icon size and style in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt View Formatting Y x Default 3 E E fF t e a A pigti on 1 Fi 3 4 5 6 7 amp 9 10 114 12 43 14 1 Open Styles and 5 Align Right 10 Numbering On Off Formatting Window 6 Justified 11 Bullets On Off 2 Apply Style 7 Line Spacing 1 12 Decrease Indent 3 Align Left 8 Line Spacing 1 5 13 Increase Indent 4 Centered 9 Line Spacing 2 14 Paragraph format dialog Figure 75 Formatting toolbar showing icons for paragraph formatting Formatting characters You can apply many formats to characters using the buttons on the Formatting toolbar Figure 76 shows the Formatting toolbar customized to include only the icon for character formatting The appearance of the icons may vary with your operating system and the selection of icon size and style in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt View 90 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 EP betut te Times New Roman he y B 7 u eR 2 2 A L ppa mAH L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13 144 45 1 Open Styles and 6 Italic 12 Font Color Formatting Window 7 Underline 13 Highli
429. the available themes Click on a theme to see its contents displayed in the Gallery window You can display the Gallery in Icon View Figure 285 or Detailed View and you can hide or show the Gallery by clicking on the Hide button similar to the Hide button for the Navigator and the Styles and Formatting window when they are docked Cete EE Co Backgrounds Bullets D Homepage a My Theme IE Rulers B Sounds grounds confetti C Program Files OpenOffice org 3 Basis share gallery www back Control double click here to float Click to hide or show Gallery Figure 285 Icon view of one theme in the Gallery 294 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 By default the Gallery is docked above the workspace To expand the Gallery position the pointer over the line that divides it from the top of the workspace When the pointer changes to parallel lines with arrows click and drag downward The workspace resizes in response As for other docked windows you can float the Gallery by moving the mouse pointer over an edge of the Gallery window holding down the Control key and double clicking Repeat this procedure to dock the Gallery again The default themes are locked no items can be added to or deleted from these themes The locked themes are easily recognizable by right clicking on them the only available option in the pop up menu is Properties In
430. the page Another way to change the scale is to double click on the number shown in the status bar Rectangle selected t1156 4 63 f7 495x290 Information Position Unsaved Digital changes signature Figure 130 Left end of the Impress status bar Slide 1 1 Layout Default O e 75 d Slide Page Zoom slider Zoom number style percent Figure 131 Right end of Impress status bar Navigator x Navigator K 4 T Q The Navigator displays all objects contained in a E Slide 1 document It provides another convenient way to W Shape 1 move around a document and find items in it To 5 rne a 2 v k Slide 2 F d Shape 1 display the Navigator click its icon on the fa Object 1 Standard toolbar choose View gt Navigator on the 7 lel aE s1 menu bar or press Ctrl Shift F5 seee 3 Oo The Navigator is more useful if you give your slides T i and objects pictures spreadsheets and so on gt E Slide 4 meaningful names instead of leaving them as the 5 RE OLE JEC default Object 1 and Shape 1 shown in Figure 132 ShapesAndObjects Figure 132 Navigator 148 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Workspace views Fach of the workspace views is designed to ease the completion of certain tasks it is therefore useful to familiarize yourself with them in order to quickly accomplish those tasks Normal view Normal view is the main view for working with individual slides Use this view to
431. the point directly opposite the midpoint handle to be used for shearing the object This point stays fixed in location the other sides and edges move in relation to it as the mouse is dragged make sure that the handle icon is showing before dragging As with rotation you can set the inclination slanting to occur in steps of 15 by pressing the Shift key while moving the handle 192 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Editing objects To change an object s attributes such as color and border width you can use the Line and Filling toolbar or the context menu If the Line and Filling toolbar Figure 170 is not visible you can display it using View gt Toolbars gt Line and Filling From here you can edit the most common object attributes You can also open the Line dialog by clicking on the Line O icon and the Area dialog by clicking on the Area icon to see more options D r Cy lo o0cm Black v A Color yO Blue 8 v rp I i I ae e aa a o o 2 3 A D 6 fi G 9 10 1 Styles and Formatting 4 Line Style 7 Area 2 Line 5 Line Width 8 9 Area Style Filling 3 Arrow Style 6 Line Color 10 Shadow Figure 170 Line and Filling toolbar When you select text this toolbar changes to show text formatting options The context menu When an object is selected you can right click on the object to bring up a context menu which provides additional access to the options shown above and another way
432. the rulers are the margins Put the mouse cursor over the line between the gray and white sections The pointer turns into a double headed arrow 2 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse to move the margin ES 8g Figure 83 Moving the margins The small arrows on the ruler are used for indenting paragraphs They are often in the same place as the page margins so you need to be careful to move the margin marker not the arrows Place the mouse pointer between the arrows and when the pointer turns into a double headed arrow you can move the margin the indent arrows will move with it Tip To change margins using the Page Style dialog 1 Right click anywhere on the page and select Page from the pop up menu 2 On the Page tab of the dialog type the required distances in the Margins boxes Adding comments to a document Authors and reviewers often use comments formerly called notes to exchange ideas ask for suggestions or mark items needing attention To insert a comment in the text place the cursor in the place the comment refers to and choose Insert gt Comment or press Ctrl Alt N The anchor point of the comment is connected by a dotted line to a box on the right hand side of the page where you can type the text of the comment Writer automatically adds at the bottom of the comment the author s name and a time stamp indicating when the comment was created Figure 84 shows an example of text w
433. this with either the letter d for a total derivative or the partial command for a partial derivative to achieve the effect of a derivative Notice that we have to use braces squiggly brackets to make the Note derivative df over dx df dx partial f over partial y on Vy af partial 2 f over partial t 2 ae t How do align my equations at the equals sign Math does not have a command for aligning equations on a particular character but you can use a matrix to do this as shown below matrix alignr x y alignl 2 Ly 2 alignrx alignl 2 y x 2 y The empty braces around are necessary because is a binary operator and thus needs an expression on each side You can reduce the spacing around if you change the inter column spacing of the matrix 1 With the equation editor open choose Format gt Spacing from the menu bar 2 Inthe Spacing dialog Figure 261 click the Category button and select Matrices in the drop down menu 3 Enter 0 for Column spacing and click OK 264 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 g Spacing Matrix Line spacing Column spacing Category v Default Figure 261 Changing spacing in a matrix formula Numbering equations Equation numbering is one of Math s best hidden features The steps are simple but obscure 1 Start a new line 2 Type fn and then press F3 The fn is replaced by a numbered
434. thods 2 Save versions that are stored as part of the original file However this method can cause problems with documents of non trivial size or complexity especially if you save a lot of versions Avoid this method if you can 3 Use Writer s change marks often called redlines or revision marks to Show where you have added or deleted material or changed formatting Choose Edit gt Changes gt Record Later you or another person can review and accept or reject each change Right click on an individual change and choose Accept Change or Reject Change from the pop up menu or choose Edit gt Changes gt Accept or Reject to view the list of changes and accept or reject them Details are in the Writer Guide Not all changes are recorded For example changing a tab stop from Tip align left to align right and changes in formulas equations or linked graphics are not recorded Using fields Fields are extremely useful features of Writer They are used for data that changes in a document such as the current date or the total number of pages and for inserting document properties such as name author and date of last update Fields are the basis of cross referencing see below automatic numbering of figures tables headings and other elements and a wide range of other functions far too many to describe here See Chapter 14 Working with Fields in the Writer Guide for details Linking to another part of a document
435. ting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 1 Type the text you want to find in the Search for box 2 To replace the text with different text type the new text in the Replace with box 3 You can select various options such as matching the case matching whole words only or doing a search for similar words 4 When you have set up your search click Find To replace text click Replace instead For more information on using Find amp Replace see the Writer Guide If you click Find All OOo selects all instances of the search text in the Tip document Similarly if you click Replace All OOo replaces all matches Caution Use Replace All with caution otherwise you may end up with some hilarious and highly embarrassing mistakes A mistake with Replace All might require a manual word by word search to fix Inserting special characters A special character is one not found on a standard English keyboard For example 34 N are all special characters To insert a special character 1 Place the cursor where you want the character to appear 2 Choose Insert gt Special Character to open the Special Characters dialog 3 Select the characters from any font or mixture of fonts you wish to insert in order then click OK The selected characters are shown in the lower left of the dialog As you select a character it is shown on the lower right along with its numerical code Not Different fonts include different
436. ting a macro it is important to ask two questions before recording 1 Can the task be written as a simple set of commands 2 Can the steps be arranged such that the last command leaves the cursor ready for the next command 328 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 A complicated example I frequently copy rows and columns of data from a web site and format them as a table in a text document First I copy the table from the web site to the clipboard To avoid strange formatting and fonts I paste the text into a Writer document as unformatted text I reformat the text with tabs between columns so that I can use Table gt Convert gt Text to Table to convert to a table I inspect the text to see if I can record a macro to format the text remember the two questions that I ask As an example I copied the FontWeight constants group from the OpenOffice org web site The first column indicates the constant name Each name is followed by a space and a tab DONTKNOW The font weight is not specified known THIN specifies a 50 font weight ULTRALIGHT specifies a 60 font weight LIGHT specifies a 75 font weight SEMILIGHT specifies a 90 font weight NORMAL specifies a normal font weight SEMIBOLD specifies a 110 font weight BOLD specifies a 150 font weight ULTRABOLD specifies a 175 font weight BLACK specifies a 200 font weight I want the first column to contain the numeric value the second column the name a
437. ting help F1 Shift F1 Shift F2 ESC Opens OOo Help dialog In OOo Help jumps to first help page of the selected tab tip for an item underneath the cursor Shows tip for a selected item In OOo Help goes up one level Turns cursor into the What s This question mark Shows Managing documents Ctrl F4 or Alt F4 Ctrl O Ctrl S Ctrl N Shift Ctrl N Ctrl P Ctrl Q Del Shift Del Backspace the last open document is closed Launches Open dialog to open a document Saves the current document If you are working on a dialog Creates a new document Opens the Templates and Documents dialog Opens the Print dialog to print the document Closes quits the application folders Items can be retrieved from the Recycle Bin Garbage Bin folders Items are permanently deleted they can not be retrieved from the Recycle Bin In the Save and Open dialogs shows contents of the current directory s parent folder Closes the current document Closes OpenOffice org when previously unsaved file the shortcut launches the Save As In the Save and Open dialogs deletes the selected files or In the Save and Open dialogs deletes the selected files or Navigating across OpenOffice org F6 Shift F6 F10 Shift F10 Selects next subwindow for example Menu bar Standard toolbar document view and so on Selects previous subwindow Selects first menu typic
438. tion and Size dialog you can enter precise values concerning size and position For more information on all of these menu options see the Draw Guide Using the 3D Settings toolbar If the selected Fontwork object is a 3D object you can also use the options on the 3D Settings toolbar You can also change a 2D Fontwork object into a 3D object or change a 3D object into a 2D object by clicking the Extrusion On Off icon on the 3D Settings toolbar For more information see the Draw Guide 3D Settings x EIFLE I l Extrusion Depth On Off Direction 3D Color Tilt Down Up Lighting Surface Left Right Figure 295 3D Settings toolbar Moving and resizing Fontwork objects When you select a Fontwork object eight blue squares known as handles appear around the edge of the object as shown below You can drag these handles to resize the object A yellow dot also appears on the object This dot q qo m may be along an edge of the object or it may be somewhere else see figure to right for an example If you hover the pointer over this yellow dot the pointer turns into a hand symbol You can drag the dot in different directions to distort the object Hovering the pointer over other parts of the object turns the pointer into the usual symbol for dragging the object to another part of the page s For precise control of the location and size of the object use the Position and Size dialog 306 Getting Started wit
439. tions in this chapter show the list as it appears when a Writer document is open Click the marker or triangle by OpenOffice org on the left hand side A list of pages drops down Selecting an item in the list causes the right hand side of the dialog to display the relevant page Options OpenOffice org penOtice org User Data General Memory View Print Paths Colors Fonts Security Appearance Accessibility Java Online Update Improvement Program Figure 1 8 OpenOffice org options The Back button has the same effect on all pages of the Options dialog Note It resets the options to the values that were in place when you opened OpenOffice org User Data options Because OOo uses the name or initials stored in the OpenOffice org User Data page for several things including document properties created by and last edited by information and the name of the author of notes and changes you will want to ensure that the correct information appears here Fill in the form shown in Figure 19 or amend or delete any existing incorrect information 32 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Address Company First Last name Initials Jared Kobos JK Street City State Zip Country Region Title Position Tel Home WWork Fax E mail Figure 19 Filling in user data General options The options on the OpenOffice org General page are described below TT Hel 7 S k ps
440. to the normal Slide view The changes made to one of the slides in Normal view for example changes to the bullet point style or the color of the title area and so on will not be overridden by Subsequent changes to the slide master There are cases however where it is desirable to revert a manually modified element of the slide to the style defined in the Slide master to do that select that element and choose Format gt Default Formatting from the menu bar Using a slide master to add text to all slides Some of the supplied slide masters have text objects in the footer You can add other text objects to the master page for your slides to act as a header or a footer 1 Choose View gt Master gt Slide Master from the menu bar 2 On the Drawing toolbar select the Text icon 3 Click once and drag in the master page to draw a text object and then type or paste your text into the object or add fields as described below 4 Choose View gt Normal when you are finished Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 169 The Impress slide master comes with three pre configured areas for date footer and page number Object Area for AutoLayouts Select Insert gt Page Number or Insert gt Date and Time to open a dialog box where you can configure these three areas 5 Header and Footer Slide Notes and Handouts Include on slide Date and time Apply to All Fixed apply Variable Language 10 10 1
441. to the supplied menus and to menus you have created On the Customize dialog select the menu in the Menu list and click the Add button in the Menu Content section of the dialog On the Add Commands dialog Figure 316 select a category and then the command and click Add The dialog remains open so you can select several commands When you have finished adding commands click Close Back on the Customize dialog you can use the up and down arrow buttons to arrange the commands in your preferred sequence Modifying menu entries In addition to changing the sequence of entries on a menu or submenu you can add Submenus rename or delete the entries and add group separators To begin select the menu or submenu in the Menu list near the top of the Customize page then select the entry in the Entries list under Menu Content Click the Modify button and choose the required action from the drop down list of actions Most of the actions should be self explanatory Begin a group adds a separator line after the highlighted entry 348 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 g Add Commands ka To add a command to a menu select the category and then the command You can also drag the command to the Commands list of the Menus tab page in the Customize dialog Category Commands Application z About OOo dev Add View AutoPilot Address Data Source Templates AutoPilot Presentation Edit Bibliography Database Options Create HTML Document
442. troducing OpenOffice org includes instructions on starting new Calc documents opening existing documents and saving documents A special case for Calc is opening and saving comma separated values CSV which are text files that contain the cell contents of a single sheet Each line in a CSV file represents a row in a spreadsheet Commas semicolons or other characters are used Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 109 to separate the cells Text is entered in quotation marks numbers are entered without quotation marks Opening a CSV file To open a CSV file in Calc 1 Choose File gt Open 2 Locate the CSV file that you want to open 3 If the file has a csv extension select the file and click Open 4 If the file has another extension for example txt select the file select Text CSV csv txt xIs in the File type box scroll down into the spreadsheet section to find it and then click Open 5 On the Text Import dialog Figure 93 select the Separator options to divide the text in the file into columns You can preview the layout of the imported data at the bottom of the dialog Right click a column in the preview to set the format or to hide the column If the CSV file uses a text delimiter character that is not in the Text delimiter list click in the box and type the character 6 Click OK to open the file 5 Text Import sample csv Import Character set Unicode UTF 8 iw Language Default Engl
443. two table lists to open a menu b Select Edit to open the Relations dialog Figure 185 c Select Update cascade d Select Delete cascade 214 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 e Click OK to close the Relations dialog and choose File gt Save to save the Relation Design window While these options are not strictly necessary they do help Having them selected permits you to update a table that has a relationship defined with another table It also permits you to delete a field from the table Update options Delete options CD No action C No action Update cascade Delete cascade C Set null C Set null O Set default C Set default OK Cancel Help Figure 185 Update options and Delete options section Creating a database form Databases are used to store data But how is the data put into the database Forms are used to do this In the language of databases a form is a front end for data entry and editing Date Thursday April 12 2007 Wo if Thursday April 12 2007 Fuel Purchases FuelCost FuelQuanity 26 45 11 650 Odometer PaymentType Figure 186 Fields of a simple form Figure 187 Simple form with additions A simple form consists of the fields from a table Figure 186 More complex forms can contain much more including additional text graphics selection boxes and many other elements Figure 187 is made from the same table with a text label Fuel Purchases a list b
444. u lose the password there will be no way to recover the document Please also note that this password is case sensitive Figure 11 Entering a password for a document Writer and Calc provide a second level of protection which allows a file to be viewed but not changed without a password that is the file opens in read only mode Saving a document automatically You can choose to have OpenOffice org save files for you automatically Automatic saving like manual saving overwrites the last saved state of the file To set up automatic file saving 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General 2 Mark Save AutoRecovery information every and set the time interval Renaming and deleting files You can rename or delete files within the OOo dialogs just as you can in your usual file manager However you cannot copy or paste files within the dialogs Using the Open and Save As dialogs You can choose whether to use the OpenOffice org Open and Save As dialogs or the ones provided by your operating system To view or change which type of dialog OpenOffice org uses 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt General 2 Select the Use OpenOffice org dialogs option Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 25 This section discusses the OpenOffice org Open and Save As dialogs Figure 12 shows the Save As dialog the Open dialog is similar Save as Ed C Documents and Settings Jean Hollis WeberiMy Docum
445. u want to make changes to many sheets at once Single sheet Click on the sheet tab for the sheet you want to select The active sheet becomes white see Figure 100 Multiple contiguous sheets To select multiple contiguous sheets 1 Click on the sheet tab for the first desired sheet 2 Move the mouse pointer over the sheet tab for the last desired sheet 3 Hold down the Shift key and click on the sheet tab All the tabs between these two sheets will turn white Any actions that you perform will now affect all highlighted sheets 116 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Multiple non contiguous sheets To select multiple non contiguous sheets 1 Click on the sheet tab for the first sheet 2 Move the mouse pointer over the second sheet tab 3 Hold down the Control key and click on the sheet tab 4 Repeat as necessary The selected tabs will turn white Any actions that you perform will now affect all highlighted sheets All sheets Right click any one of the sheet tabs and choose Select All Sheets from the pop up menu Working with columns and rows Inserting columns and rows Columns and rows can be inserted individually or in groups When you insert a single new column it is inserted to the left of the highlighted column When you insert a single new row it is inserted above the highlighted row OES Cells in the new columns or rows are formatted like the corresponding cells in the column or row before
446. uch as images or the objects are large OOo s performance may improve if you increase the memory for OOo or the memory per object If you find that objects seem to disappear from a document that contains a lot of them increase the number of objects in the cache The objects are still in the file even if you cannot see them on screen e To load the Quickstarter an icon on the desktop or in the system tray when you start your computer select the option near the bottom of the dialog This makes OpenOffice org start faster the trade off is OOo uses some memory 34 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 even when not being used This option sometimes called Enable systray quickstarter is not available on all operating systems Undo Number of steps 100 Graphics cache Use for OpenOffice org g MB Memory per object 24 MB Remove from memory after 00 10 H hh mm Cache for inserted objects Number of objects 20 OpenOffice org Quickstarter Load OpenOffice org during system start up Figure 21 Choosing Memory options for the OpenOffice org applications View options The options on the OpenOffice org View page affect the way the document window looks and behaves Some of these options are described below Set them to suit your personal preferences User Interface Graphics output Scaling 100 Use hardware acceleration Icon size and style Use Anti Aliasing Small Galaxy defau Mouse Use sy
447. uel table and FuellID value of the End Reading query to equal one 1 1 Type End Reading FuelID Fuel FuelID in the field to the right of the Odometer field of the Fuel Table Type the numeral 1 one in the Criterion cell of this column Field FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading FuellD Fuel FuellD Table End Reading End Reading Fuel Visible K K K K Function Figure 228 Typing in calculation of fields 2 Calculate the distance traveled e Type End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer in the Field cell e Type gt 0 in the Criterion cell 242 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Field End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer o Or x Figure 229 Field for distance traveled calculations 3 Calculate fuel economy Type End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer End Reading FuelQuantity in the next column to the right of the word Field End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer End Reading FuelQuantity Visible Ix Function Or Figure 230 Fuel economy calculation field When entering fields for these calculations you must follow this format table or query name followed by a period follow by the field name For hyphenated or multiple word names table or query use double quotes around the table or query name The query will then add the rest of the Note double quotes as in Figure 230 Use the arithmetic
448. ueries Reports are generated from the database s tables or queries They can contain all of the fields of the table or query or just a selected group of fields Reports can be static or dynamic Static reports contain the data in the selected fields at the time the report was created Dynamic reports can be updated to show the latest data For example a report on expenses for a vacation in the past should probably be a static report because it is based upon specific data that does not change However a report on the fuel data should probably be a dynamic report because this report depends upon data that does change Dynamic reports update only the data that is changed or added to a table or query They do not show any modifications made to the table or Caution query itself For example after creating the report below open the fuel economy query created in the previous section For the End A Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer column change the number 1 to the number 3 The report will be identical before and after you make the change All reports are based upon a single table or query So you need first to decide what fields you want to use in the report If you want to use fields from different tables you must first combine these fields in a single query Then you can create a report on this query For example a report on vacation expenses includes both fuel costs and meal costs These values are contained in fields of two
449. ument To E mail Address wt Copy to 7 Personalize document Subject 6 Save print or send Send as HTML Message im test email message odt Send all documents OFrom i 5 Send documents Figure 281 Sending a document as an email message 7 Type a subject for your email and click Send documents OOo sends the e mails Digital signing of documents To sign a document digitally you need a personal key also known as a certificate A personal key is stored on your computer as a combination of a private key which must be kept secret and a public key which you add to your documents when you Sign them You can get a certificate from a certification authority which may be a private company or a governmental institution When you apply a digital signature to a document a kind of checksum is computed from the document s content plus your personal key The checksum and your public key are stored together with the document When someone later opens the document on any computer with a recent version of OpenOffice org the program will compute the checksum again and compare it with the stored checksum If both are the same the program will signal that you see the original unchanged document In addition the program can show you the public key information from the certificate You can compare the public key with the public key that is published on the web site of the certificat
450. uments some as regular files that you must select and import and some as macro text that should be copied and pasted into the Basic IDE use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic to open the OpenOffice org Macros dialog choose the macro to edit and then click Edit to open the macro in the Basic IDE Some macros are available as free downloads on the Internet see Table 3 Adding an existing macro on page 323 describes how to add these macros to your macros library Table 3 Places to find macro examples http www ooomacros org Excellent collection of packaged macros http www pitonyak org oo php Reference materials regarding macros http www pitonyak org database Reference materials regarding database macros http development openoffice org Lots of links to everything http www oooforum org Many examples and help Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 337 How to run a macro A typical method to run a macro is as follows 1 Use Tools gt Macros gt Run Macro to open the Macro Selector dialog see Figure 309 2 Select the library and module in the Library list left hand side 3 Select the macro in the Macro name list right hand side 4 Click Run to run the macro Select the library that contains the macro you want Then select the macro under Macro name Library Macro name ClearFormulasOnSheetOne Run CopyCells Cancel El Dum
451. urce code for a piece of software the software evolves People improve it people adapt it people fix bugs For more information on Free and Open Source software visit these websites Open Source Initiative OSI http www opensource org Free Software Foundation FSF http www gnu org What are open standards An open standard provides a means of doing something that is independent of manufacturer or vendor thus enabling competing software programs to freely use the same file formats HTML XML and ODF are examples of open standards for documents An open standard meets the following requirements e Itis well documented with the complete specification publically available either free or at a nominal charge e It can be freely copied distributed and used The intellectual property of the standard is made irrevocably available on a royalty free basis e Itis standardized and maintained in an independent open forum also called standards organization using an open process What is OpenDocument OpenDocument ODF is an XML based file format for office documents text documents spreadsheets drawings presentations and more developed at OASIS http www oasis open org who an independent international standards group Unlike other file formats ODF is an open standard It is publicly available royalty free and without legal or other restrictions therefore ODF files are not tied toa specific office suit
452. us one e Click the mouse to move to the next slide e Press the spacebar on the keyboard to advance to the next slide Right click anywhere on the screen to open a menu from which you can navigate the Slides and set other options To exit the slide show at any time including at the end press the Esc key Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 173 Se OpenOffice org 3 Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw Vector Drawing in OpenOffice org 174 What is Draw Draw is a vector graphics drawing program although it can also perform some operations on raster graphics pixels Using Draw you can quickly create a wide variety of graphical images Vector graphics store and display an image as simple geometric elements such as lines circles and polygons rather than a collections of pixels points on the screen Vector graphics allow for easier storage and scaling of the image Draw is fully integrated into the OpenOffice org OOo suite and this simplifies exchanging graphics with all components of the suite For example if you create an image in Draw reusing it in a Writer document is as simple as copying and pasting the image You can also work with drawings directly from within Writer or Impress using a subset of the functions and tools from Draw Draw s functionality is extensive even though it was not designed to rival high end graphics applications it possesses more functions than the drawing tools that are
453. ve more than one entry per date this relationship between the Vacations and Fuel tables is one to many It is designated 1 n The Vacations table also contains several fields for the type of payment used For each field listing the payment type there is only one entry from the Payment Type table This is a one to one relationship one field in one table to one entry from the other table It is designated 1 1 Other tables also contain fields for the type of payment The relationship between the fields of those tables and the Payment Type table are also 1 1 Since the Payment Type table only provides a static list we will not be defining a relationship between the Payment Type table and the fields of the other tables which use the entries of the Payment Type table That will be done when the forms are created The Fuel and Maintenance tables do not really have a relationship even though they Share similar fields Date and Odometer As you create your own databases you need to also determine where Tip tables are related and how 1 To begin defining relationships choose Tools gt Relationships The Automobile OpenOffice org Base Relation Design window opens and the Add Tables dialog pops up You can also open it by clicking the Add Tables icon on the Relation Design window 2 On the Add Tables dialog use either of these ways to add a table to the Relation Design window Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 213 Double
454. visible only when required To insert a conditional hyphen inside a word click where you want the hyphen to appear and press Control hyphen The word will be hyphenated at this position when it is at the end of the line even if automatic hyphenation for this paragraph is switched off Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 93 Formatting pages Writer provides several ways for you to control page layouts page styles columns frames tables and sections For more information see Chapter 4 Formatting Pages in the Writer Guide Page layout is usually easier if you show text object table and section boundaries in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Appearance and paragraph ends tabs breaks and other items in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt Formatting Aids Tip Which layout method to choose The best layout method varies depending on what the final document should look like and what sort of information will be in the document Here are some examples For a book similar to this user guide with one column of text some figures without text beside them and some other figures with descriptive text use page styles for basic layout and tables to place figures beside descriptive text when necessary T an Tua amnis de eee Ce dele ie ER a ed quel eee ae ep a a a St ee Whetdos DpenOthee or grcludaT TS Se ee ed eee For an index or other document with two Tesna columns of text where th
455. w Publishing via FTP Proxy is not supported Save settings recommended Save as Web Wizard Settings To edit or view the document s underlying HTML code open the document and then choose View gt HTML Source or click the HTML Source icon on the Main toolbar Saving Calc spreadsheets as web pages Calc can save files as HTML documents As for Writer choose File gt Save As and select HTML Document or choose File gt Wizards gt Web Page If the file contains more than one sheet the additional sheets will follow one another in the HTML file Links to each sheet will be placed at the top of the document Calc also allows the insertion of links directly into the spreadsheet using the Hyperlink dialog Saving Impress presentations as web pages You can export presentations as Macromedia Flash files choose File gt Export and select Macromedia Flash for the file type You can also convert presentations into a series of web pages as described below Saving as web pages HTML format does not retain animation and slide Note transitions 1 To begin choose File gt Export and select HTML Document as the file type 2 Create a folder for the files supply a name for the resulting HTML file and click Save The HTML Export Wizard opens Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages 317 Depending on the size of your presentation and the number of graphics it contains the HTML export function may create many HTML JPG Note
456. wing choices e Type of fax business or personal e Document elements like the date subject line business fax salutation and complementary close e Options for sender and recipient information business fax e Text to include in the footer business fax To create a template using a wizard 1 From the main menu choose File gt Wizards gt type of template required File Edit View Insert Format Table Tools Window H O New ry as H g7 B B3 Open Ctrl O Ti pejavu Serif Recent Documents Wizards i Letter Close Fax fs save Ctril S i Agenda Save As Ctrl Shift S Presentation Save All Web Page z i Document Converter SE Euro Converter i Export f Export as PDF fe Address Data Source Figure 55 Creating a template using a wizard 2 Follow the instructions on the pages of the wizard This process is slightly different for each type of template but the format is very similar 3 In the last section of the wizard you can specify the name and location for Saving the template The default location is your user templates directory but you can choose a different location if you prefer 4 Finally you have the option of creating a new document from your template immediately or manually changing the template For future documents you can re use the template created by the wizard just as you would use any other template Chapter 3 Using St
457. word REM short for remark starts a macro comment All text after REM on the same line is ignored As a short cut the single quote character can also be used to start a comment StarBasic is not case sensitive for keywords so REM Rem and rem all start a comment If you use symbolic constants defined by the API it is Tip safer to assume that the names are case sensitive symbolic constants are an advanced topic not usually needed by people that use the macro recorder Defining subroutines with SUB Individual macros are stored in subroutines defined with the keyword SUB The end of a subroutine is indicated by the words END SUB The code starts by defining the subroutine named Main which is empty and does nothing The next subroutine EnterMyName contains the generated code Ti OpenOffice org always creates an empty subroutine named Main when Ip it creates a module There are advanced topics that are beyond the scope of this document but knowing about them might be of interest e You can write a macro so that values can be passed to the subroutine The values are called arguments Recorded macros do not accept arguments e Another kind of subroutine is called a function A function is a subroutine that returns a value The keyword FUNCTION is used rather than SUB to define a function Generated macros are always of type SUB Defining variables using DIM You can write information on a piece of paper so that you can look at it
458. xample we have chosen Ctrl 9 In the Functions section at the bottom of the dialog scroll down in the Category list to Styles Click the expansion symbol usually a sign or triangle to expand the list of styles Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org 353 Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events Shortcut keys Text body Heading 1 Heading 2 Heading 3 Heading 4 Heading 5 List 1 Bold Double Underline Centered Numbering Modify 4 OpenOffice org Macrc E Styles PageStyles NumberingStyles hal List 1 Start List 2 List 2 Cont List 2 End List 2 Start List 3 List 3 Cont OpenOffice org Writer Figure 321 Defining keyboard shortcuts for applying styles 5 Choose the category of style This example uses a paragraph style but you 6 7 can also choose character styles and others The Function list will display the names of the available styles for the selected category The example shows some of OOo s predefined styles To assign Ctrl 9 to be the shortcut key combination for the List 1 style select List 1 in the Function list and then click Modify Ctrl 9 now appears in the Keys list on the right and List 1 appears next to Ctrl 9 in the Shortcut keys box at the top Make any other required changes and then click OK to save these settings and close the dialog Saving changes to a file 1 After making
459. y the prepackaged ones and also create new ones Presentation styles affect three elements of a slide master the background background objects such as icons decorative lines and text frames and the text placed on the slide Text styles are further divided into Notes Outline 1 through Outline 9 Subtitle and Title The outline styles are used for the different levels of the outline to which they belong For example Outline 2 is used for the subpoints of Outline 1 and Outline 3 is used for the subpoints of Outline 2 Graphic styles affect many of the elements of a slide Notice that text styles exist in both the presentation and graphic style selections Slide masters Impress comes with several prepackaged slide masters They are shown in the Master Pages section of the Tasks pane This section has three subsections Used in This Presentation Recently Used and Available for Use Click the sign next to the name of a subsection to expand it to show thumbnails of the slides or click the sign to collapse the subsection to hide the thumbnails Each of the slide masters shown in the Available for Use list is from a template of the Same name If you have created your own templates or added templates from other sources slide masters from those templates will also appear in this list 166 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Tasks View xX Master Pages Used in This Presentation Recently Used PMs img Bee IFI U
460. y choose the color of the objects in your drawing The first box in the panel corresponds to transparency no color You can access several specialized color palettes in Draw as well as change individual colors to your own taste To do this choose Format gt Area or the pouring can icon on the Line and Filling toolbar This opens the Area dialog Choose the Colors tab To load another palette click on the Load Color List button circled The file selector dialog asks you to choose one of the standard OOo palettes files bearing the file extension soc For example web soc is a color palette that is particularly adapted to creating drawings that are going to appear in Web pages The colors will correctly display on workstations with screens displaying at least 256 colors The color selection box also lets you individually change any color by modifying the numerical values in the fields provided to the right of the color palette You can use the color schemes known as CMYK Cyan Magenta Yellow Black and RGB Red Green Blue 178 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 Area Shadow Transparency Colors Gradients Hatching Bitmaps Propertes Name Blue 8 Add Color C Blue 8 inal Modify Table standard TEL LL ee ol E oy im EEEN EEE TTTitt tT siamese iii tii aie HPP tt TTtittls amp mmm it Eee Figure 156 Changing the color palette Click on the Edit button to open the
461. y of the document such as Zoom and Web Layout e Insert contains commands for inserting elements into your document such as Header Footer and Picture e Format contains commands such as Styles and Formatting and AutoCorrect for formatting the layout of your document e Table shows all commands to insert and edit a table in a text document e Tools contains functions such as Spelling and Grammar Customize and Options e Window contains commands for the display window e Help contains links to the OpenOffice org Help file What s This and information about the program See How to get help on page 13 Toolbars OOo has several types of toolbars docked floating and tear off Docked toolbars can be moved to different locations or made to float and floating toolbars can be docked The top docked toolbar default position is called the Standard toolbar The Standard toolbar is consistent across the OpenOffice org applications The second toolbar across the top default location is the Formatting toolbar Itisa context sensitive bar that shows the relevant tools in response to the cursor s current position or selection For example when the cursor is on a graphic the Formatting bar provides tools for formatting graphics when the cursor is in text the tools are for formatting text Displaying or hiding toolbars To display or hide toolbars choose View gt Toolbars then click on the name of a toolbar in th
462. yles and Templates 67 Editing a template You can edit a template s styles and content and then if you wish you can reapply the template s styles to documents that were created from that template Note that you can only reapply styles You cannot reapply content To edit a template 1 From the main menu choose File gt Templates gt Edit A standard file browser window opens 2 Select the template that you want to edit 3 Edit the template just as you would any other document To save your changes choose File gt Save from the main menu Updating a document from a changed template The next time you open a document that was created from the changed template the following message appears The ternplate OOo03 chapter template on which this document is based has been modified Do you want to update style based formattings according to the modified template Update Styles Keep Old Styles Figure 56 Update styles message Click Update Styles to apply the template s changed styles to the document Click Keep Old Styles if you do not want to apply the template s changed styles to the document but see Caution notice below If you choose Keep Old Styles in the message box shown in Figure 56 that message will not appear again the next time you open the document Caution after changing the template it is based on You will not get another chance to update the styles from the template although you can use th
463. you can rotate a group of objects in its entirety Groups obtained through common selection of several objects are undone as soon as you click outside the group However you can group objects and keep those selected objects grouped together Maintaining groups and undoing groups To group objects first select the objects then right click and choose Group from the pop up menu You can also use the keyboard shortcut Control Shift G or choose Modify gt Group from the menu bar When objects are grouped any editing operations carried out on that group are applied to all members of the group If you click on one member of the group the whole group is selected The objects of a group retain their own individual properties To undo a group right click and choose Ungroup from the pop up menu use the keyboard shortcut Control Alt Shift G or choose Modify gt Ungroup from the menu bar You can edit a member of a group individually without breaking the group To do this right click and choose Enter group or double click on the group Combining objects In contrast to grouping functions combinations create a new object subsequent un combining in the same manner as ungrouping is not possible Select a collection of objects then right click and choose Combine from the pop up menu After you have selected more than one object the Merge Subtract and Intersect functions can be reached in the Modify gt Shapes menu or though the group
464. your keyboard shortcut assignments click the Save button at the right of the Customize dialog Figure 321 Changes to the shortcut key assignments can be saved in a keyboard configuration file for use at a later time thus permitting you to create and apply different configurations as the need arises To save keyboard shortcuts to a file 2 In the Save Keyboard Configuration dialog select All files from the Save as Type list 354 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 3 Next enter a name for the keyboard configuration file in the File name box or select an existing file from the list If you need to browse to find a file from another location 4 Click Save A confirmation dialog appears if you are about to overwrite an existing file otherwise there will be no feedback and the file will be saved Loading a saved keyboard configuration To load a saved keyboard configuration file and replace your existing configuration click the Load button at the right of the Customize dialog and then select the configuration file from the Load Keyboard Configuration dialog Resetting the shortcut keys To reset all of the keyboard shortcuts to their default values click the Reset button near the bottom right of the Customize dialog Use this feature with care as no confirmation dialog will be displayed the defaults will be set without any further notice or user input Assigning macros to events In OOo when something happens we
465. zed Start OOo minimized norestore Suppress restart restore after fatal errors invisible No startup screen no default document and no UI This is useful for third party applications that use functionality provided by OOo If you have a customized version of OOo such as the one provided by Linux Mandrake Gentoo Debian and Ubuntu you can start Writer by typing at the command line oowriter Although the command syntax differs the effect is identical it starts OOo with an empty Writer document Parts of the main window The main window is similar in each component of OOo although some details vary See the chapters in this book about Writer Calc Draw and Impress for descriptions of those details Common features include the menu bar the standard toolbar and the formatting toolbar at the top of the window and the status bar at the bottom Menu bar The Menu bar is located across the top of the OOo window just below the Title bar When you choose one of the menus listed below a submenu drops down to show commands Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 17 e File contains commands that apply to the entire document such as Open Save and Export as PDF e Edit contains commands for editing the document such as Undo xxx where xxx is the command to undo and Find amp Replace It also contains commands to cut copy and paste selected parts of your document e View contains commands for controlling the displa

OpenOffice.org OpenOffice - 3.3 Getting Started Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents